PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE

LABORATORY ON PLOT 2-8 WATERWORKS ROAD ENTEBBE

UGANDA

TENDER DOCUMENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 4 STANDARD BIDDING DOCUMENTS

VOLUME 2 OF 4 SPECIFICATIONS
VOLUME 3 OF 4 BILLS OF QUANTITIES
VOLUME 4 OF 4 DRAWINGS

DATE : NOVEMBER 2021

 PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ITEM DESCRIPTION PAGE NO.
A. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................... 2

1.0 GENERAL NOTES ................................................................................................................................... 3

2.0 GENERAL ITEMS .................................................................................................................................... 5

3.0 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS .................................................................................................. 7

4.0 EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS ................................................................................................... 9

5.0 CONCRETE WORK ................................................................................................................................ 15

6.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK ............................................................................................................... 41

7.0 WALLING ................................................................................................................................................ 49

8.0 ASPHALT WORK .................................................................................................................................... 55

9.0 ROOFING ................................................................................................................................................ 58

10.0 CARPENTRY ........................................................................................................................................... 61

11.0 JOINERY.................................................................................................................................................. 66

12.0 IRON MONGERY ................................................................................................................................... 73

13.0 METAL WORK ........................................................................................................................................ 75

14.0 PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS ...................................................................... 78

15.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .......................................................................................................... 87

16.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES .........................................................................................106

16.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE ........................................................................................107

17.0 GLAZING ................................................................................................................................................ 112

18.0 PAINTING AND DECORATING ......................................................................................................... 118

19.0 DRAINAGE .............................................................................................................................................122

20.0 EXTERNAL WORKS .............................................................................................................................130

21.0 SOLAR INSTALLATIONS .....................................................................................................................144

22.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS .....................................148

23.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS .................................. 200

CONTENTS PAGE 1

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

A. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 2

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

1.0 GENERAL NOTES

GENERAL NOTES 3

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 SPECIFICATIONS

1.0 GENERAL NOTES

(Including General Specifications and General Conditions)

NOTE: The Contractor is to allow in his rates for all expenses in connection with testing of materials as
specified including the supply and preparation of materials to be tested, the cost of
laboratory charges, etc.

“Equivalent of Standards and Codes and Brand Names”

Wherever reference is made in the Contract to specific standards and codes to be met by the goods and
materials to be furnished, and work performed or tested, the provisions of the latest current edition or
revision of the relevant standards and codes in effect shall apply, unless otherwise expressly stated in the
Contract. Where such standards and codes are national, or relate to a particular country or region, other
authoritative standards that ensure a substantially equal or higher quality than the standards of codes
specified will be accepted subject to the Architect/Project Manager’s prior review and written consent.
Differences between the standards specified and the proposed alternative standards shall be fully
described in writing by the Contractor and submitted to the Architect/Project Manager at least 28 days
prior to the date when the Contractor desires the Architect/Project Manager’s consent. In the event, the
Architect/Project Manager determines that such proposed deviations do not ensure substantially equal or
higher quality, the Contractor shall comply with the standards specified in the documents.

GENERAL NOTES 4

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

2.0 GENERAL ITEMS

GENERAL NOTES 5

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

2.0 GENERAL ITEMS

2.1 Materials generally

All materials shall be new and of the qualities and kinds specified herein and equal to
approved samples. Deliveries shall be made sufficiently in advance to enable samples to be
taken and tested if required. No materials shall be used until approved materials which are
damaged in any way shall be immediately removed from the site at the Contractor’s expense.

2.2 Alternatives to proprietary brands or specified standards

Where materials are specified to a particular standard or by their proprietary names or where
fittings are specified by catalogues, numbers or descriptions, the Contractor may offer
alternatives which are of equal quality. In such event the tender must be qualified by listing
the various alternatives to be used. The successful tenderer must then subsequently submit
samples of the alternative materials to the Architect as soon as practicable after the award of
the Contract, and must obtain his written approval before purchasing.

2.3 Measuring and testing equipment

The Contractor shall provide on the Site the following equipment for carrying out measuring
and control tests and maintain the same in full working order, if relevant to the scope of the
works:-

a) Straight edges 2 metres and 4 metres long for testing accuracy

of finished surface

b) 150 mm Steel cube moulds with base plates and tamping rods to B.S. 1881.

c) Two 30 metres steel tapes.

d) One dumpy or quick set level and staff.

2.4 Minor details of construction

Minor details of construction which are fairly and obviously intended and which may not
definitely be referred to in this Specification and/or Drawings, but which are usual in sound
building practice and are essential to the Works, shall be considered as included in the
Contract Sum.

2.5 Samples

The Contractor is to allow in his rates for all expenses in connection with testing of materials
as specified including the supply and preparation of materials to be tested, the cost of
laboratory charges, etc.

GENERAL NOTES 6

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

3.0 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS

EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 7

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

3.0 DEMOLITIONS AND ALTERATIONS

3.1 GENERALLY

The Contractor is required to visit the site of the existing building and ascertain for himself
the nature of the works and no claim arising from lack of knowledge in this respect will be
entertained. The dimensions and quantities given in this section are approximate and the
Contractor is referred to the site to ascertain the exact nature of the work.

The items pulling down and alterations are to include for both labour and materials and for
any shoring, needling and temporary works in connection therewith. The Contractor must
allow in his pricing for making good all works disturbed in all trades and carting away all
debris.

The Contractor must give all the necessary notices and must exercise due care in the
demolitions. He must not collapse large sections of walls, floors, etc. and must provide all
necessary shoring and supports during the demolitions.

During demolition the Contractor shall keep the debris constantly watered to minimize the
dust arising and this shall be included in his prices.

All materials arising from the demolitions, unless specifically stated otherwise, are to become
the property of the Contractor and any credit allowed for the value of such materials shall be
shown in the space provided, if any or valued and negotiated with the Project Manager.

All materials, including rubbish, shall be removed from the site as soon as possible.

The Contractor is to erect dust-proof screens to the approval of the Project Manager where
deemed necessary and to remove them on completion of the works, all to the Project
Manager’s satisfaction. Such screens shall be deemed to have been priced for.

3.2 INTERPRETATION OF TERMS

a) “Demolish” shall be deemed to mean cutting away, breaking up, demolishing, pulling
down, taking down, removing, etc., as the context requires and shall include in all cases
temporarily strutting and supporting and making good remaining works as necessary,
and clearing away and removing from site all debris, etc.

b) “Remove” shall be deemed to mean taking down, hacking up, breaking down,
removing,
etc., and clearing away from site and all other expenses thereby entailed.

c) “Making good” shall be deemed to mean all making good, fitting, facing up, plastering,
repairing and repainting of match existing work.

d) “To match” shall mean to be equal to relevant existing work in design, workmanship
and all other respects.

e) “Re-fix” shall apply to existing materials arising from the works and shall mean take
from store and fix in new position, including making good, repairing and adjusting as
necessary.

EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 8

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

4.0 EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS

EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 9

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

4.0 EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS

4.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The Contractor shall comply with requirement of the following codes of practice:-

4.1.1 Codes of Practice:

a) Site investigations C.P. 2001

b) Earthworks C.P. 2003

c) Foundations C.P. 2004

d) Protection of building
against water from the ground C.P. 102

e) NOTE: The Contractor’s attention is drawn to section “D” of The

Standard Method of Measurements for Building Works.

4.2.0 GENERALLY

4.2.1 Visit to the Site

The Contractor shall visit the site and ascertain for himself the nature of the soil to be
excavated. The rates for excavation shall include excavation in any type of material or made
up ground excluding rock as defined below. No claim will be allowed for lack of knowledge
in this respect.

4.2.2 Levels

Immediately following the issue of the order to commence, the Contractor shall carry out
and record a check level grid of the site which shall be agreed between the Architect and the
Contractor within one week of the above order being given.

4.2.3 Setting out

Setting out shall be approved before work is commenced.

4.2.4 Clear Site

Generally, clear the site of all shrubs and trees, (i.e. not exceeding 600 mm girth), grub up
roots and fill the holes with red earth. Trees and shrubs not directed for destruction to be
made good at the Contractor’s expense.

4.2.5 Excavation for Bases and Strip Foundation

Excavations for bases and strip foundations shall be to the widths, depth, and levels shown
on the Architect’s drawings. Rates shall be deemed to include for whatsoever alternative
method the Contractor chooses to adopt.

4.2.6 Inspection of Excavations

The Architect shall be called to inspect the completed excavations before any permanent
works can be commenced in them. The Contractor shall keep all excavations dry and free
from rain or other surface water.

4.2.7 Excavations Below Required Levels

EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 10

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Excavations made below required levels shall be filled with Mass Concrete (1:4:8) at the
Contractor’s expense.

4.2.8 Disposal of Earth

Rates for filling of disposal of earth shall include for any double handling, except that
resulting from a written order by the Architect to deposit earth in temporary spoil heaps
pending its final disposal. Filling shall be in approved filling material to required levels in
specified layers carefully rammed and consolidated. Disposal of all surplus excavated
material shall be as instructed. Rates shall include for loading and wheeling off the site to a
tip to be provided by the Contractor.

4.2.9 Hardcore

Hardcore shall be stone, coarse gravel or other inert material yielding, when thoroughly
consolidated, a freely porous bed and blinded with fine hardcore, ashes and similar materials
shall include for all temporary retaining boards and for rolling with an 8-10 tonne roller
unless otherwise described, in layers not exceeding 150 mm deep.

4.2.10 Anti-Termite Treatment

Anti-Termite treatment for new works shall be fine sprayed using an approved insecticide.

4.2.11 Underground Public/Private Services and Structures

The Contractor shall at his own expense and before commencing excavations ascertain in
writing from the utility companies, Local Authorities and other public bodies, companies
and persons who may be affected, the position and depths of their respective ducts, cables,
mains, or piles and appurtenances.

The Contractor shall there upon search and locate such services in order to appropriately
prop, protect, underpin, alter, divert, restore and make good all pipes, cables or ducts, poles
or wires and their appurtenances disturbed or damaged during the progress of the works or
consequent thereof.

Such services as required to be removed or altered by virtue of the situation of the

permanent work and note the manner in which the work is carried out, shall be so removed
or altered at the expenses of the Employer.

4.2.12 Rock Excavation

The term “Rock” shall mean any natural material which cannot be dislodged by a pick and
which can only be removed by the use of compressors or by blasting or wedging. This
classification does not include materials that can be removed by means other than drilling
and blasting or drilling and wedging, but which for reasons of economy in excavating, the
Contractor prefers to remove by drilling and wedging. Unless specifically stated hereinafter,
the Contractor must assume that permission to remove rock will be refused and he must
therefore price for removing rock by compressors, etc. only.

4.2.13 Blasting

Blasting will only be allowed with the prior express permission of the Architect.

All blasting operations shall be carried out at the Contractor’s sole risk and cost in
accordance with any Government regulations in force for the time being, and any special
regulations laid down by the Architect governing the use and storage of explosives.

4.2.14 White Ants’ Nests

The Contract must destroy any termite nests found within the perimeter of the buildings and
within a distance of 20 meters from the building externally and take out and destroy queens,
EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 11

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 impregnate holes and tunnels with approved insecticide and back-fill with hard material well
rammed and consolidated. The rate will be deemed to include for this destruction and
treatment.

4.3.0 MATERIALS

4.3.1 Blinding

Blinding shall be of the same material as the hardcore bed, crushed and graded from 4 mm
upwards, free from clay, chemical or other pollutions, pests, weeds, roots and rubbish.

4.3.2 Hardcore

Hardcore shall be of good, clean, hard, broken stone, broken before placing to pass a 100
mm ring and free from all rubbish.

4.4.0 WORKMANSHIP

4.4.1 Generally

The Contractor shall control grading around the buildings so as to prevent water running
into excavated areas or into completed sections of the work.

4.4.2 Bottoms of excavations to be approved

The Contractor shall give the Architect at least 48 hours’ notice (this time shall be doubled if
the site of the works is more than 100 km from the nearest permanent office of the
Architect) when the excavations will be ready for inspection and agreement of the level
thereof. If a good bearing bottom is not obtained at the level shown, the Architect is to be
informed. No concrete is to be laid until the bottom has been approved and the level
thereof taken. Any concrete work or other work done before such approval, shall, if so
directed be removed and new work substituted after excavations have been approved, at the
Contractor’s expense. Notwithstanding such approval, any bottom which becomes
waterlogged or otherwise spoilt after approval, shall be cleaned out and reformed to the
Architect’s approval before any concrete is placed. Before placing concrete or masonry on
rock surfaces, the surfaces shall be leveled off or shelved to a slope not exceeding 25 mm per
300 mm.

4.4.3 Disposal of excavated material

Surplus excavated material where directed or required shall be removed from the site to a
tip, the location of which shall first be approved by the Architect in writing. All fees and
charges in connection shall be deemed to be included in the Contract Sum.

4.4.4 Timbering, planking, strutting, etc.

The Contractor shall provide all necessary timbering, planking and strutting, etc., to uphold
the faces of excavation, which shall only be removed when it is safe to do so. Where the
Architect instructs or agrees that it is necessary for the safety of the works to leave in
timbering and , planking and strutting, etc., such timber shall be measured and agreed before
covering up.

4.4.5 Filling

Return filling around foundations and filling to make up levels under floors and pavings shall
not be deposited until the formation level has been approved by the Architect. In no case
shall fill be deposited on a muddy foundation. Filling shall be deposited in layers not
exceeding 150 mm in depth before compaction and shall be compacted by rolling,
pneumatic tamping or other approved means over the whole of the area.

If necessary the filling shall be allowed to dry or be moistened to the correct moisture
EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 12

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 content before compaction. The finished surface shall be approved by the Architect prior to
further construction work thereon.

No excavation or foundation work shall be filled in or covered up until all measurements

necessary for the adjustment or variations have been made.

4.4.6 Consolidation of hardcore

Hardcore shall be consolidated with a roller, vibrating roller, or mechanical punner to a

compaction equivalent to that obtained with a 2.5 to 3 tonne roller, care being taken that no
damage is done to the foundation walls.

Hardcore shall be blinded and have the interstices filled with blinding as described herein.
Before placing concrete hardcore beds shall be well watered to prevent water absorption
from the concrete.

Where described as blinded to receive any membrane, the blinding shall be finished and
compacted with fine material which will not cause the membrane to puncture under wheel
or foot traffic or by the placing of concrete.

4.4.7 Protection

The Contractor shall protect all graded and filled areas from the actions of the weather
elements. Any settlement or washing away that occurs prior to acceptance of the works shall
be repaired and grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes.

4.4.8 Laying polythene membrane

Where joints occur, there is to be a minimum of 300 mm welted lap or joint made with
approved tapes.

The Contractor shall ensure that the membrane will not be pierced during laying and
concreting.

EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 13

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 4.4.9 Anti-termite treatment

Anti-termite treatment shall be carried out using ‘Aldrex 48’ or other equal and approved
chemical by the Architect in writing diluted to a water emulsion containing a minimum of
0.5% of the chemical.

The treatment shall be applied to the whole area of the hardcore bed and tops of foundation
walls immediately prior to the placing of the concrete floor slab at the rate of 7 litres per
square meter. The treatment at the same rate shall also be applied to all excavations for gum
pole bases before any concrete is poured and around the outside of the base for a distance of
500 mm from the edge of the base excavation. To facilitate this, all excavated soil from the
base is to be dumped more than 500 mm from the excavation.

Treatment shall not be applied whilst it is raining or to surfaces of filling which is wet.

For in-situ anti-termite treatment for existing works, drill 5/8 inch diameter holes 1 foot
deep and not more than 2 feet between the holes and 3 inches from the inside faces of all
the external perimeter walls of all rooms. Into each hole, inject under pressure
approximately 5 litres of a suitable termicide such as Aldrex 48% E.C. or Pyrinex
Professional Formula 42% E.C., as supplied by an approved supplier or other equal and
approved supplier/manufacturer, at concentrations of 0.5% and 1% a.i. respectively. The
holes are then sealed with the nearest matching material.

The Contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact that these treatments are toxic to animals and
human life an he shall prevent contamination of water supply systems, shall cover up and
protect treated areas immediately after treatment and post written notices informing of the
treatment at prominent points on the site and the building.

Immediately following treatment, the Contractor shall provide to the Architect for onward
transmission to the Client, a written five year guarantee which guarantees:-

a) That the chemical used complies with this specification and has been used in the
concentrations stated herein,

b) that the guarantee shall be continuous for a period of five years from the date of
treatment,

c) that should infestation by any termites appear before the end of the five year period,
the Contractor will return and re-treat as necessary to eliminate the infestation entirely
and at his own cost on each occasion that infestation appears within the five year
period.

The Contractor shall carry out annual inspections commencing three months after treatment
and continuing to the end of the guarantee period to ascertain the presence of termites, and
should any presence be found, the Contractor shall re-treat as necessary to eliminate any
infestation entirely and at his own cost on each occasion that infestation is found.

EXCAVATIONS AND EARTHWORKS 14

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

5.0 CONCRETE WORK

CONCRETE WORK 15

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

5.0 CONCRETE WORK

5.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The following authoritative standards are referred to hereinafter:

B.S Date Title

12 1989 Portland Cement (ordinary and rapid hardening)

812 Methods for sampling and testing of mineral aggregates, Sand

and fillers.

882 1983 Aggregate from natural sources for concrete (including

granolithics)

1881 Methods of testing concrete.

5328 1981 Methods for specifying concrete.

2499 1973 Hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements.

3148 1980 Tests for water mixing concrete.

3921 1985 Clay Bricks.

4251 1974 Truck type concrete

(1980)

4449 1988 Carbon steel bars for the reinforcement of concrete.

4466 1981 Bending dimensions and scheduling of bars for the

reinforcement of concrete (old edition)

4483 1985 Steel fabric for the reinforcement of concrete.

5075 Concrete Admixtures.

6073: Pt. 1 1981 Precast concrete blocks.

8110: Pt. 1 + 2 1985 The structural use of concrete

5950 The use of structural steel in buildings.

5400: Pt. 5 1979 Steel, concrete and composite bridges.

8807 1987 The structural use of concrete for retaining aqueous liquids.

American Society for Testing and Material Standards as published by the American Society
for Testing and Materials, 1916 Ract St., Philadelphia pa 19103 U.S.A. (Abbreviated in Test to
AST).

ASTM Date Title

C88 73 Soundness of aggregates by use of Sodium Sulphate.

C234 71 Comparing concrete on the basis of the bond developed with

reinforcing steel.

C289 71 Potential reactivity of aggregates (chemical method)

CONCRETE WORK 16

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The following codes of practice are referred to hereinafter:

British Standard Codes of Practice published by the Council for Codes of Practice British
Institution, 2 Park Street, London WIA 2BS, England (abbreviated in text to C.P.)

C.P Date Title

CP. 117: pt. 1: 1965 Composite construction in structural steel and concrete.

B.S. 3110 1972 Safe use of cranes (mobile cranes, tower cranes and derrick
cranes)

Should the contractor wish to substitute any of the authoritative standards or codes of
practice for any listed above, he should submit details of any such standard or code together
with two complete copies of the same to the Architect for approval with his tender.
Approval will only be given to the use of such standard or code where the Architect
considers the proposed standard or code of practice will give a quality of finished work equal
to or better than the specified standard.

All in-situ concrete shall be in accordance with BS 8110 except where superceded by this
specification.

All precast concrete shall be in accordance with BS 8110 except where superceded by this
specification.

NOTE: The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Section ‘F’ of the Standard Method of
Measurements of Building Works.

5.2.0 GENERAL

5.2.1 Samples and Materials Generally

The Contractor shall, when required, provide for approval samples of all materials
to be incorporated in the works. Such samples when approved shall be retained by
the Architect and shall form the standard for all such materials incorporated. No
deliveries to the site should commence before such approval is obtained.

No materials of any description will be used without prior sanction by the Architect
and any condemned as unfit for use in the works must be removed immediately
from site by and without recompense to the Contractor.

5.2.2 Test Certificates

The Contractor shall provide the Architect with three copies of all test reports or
certificates that are or may be required by this Specification.

5.2.3 Suppliers

As soon as possible after the contract has been awarded and before finalizing any
order for materials to be incorporated in the works, the contractor shall submit the
names of any proposed suppliers to the Architect for approval.

Each supplier must be willing to admit the Architect, or his authorized

representatives, to his premises during working hours for the purposes of obtaining
samples of the materials in question.

The information regarding the names of the suppliers may be submitted at

different times, as may be convenient, but no sources of supply will be changed
without proper approval.

CONCRETE WORK 17

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 5.2.4 Drawings

The Contractor should check all drawings carefully before any part of the work is
carried out. Any discrepancy should be reported to the Architect immediately for
his clarification. The Contractor shall be responsible for any costs arising out of his
failure to report such discrepancies to the Architect, in good time.

The Contractor shall ensure that he has all relevant drawings and bar bending
schedules for any part of the works, well in advance of the executions of that part
of the works. Any costs arising out of the Contractor’s failure to ask for related
drawings, or bending schedules in writing, in good time, shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor. The same shall hold true even if the contractor has submitted a
programme of works at commencement.

5.2.5 Bending Schedules

The Architect will issue bar bending schedules in accordance with B.S. 4466 (1981).
The Contractor should check these against the drawings before any cutting, bending
or construction involving the schedules is started. Any discrepancy should be
reported to the Architect immediately for his clarification. The Contractor shall be
responsible for any delays or additional work caused solely by his failure to check the
schedules.

5.2.6 Approval

Well before construction commences, the Contractor shall supply to the Architect
for his approval, details of his proposed layouts of concreting plant and on site
workshops, details of formwork systems and the construction devises, e.g. cranes,
chutes, scaffolding, etc. which he proposes using for the structural work. The
information is to be sufficiently detailed to enable the Architect to approve or
otherwise.

The Contractor should note that further approvals are required by this specification
before construction starts. The Contractor is wholly responsible for obtaining these
approvals and no claim for delays will be entertained due to the Contractor’s failure
to obtain such approvals in adequate time.

5.2.7 Cement

In addition to the above Standards and Codes, cement shall comply with the
following Kenya Standards:-

a) Portland Cement - K.S. 02-21

b) Rapid hardening cement - K.S. 02-21
c) Sulphate resisting Portland Cement - B.S. 4027

Cement, unless so otherwise specified, shall be ordinary Portland cement

complying with B.S. 12. Rapid hardening cement may be used in lieu of the
ordinary Portland cement only with prior approval of the Architect, provided that
all conditions applying to its use are strictly observed. Any additional expense in
connection with the use of such cement shall be borne by the Contractor.

The use of high alumina cement will not be permitted.

5.2.8 Cement

The Contractor shall obtain a manufacturer’s certificate of test in accordance with

the appropriate standard for each consignment of cement delivered to the site and
shall immediately forward copies of the same to the Architect for his retention.

Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s certificate, the Architect may require that any

CONCRETE WORK 18

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 cement delivered to the site be sampled and tested. Any batch of cement so tested
which fails to comply with the specification will be rejected.

All cement, unless delivered in bulk shall be stored in a weatherproof shed, the
floor of which shall be raised at least 150 mm above the ground to allow free air
circulation. Cement delivered in bulk shall be stored in a weatherproof silo. All
cement shall at all times be protected from deterioration.

All cement shall be delivered to the site in the original sealed bags of the
manufacturer or in approved bulk containers.

Each consignment of cement shall be kept separate, identified and used in order of
delivery. No two types of cement shall be used in combination.

Any cement upon inspection is considered by the Architect to have deteriorated in

any way will be rejected.

5.2.9 Aggregate

In addition to the above Standards and Codes, aggregate shall comply with K.S. 02-
95.

Any aggregate for concrete shall, unless otherwise specified, be aggregate from
natural sources complying with B.S. 882. Additionally, the flakiness index when
determined by the sieve method described in B.S. 812 shall not exceed 35 for any
size of concrete aggregate. Fine aggregate within or finer than zone 4 of B.S. 882
shall not be used.

When tested for soundness in accordance with ASTM Test C8873 the loss of
weight after 5 cycles shall not exceed 5% (percent) for any aggregate.

Aggregate which is potentially reactive when tested in accordance with ASTM Test
C. 289-71 for the alkali aggregate reaction shall not be used. The Standard for
acceptance being that test results shall plot to the let of the solid line which is
shown in Figure 2 of the test standard.

Well before any concreting work, the Contractor shall forward to the Architect for
approval, details of his proposed source of supply of aggregate, giving the aggregate
group classification and typical physical properties as required by B.S. 882.

The Contractor shall provide the Architect with a certificate for his retention
showing that all aggregates regularly comply with the requirements for this
specification.

The Architect may require that any aggregate be tested for soundness in accordance
with ASTM Test C88-73 before giving approval to any proposed source of supply.

The Architect may require that any aggregate be tested for potential reactivity in
accordance with
ASTM Test C.289-71.

Notwithstanding any certificate of compliance, the Architect may at any time

require that any aggregate delivered to the site by sampled and tested. Any
aggregate so tested which fails to comply with this specification will be rejected.

Coarse aggregate shall be delivered ready screened or screened on site into separate
nominal single sizes within limits given in B.S. 882.

Aggregate of different sizes or types shall be stored in different hoppers or

different stockpiles on approved well drained paved areas which shall be separate
from each other. Stockpiles shall be protected against contamination from any

CONCRETE WORK 19

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 source.

Any aggregate which has become contaminated or which does not conform with
the above requirements may be rejected by the Architect.

5.2.10 Water

Water for use in mixing with cement or for curing concrete shall be from an
approved source, clean, fresh and free from organic and other deleterious matter.

The Architect may require that any water for the works be sampled and tested by
the method given in the B.S. 3148 will be rejected.

Water for use in mixing with cement shall neither be hotter than 25 o C (77 deg.F) -
or colder than 5 deg. C (41 deg. F) at the time of mixing.

5.2.11 Steel Rod Reinforcement

Steel Rod Reinforcement shall consist of:-

a) Mild steel bars complying with B.S. 4449 and K.S. 02-22.

b) Hot rolled high yield bars complying with B.S. 4449

c) Cold worked high yield bars complying with B.S. 4449 as described in the
drawings.

Where cold worked high yield bars are to be used, these shall be square twisted bars
formed by a torsion controlled process.

The Contractor shall obtain manufacturer’s certificate of test in accordance with

the appropriate standard for each steel batch relating to reinforcement delivered to
site and shall immediately forward copies of the same to the Architect for his
retention.

Where hot rolled high yield deformed bars are to be used, the results of bond tests
to
ASTM 234-71 using concrete of the same quality as that to be used in the works,
shall be forwarded to the Architect.

Notwithstanding the manufacturer’s certificate, the Architect may require that any
reinforcement delivered to the site be sampled and tested. Any reinforcement so
sampled and tested which fails to comply with this specification will be rejected.

All reinforcement shall be delivered to the site either as straight bars or ready cut
and bent to shape.

All reinforcement shall be stored in clean conditions in an orderly manner to the

satisfaction of the Architect such that the batch to which each piece belongs can be
readily identified.

5.2.12 Steel Fabric Reinforcement

Steel fabric reinforcement shall be electrically cross welded steel mesh

reinforcement complying with B.S. 4483.

5.2.13 Tying Wires

Tying wires for fixing reinforcement shall be either:

a) No. 16 gauge soft annealed iron wire; or

CONCRETE WORK 20

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 b) No. 18 gauge stainless steel wire.

5.2.14 Spacers

Spacer blocks required for ensuring that the reinforcement is correctly positioned
shall be as small as possible consistent with their purpose, of a shape acceptable to
the Architect, and designed so that they will not overturn when the concrete is
placed. Unless otherwise approved, they shall be made of concrete with 10 mm
maximum aggregate size and mix proportions to produce the same strength as the
adjacent concrete. S.W.G. 18 wire shall be cast in the block for the purpose of
tying it to the reinforcement.

Spacer blocks of concrete shall not be used until at least 7 days old.

No admixtures or cement containing additives shall be used in concrete unless

specified or approved by the Architect. Such approval will not be given unless in
the Architect’s opinion specific benefit to the density or quality of the concrete will
result.

5.2.15 Wall Ties

Wall ties between concrete and adjoining block or brick walling shall be “Abbey”
slots and anchors as supplied by Abbey Building Suppliers Limited or similar and
approved. Wall ties must be provided at concrete and block or brick wall butting
surface.

5.2.16 Joint Fillers

Joint Fillers, unless otherwise stated, shall be “Flexcell” as manufactured by

Expandite Ltd. or similar and approved and placed in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

5.2.17 Joint Sealants

Shall be described in the drawings and approved by the Architect. Sealants shall be
used strictly with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Poured joint sealing compound shall be a hot poured rubber bitumen compound
complying with the requirements of B.S. 2499.

5.2.18 Water Stops

Water stops, unless otherwise stated, shall be “Sika waterbar” as manufactured by

Sika International or similar and approved and placed and jointed in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions. In addition, the method of holding the
waterbar in position, while concreting, must be to the approval of the Architect.

5.3.0 REINFORCEMENT

5.3.1 Workmanship

Reinforcement shall be bent accurately in accordance with B.S. 4466 to the shape and
dimensions shown in the schedules. All reinforcement shall be bent at temperatures in the
range of 5o C and 100o C.

Cold worked or any high yield bars shall not be straightened or bent against once having
been bent. When it is necessary to bend mild steel reinforcement already cast in the
concrete, the internal radius of such bends shall be not less than twice the diameter of the
bar.

CONCRETE WORK 21

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 No welding of reinforcement shall be carried out without the approval of the Architect.

All reinforcement shall be, at the time of concreting, free from mud, oil, mortar droppings,
loose rust, paint, grease, mill scale or other deleterious matter. Reinforcement still ‘blue’
from the mill shall not be used.

All reinforcement shall be as where indicated on the drawings or as approved by the

Architect. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum lap length for rod reinforcement shall
be 40 diameters for mild steel and 50 diameters for high tensile twisted bars.

A steel fixer shall be in attendance at all times when concreting is in progress to correct any
errors, omissions or movement in the reinforcement.

In severe heat conditions, reinforcement shall be shaded from direct sunlight and hosed
down with clean water prior to concreting to keep the reinforcement below 25 o C. (77o F).

Notwithstanding any inspections and approvals regarding reinforcement, it shall be the

Contractor’s sole responsibility to ensure that the reinforcement complies exactly with the
details on the Drawings or Schedules or other written instructions by the Architect.

5.3.2 Composite Floor Slabs

Concrete hollow pots for use in the composite floor slabs are to be of the sizes required as
shown on the drawings and with 25 mm wall thickness and are to be true to shape, free from
cracks or distortion, of adequate strength to support the concrete during placing and
consolidation by vibration. Stocks are to be manufactured in accordance with the procedure
specified in B.S. 2028 and to be of mix not weaker than 1:4:8 cement, sand, stone, using
maximum 10 mm size aggregate. Samples must be approved before incorporation into the
works.

Concrete hollow pots are to be cured for at least 28 days before use on site. During the first
seven days of curing, pots are to be kept permanently damp and protected from exposure to
sun and wind.

Hollow clay pots where indicated for use in the composite floor slabs are to be the sizes
shown on the drawings and to be of adequate strength to support the concrete during
placing and consolidation by vibration. They shall be obtained from an approved
manufacturer. Before any orders are placed, at least 6 samples clay blocks shall be provided
for the approval of the Architect. Any clay blocks subsequently delivered to site which in
the opinion of the Architect are not of equal standard to the approved samples shall be
rejected.

Rejected pots shall immediately be removed from site and shall not be used in the works.
Clay blocks are to be fully cured before delivery or use on site.

Defective or damaged pots are to be removed immediately from site.

The hollow pot floor construction is generally to be as shown on the Architect’s drawings.

Care shall be taken in planning pots to ensure that they are set out in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings and they run truly in line without encroaching on the width
of the in-situ ribs.

The open ends of hollow pots, if adjacent to concrete to be placed in-situ, are to be plugged
or stopped to prevent the concrete from flowing in the void and the Contractor is to include
for this in his rates.

The Contractor should note that slip tiles are not to be used to the soffite of ribs and he is to
take this into consideration in pricing the items of formwork to the soffite of hollow pot
floor construction.

CONCRETE WORK 22

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Before concreting is carried out, the pots are to be thoroughly wetted.

Care should be taken during concreting that the width of ribs between the rows of pots and
the solid in-situ concrete shown on the Drawings adjacent to stopping beams is not
encroached upon by the pots.

Where holes for service occur, the necessary holes or pockets shall be accommodated by
replacing of a hollow pot by in-situ concrete or the widening of a rib.

Prices for such holes through hollow pots slab construction are to include for the re-
arrangement or substitution of the hollow pot with solid concrete or the widening of a rib.

The concrete topping shall be poured at the same time as the ribs between hollow pots.

Reinforcement shall be positioned accurately with the specified cover in accordance with the
Drawings and using the particular spacer blocks as previously described.

Spacer blocks shall be provided at no more than 1.2 m centers.

Care must be taken during concreting that the reinforcement is not displaced.

5.3.4 Composite Construction of Beams and Columns

The Contractor shall provide a method statement for construction of concrete encased steel
columns and beams. Notwithstanding the Architect’s approval of this method statement,
the responsibility of producing workmanship of the specified quality shall rest entirely with
the Contractor. In addition the Contractor shall construct a sample of a concrete encased
column and beam on site in accordance with the method statement for approval. If
approved, all composite construction for the works shall be of a similar quality. The
Contractor should allow for hoisting of steel beams and columns in his rates.

The Contractor shall maintain, on site for the duration of the contract, all equipment
required for modifications to ‘in-position’ steel beams and columns.

The Contractor is to note that steel grade 43, shall be used in composite beams and steel
grade 50 will be used in composite columns.

All connections of steel beams to columns and column splice connection details shall be as
specified on the structural drawings.

5.4.0 FORMWORK

5.4.1 Definition

“Forms, falsework or shuttering” shall include all temporary moulds forming the
concrete to the required shape together with any special lining that may be required
to produce the concrete finish specified.

All timber for formwork, falsework and centering shall be sound wood, well
seasoned and free from loose knots, shakes, large cracks, warping and other
defects. Before use on the work, it shall be properly stacked and protected from
injury from any source. Any timber which becomes badly warped or cracked, prior
to the placing of concrete, shall be rejected.

If the Contractor proposes to use steel shuttering, he shall submit to the Architect,
dimensioned drawings of all the component parts, and give details of the manner in
which he proposes to assemble or use them. Steel shuttering will only be permitted
if it is sturdy in construction and if the manner of its use is approved by the
Architect.

Struts and props shall, where required by the Architect, be fitted with double

CONCRETE WORK 23

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 hardwood wedges or other approved devices so that the moulds may be adjusted
and eased gradually when required. Wedges shall be spiked into position and any
adjusting devices locked before the concrete is cast.

All forms shall be wood or metal and shall be built grout-tight and of sufficient
rigidity to prevent distortion due to the pressure of the concrete and other loads
incident to the construction operations. Forms shall be constructed and
maintained so as to prevent warping and the opening of joints due to shrinkage of
the timber.

All formwork shall be approved by the Architect before concrete is placed within
it. The Contractor shall, if required by the Architect, provide the latter with copies
of calculations of strength and stability of the formwork or false work but
notwithstanding the Architect’s approval of these calculations, nothing shall relieve
the Contractor of his responsibilities for the safety or adequacy of the formwork.

5.4.2 False work and centering

Detailed plans for false work or centering shall be supplied by the Contractor to the
Architect at least 14 days in advance of the time the Contractor begins construction
of the false work. Notwithstanding the approval of the Architect of any designs of
false work submitted by the Contractor, the Contractor shall solely be responsible
for the safety and adequacy of the false work or centering.

All false work shall be constructed to provide the necessary rigidity and to support
the loads from the weight of green concrete and shutting and incidental
construction loads.

False work or centering shall be founded upon a solid footing safe against
undermining and protected from softening. False work which cannot be founded
on satisfactory footings shall be supported on piling which shall be spaced, driven
and removed in a manner approved by the Architect. The Architect may require
the Contractor to employ screw jacks, or hardwood wedges to take up any
settlement in the formwork either before or during the placing of concrete.

False work shall be set to give the finished structure the required grade and camber
shown on the drawings.

5.4.3 Form of Construction Joints

Where permanent or temporary joints are to be made in horizontal or inclined

members, stout stopping off boards shall be securely fixed across the mould to
form a grouting joint. The form of the permanent construction joints shall be as
shown on the drawings.

Where reinforcement or water stops pass through the face of construction joints,
the stopping off boards shall be drilled so that the bars or water stops can pass
through or the board shall be made in sections with a half round indentation in the
joint faces for each bar so that when placed, the board is a neat and accurate fit and
not grout leaks from the concrete through the bar holes, joints or around the water
stops.

The forms shall be restrained and unyielding and shall be so designed that the
finished concrete will conform to the proper dimensions and contours. The design
of the forms shall take into account the effect of vibration of concrete as it is
placed.

All sharp edges inside the forms shall be provided with 25 mm by 25 mm triangular
fillets, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or directed by the Architect.

Openings for the inspection and cleaning of the inside of shuttering for walls, piers

CONCRETE WORK 24

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 and columns shall be formed in such a way that they can be closed conveniently
before commencing to concrete.

When concrete is to be deposited to a steeper slope than 15 o to the horizontal, top

forms shall be used to enable the concrete to be properly compacted.

Form, clamps, tie bolts an anchors shall be used to fasten forms. The use of wire
ties to hold forms in position during placing of concrete will not be permitted. Tie
bolts and clamps shall be positive in action and of sufficient strength and number
to prevent spreading or springing of the forms. They shall be of such type that no
metal part shall be left within the specified concrete.

The cavities shall be filled shall be filled with grout or mortar and the surface left
sound, smooth, even and uniform in color. All forms for outside surfaces shall be
constructed with stiff walls at right angles to the studs and all form clamps shall
extend through and fasten such walls.

The shapes, strength, rigidity, water tightness and surface smoothness of re-used
forms shall be maintained all times. Any warped or bulged timber must be
replaced. Forms which are unsatisfactory in any respect shall not be re-used.

All forms shall be treated with approved mould or similar oil or be soaked with
water immediately before placing concrete to prevent adherence of concrete. Any
materials which adhere to or discolour concrete shall not be used.

All forms shall be set and maintained true to the line designed until the concrete is
sufficiently hardened. Forms shall remain in place or a period which shall be as
specified hereinafter. When forms appear to be unsatisfactory in any way, either
before or during the placing of concrete, the Architect shall order the work stopped
until the defects have been corrected.

5.4.4 Release Agents

Only approved chemical release agents, mould creams (emulsions of water in oil)
or oil containing a proportion of surfactant not exceeding 2% will be permitted.
Water soluble emulsion and oils without surfactant shall not be used. Oil based
release agents shall be applied at a ratio of 7m2/litre 24 hours in advance of
concreting, preferably by spray or roller. Chemical release agents shall be applied in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

The greatest care must be taken that all sawdust shavings, chips and other debris is
removed from the formwork before concrete is placed in position and the
necessary arrangements must be made by leaving out aboard in the bottom of the
formwork or otherwise as required.

The erection, easing, striking and removal of all formwork must be done under the
personal supervision of a competent foreman, and any damage occurring through
faulty formwork or its incorrect removal shall be made good by the Contractor at
his own expense.

All projecting fins on the concrete surfaces after removal of formwork shall be
chipped off, and any voids or honeycombing to any surface made good to the
requirements of the Architect.

No patching of the concrete is to be done before inspection of the concrete

surfaces as stripped.

Traffic or loading must not be allowed on the concrete until the concrete is
sufficiently matured and in no case shall traffic or loading be of such magnitude as
to cause deflection or other movement in the formwork or damage to the concrete
members. Where directed by the Architect, props may be required to be left in

CONCRETE WORK 25

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 position under slabs and other members for greater periods than those specified
hereinafter.

5.4.5 Striking Times

It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility that no distortion, damage, overloading or

undue deflection is caused to the structure by the striking of formwork, but the
Architect reserves the right to delay the time of striking in the interest of the work.
Formwork shall not be struck until the concrete has sufficiently hardened.
Approval of the Architect shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability to make
good any concrete damaged by premature removal or collapse of forms. In no
circumstances shall forms be struck until the concrete reaches a cube strength of at
least twice the stress to which the concrete may be subjected at the time of striking.

The following times given in a day (24 hours) are the absolute minimum that will
be permitted:-

Forms Ordinary Rapid

Portland Hardening
Cement Cement
Walls, columns (unloaded), Beams sides 2 2
Slabs - props left under 7 2
Beams soffites - props left under 14 5
Slabs - props 14 5
Beams - props 18 8

The time for removal of forms as set out shall not apply to slabs and beams
spanning more than 10 meters. For such spans appropriate times shall be
recommended or advised by the Architect.

The periods given above are based on the removal of all props and formwork using
ordinary Portland cement under average weather conditions. Adverse weather
conditions or different cement may cause the above period to be increased. Should
the Contractor wish to make use of reduced striking time, then he must satisfy the
Architect that the strength of the concrete at such time and the structural system is
adequate to withstand the dead and imposed loads applied to it. Before making use
of reduced striking times the Architect’s agreement must be obtained in writing.

Where the structure is of multi-storey construction, props with head trees and
braces shall be provided to distribute the imposed load below the floor being cast.
This will normally be 3 -storey heights below the floor being cast unless otherwise
stated.

5.5.0 FINISH TO CONCRETE SHUTTERED SURFACES

5.5.1 Sawn Finish

The shuttering shall consist of saw boards, sheet metal or other suitable material to
give a support to the concrete. Appearance is not of primary importance for this
class of formwork. It shall be used for surfaces against which backfill or further
concrete is to be placed. The treatment of the shuttering or concrete to provide a
board for the further surface treatment of the concrete shall be directed or
approved by the Architect. Masonry or similar material used for facing concrete
shall only be used as shuttering where directed by the Architect.

The Architect’s approval shall be obtained to the use of blocks or slabs when used
as permanent forms in foundations and other similar locations.

CONCRETE WORK 26

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 5.5.2 Wrought Finish

The shuttering shall be wrought with boards arranged in a uniform pattern.

Alternatively, plywood, metal panels, or other approved materials may be used,
subject to the Architect’s approval. Joints between boards or panels shall be
horizontal or vertical unless otherwise directed. This shuttering shall give a good
finish to the concrete and will normally be used for all faces where a high class
finish is not necessary.

5.5.3 Fair-faced Finishing

Standard steel panels, hardwood and boarding will not be permitted for the face of
this shuttering. The shuttering shall be faced with resin-bonded plywood, faced
with matt finished plastic or equivalent material in large sheets which shall be
arranged in an approved uniform pattern. Wherever possible, joints between
sheets shall be arranged to coincide with features such as sills, heads, jambs or
changes in direction or the surface areas of formwork between features in walls,
between beams in horizontal surfaces or other or similar arrangement, shall where
possible be divided into panels of uniform dimensions, without the use of make-up
pieces. All joints between panels or vertical or inclined surfaces shall be vertical or
horizontal unless otherwise directed by the Architect; those on horizontal surfaces
shall be at right angles and wherever possible they shall be parallel to walls and
beams. The shuttering shall give a high class finish to the concrete with no lips,
fins, or irregularities, and shall give a completely true and even surface which will
be prominently exposed to view where good alignment is of special importance. It
is for use in both in-situ and precast concrete.

5.5.4 Textured Finish

This is an all-over finish of high quality as may be directed by the Architect.

Sample panels may be constructed on site prior to commencement of the works, to
compare different textures. The shuttering shall be such that the concrete finish
has no lips, fins or irregularities and shall give a surface which will be prominently
exposed to view where good appearance and alignment are of special importance.

5.5.5 Chisel Dressed Finish

This finish consists of cutting a maximum of 10 mm of concrete surfaces to expose

the aggregate. This work is to be carried out after the concrete is at least 30 days
old and is to be executed by hand. Mechanical means will not be permitted.

5.5.6 Other Finishes

Where other finishes, apart from the above are specified, the Contractor provide a
sample panel at least 2.4 m x 1.2 m in vertical surface area including a typical
horizontal and vertical joint in the shuttering. The sample panel shall be
constructed using the systems of shuttering and the construction techniques that
the Contractor proposes for the actual works. This sample when approved will
form the standard for the entire works. All unsuccessful samples shall be removed
from the site.

5.5.7 Floor Finishes

“Tamped Finish”

Where “tamped finish” is specified, it will be obtained by an edge board to the

Architect’s approval. Board works are to be made to a true pattern and will
generally be at right angles to the traffic flow. Haphazard or diagonal tamping will
not be accepted.

5.6.0 CONCRETE MIXES, GENERALLY

CONCRETE WORK 27

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 5.6.1 Work Cubes

For all structural concrete, the following representative sample shall be

taken and in accordance with B.S. 1881:-

One each day on which less than 50 cu.m. of concrete is being poured.

a) Six 150 mm cubes - three for test 7 days and three for test 28 days;
and
b) Two slump tests; or
c) Two compacting factor tests

On any day when greater quantities of concrete are being poured then six
additional cube tests and two additional slump or compacting factor tests
shall be carried out for each 50 cu.m. or part thereof.

All cubes shall be marked with the date of casting and a reference
number. For each cube a record shall be kept of the position in which the
batch of concrete from which it was sampled was placed. All cubes shall
be tested by an approved testing authority.

The concrete cubes tested at 7 days are intended to be indicative only and
the target works strengths at 7 days given in Table I or II are not
mandatory. It should be noted however that it is unlikely that cubes
failing the 7 days target will subsequently pass the 28 days cube strength.

The concrete cubes tested at 28 days shall be taken to represent the

concrete placed in the works. The standard of acceptance for cube
strength tests shall be as follows:-

The cube strength shall be calculated from the maximum load sustained
by the cube failure. One test result shall be the average of two test
specimens taken from the same sample. The appropriate strength
requirement, as given in Table I or II shall be considered to be satisfactory
if:

a) None of the strengths of the three cubes is below the specified cube
strength, of if,

b) The average strength of three cubes is not less than the specified
cube strength and the difference between the greatest and the least
strengths is not more than 20% (percent) of that average.

The standard of acceptance of the slump test during the production

of concrete shall be the design slump +/- 25 mm.

The standard of acceptance for the compacting factor test during the
production of concrete shall be design compactor factor +/ 0.03.

Any concrete which fails to meet the above standard of acceptance

shall be either further tested or condemned at the Architect’s sole
discretion. Any such tests or the removal of condemned concrete,
replacement and associated costs shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

If the strengths required are not attained or maintained throughout

the contract, the Contractor will also be required to redesign the mix
and submit trial mixes in accordance with the specification so as to
give a concrete which does comply with the requirements of this
specification.

CONCRETE WORK 28

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 5.6.2 Concrete Mixes, Nominal Mixes

Mixes for each class of concrete specified or shown on the drawings shall
be used by the Contractor. They shall be mixed to achieve high density
combined with adequate workability for the purpose.

Details of any proposed mix shall be forwarded to the Architect not less
than 7 days before that class of concrete is required to be used on the
works for his approval in principle.

Classes of concrete will be referred to by their nominal mix proportions.

Classes of concrete shall meet the criteria shown in Table I.

The workability of the concrete shall be the minimum consistent with

producing a dense, well compacted mass. Due regard shall be paid to the
size and shape of the section together with any congestion of
reinforcement.

5.6.3 Concrete Mixes, Design Mixes

Mixes for each class of concrete specified or shown on the drawings shall
be designed by the Contractor to achieve the specified minimum cube
strength combined with high density and adequate workability for the
purpose.

In order to allow for unavoidable variation, the mean design strength

should exceed the specified works cube strength by twice the expected
standard deviation. In the absence of previous information, a standard
deviation of 7N/MM2 should be assumed.

Details of any proposed mix design shall be forwarded to the Architect

not less than 7 days before that class of concrete is required to be used on
the works for his approval in principle. The details shall include at least
the following information:-

a) Source, nature and grading of course and fine aggregates.

b) Source of cement.
c) Nominal maximum size of aggregate.
d) Cement content
e) Aggregate/cement ratio
f) Water/cement ratio
g) Design density
h) Design slump or compacting factor
i) Design strength

Classes of concrete will be referred to by the minimum 28 days work

strength and the maximum size of aggregate. Classes of concrete shall
meet the criteria shown on Table II. The maximum water/cement ratio is
herein defined as the ratio of the weight of the “free” water available to
the weight of the cement. The “free water” is that quantity of water
available to combine with the cement. Any required to be absorbed by
aggregate is excluded.

The workability of the concrete shall be the minimum consistent with

producing a dense well compacted mass. Due regard shall be paid to the
size and shape of the section together with any congestion of
reinforcement.

After the Architect has approved a design mix in principle, the Contractor
shall prepare a trial mix on site using plant and materials intended for the
works. Three batches of concrete shall be sampled and the following

CONCRETE WORK 29

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 prepared, from each batch in accordance with B.S. 1881:

a) Nine 150 mm cubes, three for test at 7 days, three for test at 14
days and three for test at 28 days; and

b) Three slump tests, or where the design slump is less than 25

mm; and

c) Three compacting factor tests.

The standard of acceptance of preliminary tests will be similar to the

standard for normal cubes, slump or compacting factor, except that the
minimum cube strengths required shall be those given under “minimum
preliminary cube strength at 28 days” in Table I and II.

No structural concrete shall be placed in the works until the Architect has
approved preliminary tests. Thereafter the approved mix proportions
shall be adhered to, throughout the work and may only be varied with the
prior approval of the Architect.

CONCRETE WORK 30

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 (Concrete Mixes (Generally) (ctd)

TABLE 1: PRE SCRIBED WORKMANSHIP CONCRETE MIXES

Class of Minimum work Cube Cement Kg. Fine Aggregate Cubic Coarse Aggregate Minimum Preliminary Minimum Target Works
Concrete strength Metres Cubic Metres Cube Strengthen at 28 Cube strength at 7 days
Of 28 days N/MM2 days N/MM2 N/MM2

1:1:2 30 50 0.035 0.07 40 22

1:1:5:3 25 50 0.05 0.10 40 19

1:2:4 20 50 0.07 0.14 28 14

CONCRETE WORK 31

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 TABLE 1: PRESCRIBED WORKMANSHIP CONCRETE MIXES

Class of Minimum work Maximum size of Minimum Cement Maximum Water Maximum Cement Minimum Preliminary Minimum Target
Concrete Cube strength Aggregate MM Content Cement Ratio Content KG/M3 Cube Strength at 28 Works Cube
Of 28 days N/MM2 KG/M3 days Strength at 7 days
N/NN2

40 40 20 350 0.44 540 40 30

30/40 30 40 300 0.46 540 40 22

30/20 30 20 310 0.46 540 40 22

30/10 30 10 340 0.46 540 40 22

25/40 25 40 280 0.53 540 33 19

25/20 25 20 295 0.53 540 33 19

25/10 25 10 325 0.53 540 33 19

20/40 20 40 260 0.60 540 28 14

20/20 20 20 280 0.60 540 28 14

CONCRETE WORK 32

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 5.6.4 Tolerance

All in-situ concrete shall be dimensionally accurate to within the following

non-accumulative tolerances:-

a) Between the centre lines of principal member columns or beams

……………+/- 5mm

b) Up to 5 metre centres ………………………….+/- 5mm

c) Over 15 metre centres …………………………. +/- 5mm

(Note:- The +/- 5mm is floor to floor).

d) In storey height ………………..+/- 5mm floor to floor.

e) In plumpness of columns and walls …+/- 10 mm on any storey

or overall the structure.

f) In level of floors …………………..+/- 5 mm/ - 3 mm of the

true prescribed horizontal surface level.

g) In cross sectional dimensions of column, beams and walls

……………….. +/- 5 mm/ - 3 mm

h) In any dimensions up to 2 metres overall +/- 10 mm/ - 3 mm

i) Cover to reinforcement………… + 5 mm/ - 0 of the stated

covers.

5.6.5 Miscellaneous Items

Holes, chases, indentations and the like shall be provided where indicated
on the drawings. All such shall be formed in the concrete and not cut
after concrete has hardened.

Should the Contractor or any Sub-contractor require additional holes of

the like, these requirements shall be submitted to the Architect at least
two days prior to concreting, for his approval.

Pipes, conduits, fixing bolts and other such cast-in items shall be provided
where indicated on the drawings.
Should the Contractor or any Sub- contractor require additional cast-in
items, these requirements shall be submitted to the Architect at least two
days prior to concreting, for this approval.

5.6.6 Ready Mixed Concrete

Ready Mixed Concrete shall be used only with the approval of the
Architect. When such approval is given, it shall be supplied in accordance
with B.S. 5328, except where this conflicts with this specification, wherein
this specification shall prevail.

Truck mixer units and their mixing and discharge performance shall
comply with the requirement of B.S. 4251.

The use of ready mixed concrete shall not relieve the Contractor of any of
his obligations, and the appropriate clauses of this specification shall apply
equally to the ready mixed concrete.

Concrete test cubes and slump tests shall be taken on site at the point and

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 33

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 time of discharge in accordance with this specification irrespective of any
cubes that the supplier may take at his own risk.

5.7.0 MIXING AND TRANSPORTING CONCRETE

All materials for concrete shall be measured by weight in approved weight batching
equipment. Such equipment shall be checked at weekly intervals at the Contractor’s expense
and shall be accurate to within 2%. Certificates of accuracy shall be submitted immediately
to the Architect.

a) All concrete shall be mixed in approved power driven mixers of a type and capacity
suitable for the work. The mixer shall be equipped with an accurate water
measuring device which shall be checked at weekly intervals at the Contractor’s
expense. Certificates of accuracy shall be submitted immediately to the Architect.

All materials shall be thoroughly mixed dry before water is added and the mixing of each
batch shall continue for a period of not less than two minutes after the water is added or
such longer periods as recommended by the manufacturer of the mixer. The mixture shall
be of uniform colour and distribution on discharge and the entire contents of the mixer shall
be discharged before recharging. The volume of mixed material shall not exceed the rated
capacity of the mixer.

The Mixer shall at all times be kept in a clean condition. Prior to the first mix each day
being agitated in the mixer, a rich cement:sand mix shall be used to coat the inside of the
drum, the surplus material being emptied away and not used in the works.

The moisture contents of the coarse and fine aggregate shall be checked by the Contractor at
frequent intervals and the amount of water added to the mix adjusted to maintain the design
workability.

Concrete shall be discharged from the mixer onto a clean, level, watertight platform or into a
clean watertight container. It shall be transported in a manner which ensures that it is of the
correct quality and consistency at the point of deposition. All platforms and containers shall
be cleaned of the old concrete before the fresh concrete is discharged onto them.

Concrete shall not be dropped from a height, thrown or otherwise treated so that
segregation, undesirable finish or defective structural quality results. In any case concrete
shall not be dropped from a height greater than 3.0 m.

No extra water shall be added to the concrete mix after it has left the mixer.

The Contractor shall take adequate precautions to protect concrete in transit from the
effects of the weather.

Pumping of concrete, which will require a special design mix, will only be permitted with the
approval of the Architect.

Should the concreting be stopped due to mechanical malfunction, accident or other similar
cause, then the Contractor shall inform the Architect immediately so that necessary measures
and precautions can be taken. The cost of any additional work caused by these stoppages
shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

No concreting shall be commenced until the formwork and reinforcement have been
inspected by the Architect. The Contractor shall give the Architect two clear days’ notice of
his intention to concrete.

5.8.0 PLACING AND COMPACTING CONCRETE

All concrete shall be vibrated unless otherwise specified. The vibration shall be carried out
by experienced operators and with immersion type vibrations to the Architect’s satisfaction.

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 34

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Placing of concrete shall be carried out in layers not exceeding 500 mm deep and in
sequence from one end of the form to the other.

Concrete in foundations and other underground work shall be protected from

contamination with falling earth or rock during and after placing.

Any concrete which shows signs of initial setting before or during placing shall not be used
and it shall be removed at the Contractor’s expense.

Sufficient vibrators shall be provided to correspond with the rate of deposition of concrete.
The vibrators shall be continuous throughout the placing of the concrete. Standby vibrators
shall be on site during all concrete placing.

Vibration must not be allowed to disturb any recently placed concrete that has begun to set.
Any water accumulating on the surface of newly placed concrete shall be removed by
approved means and no further concrete shall be placed thereon until such water is
removed.

Suitable means shall be provided to ensure that the temperature of the concrete on placing
does not exceed 30 deg.C (86 deg.F). All surfaces shall be thoroughly dampened
immediately prior to placing fresh concrete to prevent excessive absorption of water.

5.9.0 UNIFORMED FINISHES FOR CONCRETE

Where concrete surface is specified as suitable for receiving a further applied finish or in all
cases where no other finish is specified, the concrete shall be uniformly leveled and screeded
to produce a rigid surface. No further work shall be applied to the surface.

Where a concrete surface is specified as exposed with no further applied finish, the concrete
shall be uniformly leveled screeded to produce a plain surface. After the concrete has
hardened sufficiently, the surface shall be hand or machine floated sufficiently only to
produce a uniform surface free from screed marks.

5.10.0 CONSTRUCTION, CONTRACTION AND EXPANSION JOINTS

Construction joints will be permitted only at the positions shown on the drawings and as
instructed on the site by the Architect. These joints will in general be spaced to allow a
maximum plan area for any bay of 100 sq.m. and maximum length of 12 m in any one
dimension.

Vertical construction joints shall be properly made to form a vertical grout tight joint.
Where reinforcement passes through the face of the joint, the stopping off board shall be
drilled so that the bars pass through or the board shall be made in sections with half round
indentation in the joint.

Under no circumstances shall concrete, when being deposited, be allowed to ‘tail off’.
Construction joints formed with expanded metal or similar will not be permitted for
reinforced concrete work.

At all construction joints, both horizontal and vertical the surface of the already placed
concrete shall be suitably roughened to remove latency and by exposing the coarse aggregate
to form a key for adjacent concrete. This work shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the
Architect by the following or other approved methods:-

a) After the initial set has taken place but before final set, the coarse aggregate shall be
exposed by the use of a water jet brushing.

b) After final set has taken place, the latency shall be removed and coarse aggregate shall
be exposed by brush hammering or chiseling.

In both cases the surface is to be thoroughly cleaned after roughening.

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 35

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 At least 72 hours shall elapse between completion of concreting one bay and the start of
concreting any adjacent bay if the Architect deems fit.

Construction joints shall be formed as detailed where shown on the drawings.

Expansion joints shall be formed as detailed at the position on the drawings.

5.11.0 CURING AND PROTECTING CONCRETE

Immediately after compacting and for 7 days thereafter, concrete shall be protected against
harmful effects of the weather including rain, rapid temperature changes and from drying
out. The methods of protection used shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The
method of curing used shall prevent loss of moisture from the concrete.

During the curing period, horizontal surfaces shall be protected by the following or other
approved means:-

a) Covering with damp hessian canvas sacks or similar absorbent materials kept
constantly damp and wholly covering the exposed concrete surface or

b) Covering with an impermeable material raised approximately 50 mm over the surface

so as to prevent loss of moisture.

c) An approved membrane curing compound.

During the curing period, other surfaces shall be protected by the following or other
approved means:-

a) Formwork in close application of water, preferably in the form of a mist so as not to

damage the surface.

b) Direct and continuous application of water, preferably in the form of a mist so as not to
damage the surface.

All concrete faces or edges, particularly those which are exposed without rendering in the
final structure, shall be adequately protected from damage and discolouration at all times.

Concrete structures shall NOT be loaded until the concrete is at least 21 days old or 28 days
in the case of cantilevers. With the prior approval of the Architect the structure may be
loaded before this time but in no case will loading be greater than the final design loading be
permitted.

5.12.0 TEST FOR DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

Additional tests may be necessary when there are physical defects in the finished concrete.
These defects may be in the form of cracking while the member is still under props,
excessive deflection or segregation and insufficient strength of concrete test cubes. If in the
opinion of the Architect these defects are as a result of the Contractor’s bad workmanship,
then the contractor will be required to carry out additional tests which the Architect may
deem necessary to establish the load carrying capacity of the member. All costs for the test
or incurred thereof as a consequence of the test shall be chargeable to the Contractor. Costs
for tests shall be borne by the Contractor immaterial of the outcome of such tests.

5.13.0 CONCRETE FOR WATER RETAINING STRUCTURES

Concrete, and its constituents for water retaining structures, in addition to the general and
particular provisions in this specification, shall comply with the following requirements in
this section:-

In addition to the requirement of the following clauses, concrete in water retaining structures

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 36

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 shall have a low dying shrinkage and absorption, as measured in accordance with B.S. 812 or
not greater than 3%.

The Architect may, before approval is given to an aggregate or at any time thereafter require,
that the aggregate be tested for absorption in accordance with B.S. 812. Any aggregate
failing to comply with this specification will be rejected.

In addition to the requirements of this specification, concrete for the water retaining
structures shall have maximum cement content of 400 kg/M 3.

Blinding concrete under water retaining structures shall be a minimum of 75 mm thick and
shall be in class 15/40 concrete.

Class15/40 concrete shall comply with the following requirements:-

a) Minimum works cube strength at 28 days ……….. 15/N/mm2

b) Maximum size of aggregate …………….………….. 40 mm

c) Mix proportions ………….. 1 cement : 2.5 fine aggregate

: 5 coarse aggregate

This is nominal mix and no cubes will be required to be taken.

The construction joints will, in general be spaced to allow a maximum plan area for any bay
of
40 sq.m. or maximum lengths of 7.5 m in any one dimension.

A waterproofing additive - “plastocrete DM” by Sika or other similar and approved shall be
used for all reinforced concrete in water tank structures.

All additives shall be incorporated into the mix according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

At least 96 hours shall be left between completion of concreting any adjacent bay if the
Architect deems fit.

A kicker of minimum height 150 mm shall be cast integrally with the base slab for all water
retaining structures.

The surface of all concrete for water retaining structures shall not be permitted to dry out
even after the 7 day curing period specified in this specification.

All pipes passing through concrete walls or slabs for water retaining structures shall be cast
in at the time of concreting and not subsequently fitted. All such pipes shall be provided
with puddle flanges fitted to form a seal against the pipe and of an outside diameter of 2.00
m greater than the outside diameter of the pipes.

Joint sealants shall be applied not less than 7 days after completion of the structure.

On completion of water retaining structures at a time decided by the Architect, it shall be

tested for water tightness in the following manner:-

a) Structures which are elevated shall be filled at a uniform rate not exceeding 1 meter
rise in head per 24 hours and allowed to absorb water for 3 days. After this period
the water level shall be brought up to the top water level and left for 7 days.
During this period the exposed faces shall show no signs of leakage and shall
remain apparently dry.

b) Structures founded on or in the ground shall be tested prior to backfilling unless

otherwise stated. The structure shall be filled as specified above. After filling to
top water level, no structure will be deemed to be watertight if at the expiration of

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 37

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 this time the total 100 mm after making due allowance for evaporation and
absorption and no signs of leakage are observed.

Water for testing shall be provided at the Contractor’s expense.

If the structure fails the test above, any defects shall be made good or such action taken to
eliminate leakages as the Architect shall direct. All such work shall be at the Contractor’s
expense.

After completion of any repairs, the structure shall be tested using the procedure specified
above.

Swimming pools should be tested prior to applying internal finishes.

5.14.0 PRECAST CONCRETE

The materials for precast work shall be similar to the materials for in-situ work. The
workmanship for precast work shall comply with C.P. 116 except where this conflicts with
this specification when the specification shall prevail.

The Contractor shall prepare for any type of precast units, a drawing indicating his proposed
formwork construction, casing method, de-moulding and handling procedure for the
Architect’s approval.

Moulds and formwork shall be so constructed that the dimensions of the finished concrete
members are within the specified permissible tolerances given in Clause 407 of B.S. 8110.

Where precast concrete is described as “Fair Faced”, the moulds shall be metal, or are to
have metal or hard board linings, or are to be other approved moulds which will produce a
smooth, dense fair face to the finished concrete and free from all shutter marks, holes,
pitting, etc.

Precast concrete shall be of the mixes described on the drawings in suitable mould, true in
form of the shapes require, thoroughly tamped into the moulds and around reinforcement
and vibrated.

All precast concrete work shall be carried out under cover and the period before removal
from forms and the period of storing shall be determined and agreed by the Architect and
the Contractor with due regard to the type of unit, i.e. load bearing or non-load bearing,
difficulties of casing, projections, holes and other points which require particular attention.

The method of lifting, position of lifting points and curing time before lifting shall be agreed
with the Architect before casting of any units.

Extreme care shall be taken when handling precast units and any units damaged during
transportation and/or positioning shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

5.15.0 MEASUREMENT PREAMBLES

Concrete work shall be measured generally in accordance with the method of measurement
stated in the contract. The rates shall be deemed to include for complying with the
specification in all respects. All testing and samples required by the specification, whether
covered by a particular item below or not, shall be deemed to be included within the rates or
sums in the Bills of Quantities. Where the Architect may instruct the Contractor to test
(such test not being mandatory), the materials or workmanship in accordance with the
provisions of the specifications, the test of such costs will be borne by the Employer, if the
test result proves unsatisfactory. In either case no consequential costs or delay will be
allowed, it being considered that testing covered by this specification is being of a usual or
expected nature.

The rate for concrete shall include for all costs associated with the following:-

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 38

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 a) Supply concrete of the required strength, manufactured with materials complying with
the specification.

b) Mixing, transporting, placing, compacting, curing and protecting the concrete all as
specified.

c) Forming construction joints and complying with the specified requirements for
maximum bay size and intervals between casting adjacent bays.

d) Providing test certificates for cement and aggregates.

e) Designing the concrete mix (where applicable) and carrying out trial mixes and
preliminary tests.

f) Carrying out routine sampling and testing of concrete and its constituents.

5.15.1 Mass concrete

The rate for mass concrete in blinding shall, in addition to B. (a) to B. (f) above,
include, for concreting the sub-base.

The rate for mass concrete shall, in addition to B. (a) to B. (f) above, include for
any formwork necessary unless otherwise stated in the item description.

5.15.2 Rod Reinforcement

The rate for rod reinforcement shall include all costs associated with the following:-

a) Supply rod reinforcement complying with the specifications.

b) Providing test certificates

c) Cutting, bending and fixing reinforcement including any welding were this is
approved.

d) Providing and fixing all spacers, tying wire, chairs and stools.

5.15.3 Fabric Reinforcement

The rate for rod reinforcement shall include all costs associated with the following:-

a) Supplying fabric reinforcement complying with the specifications.

b) Providing test certificates

c) Cutting and fixing fabric reinforcement

d) Providing and fixing all spacers, tying wire, chairs and stools.

e) Providing the specified laps, fabric will be measured as the net plan area.

5.15.4 Sawn Formwork

The rate for rod reinforcement shall include all the costs associated with the
following:-

a) Supplying, fixing, easing and striking all temporary forms as specified

together with all temporary construction required for their support.

b) Supplying details or calculations for formwork.

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 39

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 c) Coating with material to prevent adhesion to the concrete.

d) Complying with specified minimum periods before removal of forms.

e) Back propping for multi-storey construction.

5.15.5 Wrought Formwork

The rate for wrought formwork shall include for all costs associated with the
following :-

a) Supplying, fixing, easing and striking all temporary forms as specified

together with all temporary construction required for their support.

b) Supplying details or calculations for formwork.

c) Coating with material to prevent adhesion to the concrete.

d) Complying with specified minimum periods before removal of forms.

e) Back propping for multi-storey construction.

f) Providing sample panels of concrete as specified and removing on

completion of the works.

5.15.6 Precast Concrete

The rate of precast concrete shall include for all costs associated with the following
:-

a) Supplying concrete including items on the above clauses.

b) Supplying rod reinforcement including ditto.

c) Supplying fabric reinforcement (if applicable) including ditto.

d) Supplying, fixing, easing and striking moulds and formwork as specified

including replacement after multiple use.

e) Producing drawings and details as specified.

g) Coating moulds with materials to prevent adhesion to the concrete.

h) Complying with specified minimum periods before removal of forms.

i) All handling, lifting and fixing of precast units.

5.15.7 Composite Floor Construction

The rate for composite floor construction is to include for all moulds, materials and
all unspecified items necessary for the manufacture of hollow concrete blocks by
the Contractor.

Another rate will be applicable in the event of the Contractor purchasing the block
as specified from independent suppliers or manufacturers.

5.15.8 Waffle Floor Construction

The rate for waffle floor construction is to include for all moulds, materials and all
items necessary for complying with the specification. The rate shall also be deemed

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 40

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 to include for solid concrete margins and bearings.

6.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 41

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 6.0 STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK

6.1.0 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

The quality of all materials and workmanship used in the execution of this Contract shall
comply with the requirements of the most recent issues of the following British Standards
and Codes of Practice, including all amendments to date of calling for Tenders.

a) BS.4 (Part 1) - Hot Rolled Sections

b) BS.4 (Part 2) - Hot Rolled Hollow Sections

c) BS.449 - The use of Structural Steel in building.

d) BS.638 - Arc Welding Plant, Equipment and Accessories.

e) BS.639 - Covered Electrodes for the Manual Metal Arc Welding

of Mild Steel and Medium Tensile Steel

f) BS.916 - Black Bolts, Screws and Nuts

g) BS.1449 - Steel plate, sheet and strip

h) BS.1775 - Steel Tubes for Mechanical, Structural and General

Engineering purposes.

i) BS.2994 - Cold Rolled Steel Sections

j) BS.4190 - IPSO Metric black hexagon bolts, screws and nuts

k) BS.4320 - Metal washers for general engineering purposes

l) BS.4360 - Weldable structural steel

m) BS.4848 - Hot rolled structural steel sections

n) BS.4872 - Approval testing of welders when welding procedure

approval is not required

o) BS.5153 - General requirement for the Metal Arc welding of

structural steel

p) BS.5493 - Protection of iron and steel structures from corrosion

The Architect may at any time require any materials to be tested in accordance with the
requirements of the standards listed above. The cost of all successful tests shall be borne by
the client, but the contractor/sub-contractor shall if required promptly supply at his own
expense, test pieces as required by the architect. The costs of tests on materials failing to
comply with this standard shall be borne by the contractor/sub-contractor. If in the opinion
of the architect, faulty materials and/or workmanship have been used in the works, the
contractor/sub-contractor may be directed to dismantle and cut out the parts concerned and
remove them for examination and testing. The cost of dismantling, cutting out and making
good to the approval of the architect shall be born by the contractor/sub-contractor.

6.2.0 FABRICATION

6.2.1 Cutting and Bending

All members, plates, brackets, etc. shall be neatly and accurately sheared, sawn or
profiled to the required shape as shown on the drawings. Where steel is oxy-cut to
shape, care shall be taken to preserve the full finished sizes required. If the

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 42

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 members of plates are bent or set, the bends or sets shall be correctly made to the
radii or angles specified without leaving hammer marks. The material may be
heated to permit this. Materials that have been heated shall be annealed to
approval.

6.2.2 Punching and Drilling

Holes for black bolts shall be drilled or punched 2 mm larger in diameter than the
bolt used. Holes for high tensile friction grip bolts shall be drilled or sub-punched
and reamed to 2 mm larger in diameter than the specified bolt sizes. All drilled
holes shall be parallel sided and shall be drilled with the axis of the holes
perpendicular to the surface. Badly drilled holes shall either be reamed out to
approval and larger bolts fitted or otherwise as directed. All rough arises shall be
ground off.

Holes for bolts in material thicker than 15 mm must be drilled. When holes are
drilled in one operation through two or more thicknesses of material, the parts shall
be separated after drilling and all burrs removed before assembly. Holes for bolts
shall not be formed by a gas cutting process.

6.2.3 Tolerances

All members shall be fabricated with a tolerance in length of +0mm and –3mm, all
not deviate from straightness by more than 1 in 400.

The allowance for angular twist shall be (3+0.6L)mm where L is the length of the
member under consideration in metres. Twist shall be measured by placing the
member as fabricated against a flat surface measuring the difference between the
two corners of the opposite end.

The above tolerances shall be adhered to unless otherwise specified on the

Architect’s drawing.

6.3.0 FASTENING

6.3.1 Bolting

All bolts used shall be of such length that at least one full thread is exposed beyond
the nut after the nut has been tightened. Where a nut or bolthead would bear on
an inclined surface, a bevelled washer of the correct shape shall be interposed
between the two surfaces. Bevelled washers shall not be allowed to get out of
position during fabrication and erection and for this purpose may be spot welded
to the steel surface. Bevelled washers for use with high tensile bolts may not be
welded.

6.3.2 Black Bolts, Nuts and Washers

All black Bolts, Nuts and Washers shall comply with the requirement of BS.916 or
alternatively BS. 4190 IPSO metric black hexagonal bolts screws and nuts.

6.3.3 High Tensile Bolts, Nuts and Washers, Friction Grip Bolts

All high tensile steel bolts, nuts and washers used in joints shall comply with the
requirement of BS.3139 and shall be used in accordance with BS.3294.

6.4.0 ELECTRICAL WELDING

All welding shall be carried out in strict accordance with the requirement of BS.1856 and 938
and electrodes shall comply with BS.639.

Fusion faces shall be free from irregularities such as tears, fins, etc which would interfere

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 43

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 with the deposition of weld metal.

Fusion faces shall be smooth and uniform and shall be free from loose scale, slag, rust,
grease, paint, and/or other deleterious material.

All welds shall be of acceptable types, shall be of the finished sizes specified, and shall be
carried out in such sequence that minimum distortion of the parts welded results.

Preparation of edges for welding shall be carried out by planning of machine flame cutting.
Manual flame cutting may be permitted in certain circumstances.

Parts to be welded shall be maintained in their correct relative positions during welding,
preferably by jigs.

Multiple run welds shall be carried out with each run closely following the previous run but
allowing sufficient time for the proper removal of slag.

The contractor/sub-contractor shall ensure that each run is inspected and any unsatisfactory
weld cut out and re-made to approval.

Welds in material 25 mm or greater in thickness shall be made by the Argon arc or similar
and approved process, and special precautions shall be taken to prevent weld cracking.

Unless otherwise shown, the minimum size of fillet shall be 6 mm.

On completion, welds shall present a smooth and regular finish. Weld metal should be solid
throughout with complete fusion between weld metal and parent metal and between
successive runs throughout the joint.

Defects shall be cut out and made good to approval in sound weld metal.

The external faces of butt welds are to be ground smooth on completion and to be to the
approval of the Architect.

6.5.0 SHOP AND FIELD CONNECTIONS

6.5.1 Rolled Sections

All shop connections shall be electric welded or bolted with high tensile friction
grip bolts.

No bolts used shall be less than 12 mm diameter and no weld shall be less than 40
mm in length. At least two bolts shall be used in connections transmitting loads
unless otherwise indicated by the Architect.

No weld of length less than four times the nominal fillet size shall be deemed
capable of carrying a load.

Beam to column connections not detailed shall be on “Standard” top and bottom
cleat connections with the load carried on the bottom cleat. “Standard” web
connections shall be used for connecting beams to beams.

Field connections shall be as detailed, i.e. bolted with high tensile or black bolts in
drilled holes. Black bolts in punched holes will only be permitted for connections
carrying a designed load or for connections to timber members.

6.5.2 Structural Hollow Sections - Circular and Rectangular

Hollow Sections shall be connected by electric welding unless shown otherwise.

The design of welds shall be in accordance with Clause 53 and 54 and Appendix C

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 44

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 of BS. 449.

Butt welds shall be made with the fusion surfaces of the ends of each member
properly aligned.

6.6.0 ASSEMBLY

6.6.1 Trusses and Portal Frames

Trusses shall be carefully set out to the dimensions shown on the drawings.

Where it is required the trusses be cambered, such camber shall be provided by

bending the bottom chord to the arc of a circle.

Notwithstanding any dimensions spacing of purlin cleats, the contractor/sub-

contractor shall ensure that purlin cleat spacing is satisfactory for the available
stock lengths of roof sheeting. However, the architect’s approval must first be
obtained before any alteration is made in purlin spacing or sheeting sizes.

Splices in portal and other frames shall be made where shown on the details or
where indicated.

6.6.2 Boxed Members

Abutting edges of boxed members shall be connected and scaled with a continuous
weld to exclude the entrance of moisture. Where specified, such welds shall be
ground flush to approval.

6.6.3 Shop Assembly

Such assembly of units in the shop as is specified or necessary before transporting

to the site will be inspected by the architect before painting. The work will be laid
out in the shop or yard so that all parts are accessible for inspection and testing of
the work.

The contractor/sub-contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and testing
for the work and he must notify the architect on each occasion when the material is
ready for inspection.

6.6.4 Marking

All members of the structure to be site assembled shall be match marked in

accordance with the shop details and marking plans submitted for approval.

6.7.0 ERECTION

6.7.1 Site Dimensions

No erection shall commence before accurate Site Dimensions have been taken by
the contractor/sub-contractor, and no claim will be considered should final
dimensions differ form those on the drawings. Any modifications to the structural
steel required in order to comply with Site Dimensions shall be made on the
ground to the architect’s approval before erection is commenced.

6.7.2 General Setting-Out Tolerances

The Temporary Bench Mark (TBM) which shall be located at the Structural
Ground Floor Level (S.G.F.L.) having been agreed on site between the architect
and the contractor, shall be considered as the site datum.

The datum points for the setting out of the datum lines passing through TBM at

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 45

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 all floor and roof levels shall be:+/-Om.

The Permissible Deviation from the TBM and DL shall be as follows:-

a) Setting out on Plant at S.G.F.L.

All setting out dimensions with respect to each datum line (i.e. P.D. from
“x” and “y” plan axes) = +/ - 10 mm/30 metres.

b) Transfer of TBM to Structural First Floor, intermediate floor and roof levels

With respect to the TBM at S.G.F.L., the TBM at:

First Floor Level - +/ - 5 mm

Intermediate Floor Levels - +/ - 10 mm

Roof Level - +/ - 15 mm

b) Setting out on plan or upper floors with respect to the transferred TBM.

All setting out of dimensions with respect of each datum lines

= +/ 10 mm / 30 metres.

c) The clear distance between adjacent elements at any level where accuracy
is required for doors, windows, services, secondary steelwork etc.

d) The P.D. with respect to the relevant TBM of the upper or lower surface
of
any truss or element, taking into account specified cambers:

e) The Plumb vertical members: = + 10 mm / storey.

6.7.3 Equipment

All erection shall be carried out by competent and experienced men and the
contractor/sub-contractor shall take every care to safeguard the public, workmen
and adjoining property.

All gear used shall be of adequate strength and shall comply with all regulations
current at the time.

The contractor/sub-contractor shall be held responsible for all damage caused to

the structure, workmen, or buildings during erection.

6.7.4 Storing and Handling

Steel shall be stored and handled and erected in such a manner that no member is
subjected to excessive stresses which could have an adverse effect on the properties
of the steel. If in the opinion of the architect, the steel work has been subjected to
such treatment, the contractor shall remove this steel from the site and replace it at
his own expense.

6.7.5 Erection Details.

No member or part of a member which has been bent or distorted shall be erected
in that condition. All straightening shall be done in the ground.

Columns shall be wedged to line and level on steel or cast iron wedges and checked
by the Architect. After acceptance, column bases shall be grouted to approval
before wedges are removed. Unless shown on the drawing, all columns shall be

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 46

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 left truly vertical and correct to line and level. Beams, girts, etc. shall be erected
level unless otherwise shown, and correctly positioned.

Trusses and open web joists shall be carefully handled at all times and when being
erected shall be lifted at such points and in such manner as will prelude any
possibility of damage from erection stresses.

Immediately after erection, each truss shall be made secure by purlins, bracing or
guys to approval.

Bracing shall be placed in position as soon as dependent work will permit.

6.7.6 Field Connections

In making connections, drifting of unfair holes will not be permitted and holes not
matching properly shall either be reamed or drilled out and a larger bolt inserted or
otherwise as directed.

Holes formed or enlarged by oxy-cutting will be condemned and must be filled to

approval by electric welding and red drilled.

Tightening and testing High Tensile Friction Grip Bolts:-

a) Before assembly, the contact surface, including those adjacent to the washers,
shall be de-scaled or carry normal tight mill scale. They shall be free from
dirt, oil, loose scale, burrs, paint (except priming paint) pits and other defects
that would prevent solid seating of the parts.

b) Bolts shall be assembled with approved hardened flat or tapered washers as

required between the bolthead and nut and the softer mild steel.

c) When bearing faces of the bolted parts have a slope of more than 1 in 20
with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis, square smooth bevelled
washers shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallelism.

d) All bolts shall be tightened by the “Turn of Nut” method. This method shall
generally be as approved by the architect to achieve in all bolts a minimum
tension equal to the proof load.

6.7.7 Grouting

Unless otherwise detailed on the drawings, a space of not less than twenty (20) mm
and not more than forty (40) mm shall be provided between undersides of column
baseplates and footings, and between all beam and roof truss bearings and concrete
pads, etc.

After each column, beam, or roof truss has been wedged up to a line and level and
fixed in position to approval, the space between footing or pad and the underside
of the baseplates or steel member shall be grounded with a mixture of portland
cement and approved washed sand.

The Portland Cement and sand shall be thoroughly mixed to approval in equal
proportions by volume with only sufficient water to produce a mixture of “damp
earth” consistency and shall be used within twenty minutes of mixing. The
caulking mixture shall be packed to approval into the space between baseplate and
foundation and protected from damage until set.

6.8.0 PAINTING

6.8.1 Painting Material

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 47

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All paints are to be supplied by a supplier approved in writing by the architect.

Paints are to be delivered to the site in the original containers as supplied by the
manufacturer with seals unbroken and are to be used in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Manufacturer’s representatives are to be free to visit
the site and inspect materials and workmanship, and if necessary take samples of
materials for laboratory analysis.

Paints are not to be thinned unless instructed by the architect.

No external painting is to be carried out during rain or when rain is likely to occur
before the paint has had time to dry. All surfaces are to be dry and free from
moisture at the time of painting.

6.8.2 Preparation for Painting

All structural steel shall be thoroughly scraped and wire brushed to remove mill
scale and rust. Dirt and grease or oil shall be washed off with white spirit and the
steel allowed to dry.

6.8.3 Painting Process

A first coat of Red Oxide Zinc Chromate primer shall be applied in the works
immediately the steel preparation has been completed. A minimum of 24 hours
shall elapse before the steel is moved from its position whilst painting has been
carried out. After delivery to site, the steel shall be carefully examined and all areas
where the priming coat has been damaged and/or where rust has developed shall
be washed with white spirit and wire brushed as necessary and a further priming
coat as for the first applied to completely cover the damaged areas.

During erection, surfaces of steel which are to be in contact shall be painted with
one further coat of primer as previously described and the surfaces brought
together whilst the paint is still wet.

Bolts, Nuts, Washers, etc. shall after erection is completed to approval, be carefully
de-greased with white spirit and painted as for steelwork.

Steel purlins and sheeting rails shall generally be painted as for steelwork except for
purlins and rails supporting aluminium sheeting when the following specifications
shall be used:-

a) 1st coat - Red Oxide Zinc Chromate Primer

b) 2nd Coat - An approved Aluminium paint

The interior of mild steel gutters shall be prepared as previously described for
structural steelwork.

STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK 48

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

7.0 WALLING

WALLING 49

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

7.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

Requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice and equivalent Uganda Bureau
of Standards shall be observed:-

7.1.1 British Standards

a) B.S. 3921 part 2 Bricks and blocks of fired brickwork clay

b) B.S. 1180 Concrete bricks and fixing bricks

c) B.S. 4729 Shapes and dimensions of special bricks

d) B.S. 2028, 1364 type B Precast concrete blocks (for general use and load bearing
walls above damp proof course)

e) B.S. 2028, 1364 type C Precast concrete blocks (for internal non-load bearing
walls)

f) B.S. 1200 table 1 and 2 Sand for mortar for plain and reinforced brickwork, block
walling and masonry.

g) B.S. 890 part 2 Building limes (Hydrated Lime)

h) B.S. 4721 Ready mixed lime: sand for mortar

i) B.S. 4551 Methods of testing mortars and specifications for mortar

mixing sand

j) B.S. 743 Materials for damp proof courses.

k) B.S. 1178 Milled sheet lead and strip for building purposes

l) B.S. 1243 Fig. Metal ties for cavity wall construction (vertical twist type)

m) C.P. 111 Structural recommendations for load bearing walls.

n) C.P. 121 part 1 Walling

o) C.P. 122, 202 part 1 Masonry – rubble walls

p) C.P. 122 Walls and partitions of blocks and slabs

e) NOTE: The contractor’s attention is drawn to Section

“G” of the Standard Method of Measurements.

f) WATER: Shall be as specified in “concrete work”

7.2.0 GENERAL

7.2.1 Samples and sample panels

WALLING 50

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Samples of all types of blocks, bricks and stone required for the works shall be
produced to the architect for his prior written approval before any orders are
placed. After approval of samples, the contractor shall erect 1200 mm x 1200 mm
sample panels as required by the architect. No work shall be commenced until
written approval has been given to sample panels, which shall be maintained for the
duration of the work to which the sample applies. Any work inferior to approved
samples shall be taken down and removed if required by the architect. The cost of
providing samples and sample panels shall be deemed to be included in the
contract sum.

7.2.2 Pricing

Rates for walling are to include for reinforcement strips.

Labours on stone walling stated in the Standard Method of Measurement as to be

included shall be deemed to include for redressing the beds of stone on site to the
minimum extent necessary to obtain uniformity of coursing and for any redressing
of faces necessary to bring the thickness within the tolerance specified.

Rates for walling of any description are to include for all expenses in connection
with the provision and conveyance of samples of walling materials to the Ugandan
Ministry of Works, Central Materials Testing Laboratory, Kampala.

7.3.0 MATERIALS

7.3.1 Cement

Cement shall be as described in Concrete Work.

7.3.2 Aggregate

Fine aggregate or sand for concrete blocks shall be as described in Concrete Work.

Coarse aggregate or ballast for concrete blocks shall be good, hard, clean aggregate
from approved quarries. It shall be free from all decomposed materials and shall
be graded up to 10 mm and all as described for coarse aggregate or ballast in
Concrete Work.

7.3.3 Limes

Hydrated limes for cement/lime mortar shall comply with K.S. 02-97 sem-
hydraulic or non-hydraulic calcium limes. Lime for lime/sand mortar shall comply
with K.S. 02-97 and shall be hydraulic.

7.3.4 Sand for mortar

Sand for mortar shall comply with B.S. 1200.

7.3.5 Concrete blocks

Concrete blocks for walling shall comply with B.S. 6073 part 1, solid or hollow
two-hole type as specified, and made in approved block making machines, under
cover, of a composition as follows:-

a) Portland cement 1 M3

b) Fine aggregate (graded up to 5 mm) 3 M3

WALLING 51

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 c) Course aggregate (graded up to 10 mm) 6 M3

The compressive strength of non load bearing blocks shall be not less than:-

d) Average 10 blocks 3.5 N/sq mm, gross area

e) Lowest individual block 2.8 N/sq mm, gross area

When load bearing, the compressive strength of blocks shall be:-

f) Average of 10 blocks 7.0 N/sq mm, gross area

g) Lowest individual block 5.6 N/sq mm, gross area

All testing shall be in accordance with B.S. 2028.

Newly made blocks shall be carefully deposited on racks under sheds and then left
for three days and kept thoroughly wet the whole time, after which they shall be
put out in the open on racks and protected with approved matting, sacking or straw
and kept wet for a further five days, then kept in the same position and under same
mat cover, but without wetting, for a further seven days to season.

Blocks to be subsequently covered with an in-situ finishing may be slightly rough in

texture. Fair-face blocks shall be perfectly smooth.

7.3.6 Precast concrete louvre or screen blocks

Precast concrete louvre or screen blocks shall comply in all respects with the
specification for precast items contained in the “Concrete Work” specification and
shall be constructed to the dimensions and form shown in the drawings.

7.3.7 Stone

Stone shall be sound and hard and free from all defects and shall be obtained from
a quarry approved by the architect.

All stone required for walling (unless otherwise described), shall be chisel dressed
into true rectangular blocks with each surface even and at right angles to all
adjoining surfaces. Ordinary walling shall be built in 190 mm courses, and of the
thicknesses given herein with all dimensions having a tolerance of plus or minus 6
mm. At least 80% of all stone blocks shall be not less than 500 mm in length and
no block will be allowed to be cut or redressed after it is built into the work.

7.3.8 Damp-Proof course

Bituminous felt sheeting for damp-proof courses shall be three-ply heavy duty
hessian based felt in accordance with B.S. 743 Ref. “A” weighing not less than 3.8
kgs per square metre. The sheeting is to be lapped 150 mm at running joints and
the full width of walls at angles.

7.4.0 WORKMANSHIP

7.4.1 Storage of materials

a) Cement, sand and limes As described in concrete work.

b) Blocks and bricks Open stacked to permit ventilation and

protection from the sun, rain and rising damp.
WALLING 52

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 7.4.2 Wetting blocks, bricks and stone

Blocks bricks and stone shall be wetted as necessary before and after laying. Walls
shall be kept wet for three days after building.

7.4.3 Bonding Walls

The blocks shall be properly bonded together and in such a manner that no vertical
joint in any one course shall be within 115 mm of a similar joint in the course
immediately above or below. Sufficient through-bonders shall be provided.
Alternate courses of walling at all angles and intersections shall be carried through
the full thickness of the adjoining walls. All walling shall be built up entirely solid
in blocks, without voids, allowance being made for only 10 mm thick joints. All
perpends, reveals and other angles of the walling shall be built strictly true and
square.

7.4.4 Generally

The contractor shall provide all setting out rods.

Walling shall not be built on concrete foundations until at least four days after
casting.

All blockwork and brickwork shall be built uniform, true and level, with all
perpends vertical and in line. No work shall rise more than 1 metre above
adjoining work and all such risings are to be properly raked back in long steps to
prevent cracks. Risings and all walls shall be leveled around at each floor.

Joints generally are not to exceed 10 mm in thickness. Cutting of blockworks

against concrete soffites, etc. shall include for cutting to give normal 10 mm joints
and complete filling thereof with mortar.

All walls built in hollow concrete blocks, where finishing with an open top edge,
(i.e. not against ceiling, beams, etc) or at the underside of cills, shall be finished with
a solid concrete block top course.

Openings for wooden doors, frames, windows, hatches, ventilators, etc. are to be
set out and left unbuilt until the wooden frames have been fixed in position.

Openings for metal frames are to be wide enough for the frames to fit without
being forced into position. Lugs shall be built into joints and the space between
walling and frame filled with cement mortar well tamped into the channel of the
frames and pointed all round.

7.4.5 Wall reinforcement

Where walls or partitions are constructed of blocks of stones less than 150 mm
thick, they shall be reinforced with a 25 mm wide strip of 2 mm thick hoop iron
built into alternate horizontal joints in the wall centre. The hoop iron shall be
lapped and hooked at running joints, angles and intersections and carried at least
115 mm into abutting walls and junctions.

7.4.6 Mortar mixing

The constituent materials shall be measured separately when dry in specially

prepared gauge boxes of sizes to give the proportions specified without
consolidation of the contents by ramming and shaking. The mortar shall be mixed
WALLING 53

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 in an approved power driven mixer for not less than two minutes per batch and
using the minimum quantity of water necessary to obtain a working consistency.
The mixer shall be used as close as practicable to the works and mortar shall be
used within 30 minutes of mixing. Partially or wholly set mortar shall not be used
or re-mixed.

7.4.7 Bedding and pointing

All blocks shall be bedded on a solid bed of mortar; vertical faces of block shall be
well buttered before being laid and the whole well grouted at each course. Joints of
blockwork to be plastered shall be roughly raked out to form a key. Joints of air
face blockwork shall be either finished flush or finished recessed 6 mm as specified.

7.4.8 Stone Walling

Stones are to be selected for size and colour and dressed on face to match existing
and neatly bonded in. The stones are to be bedded in cement mortar and pointed
with a neat recessed joint and upon completion the faces are to be well washed
down and wire brushed.

7.4.9 Fair-face work

Walling of any material required to be fair-faced shall be of selected materials,

uniform, and even in appearance with joints neatly executed as specified.

7.4.10 Holes and chases

Where walling is cut, holed or chased for conduits, pipes or the like, all such chases
shall be filled in solid with cement mortar mix (1:4) prior to the application of
finishes. In no case shall a vertical chase be deeper than one third the thickness of
the wall and in no case shall a horizontal chase be deeper than one sixth of the
thickness of the wall.

Putlog holes shall be not less than one course deep, afterwards filled with a block
cut neatly fit.

WALLING 54

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

8.0 ASPHALT WORK

ASPHALT WORK 55

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

8.0 ASPHALT WORK

8.1.0 STANDARD AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards shall be observed:-

8.1.1 British Standards

a) B.S. 1162, 1410 and 1418 Mastic asphalt for tanking and damp-proof
courses (Natural rock asphalt aggregate)

b) B.S. 988, 1097, 1076 and 1451 Mastic asphalt for tanking and damp course
(limestone aggregate)

c) C.P. 102 Protection of building against water from

ground.

d) NOTE: The contractor’s attention is drawn to Section

“j” of the Standard Method of Measurement.

All asphalt shall comply with the requirements of subsections B.S. 1418 and 1097
and C.P. 102 specifically dealing with tanking operations.

8.2.0 MASTIC ASPHALT FOR TANKING

The contractor shall arrange for the work to be executed by an approved sub-contractor.
No other sub-contractor will then be permitted to be employed without the written authority
of the architect.

Tropicalised mastic asphalt is to comply with B.S. 1097/1966 and B.S. 1418 applied in three
coats, in the case of horizontal work on and including sheathing felt; in the case of vertical
work without sheathing felt. The third and final coat is to have a polished finish. All
tanking operations to comply with C.P. 102.

The contractor is to take all necessary precautions to protect finished work, and it is his
responsibility to ensure that no damage occurs to surfaces during subsequent building
operations
or any reasons whatsoever.

For tanking to basements, lay over the whole area of the basement concrete floor, a
horizontal damp proof course in three thicknesses laid with 150 mm laps to one course of
foundation walling on outer face of wall with a vertical damp proof course with a double
angle fillet.

Vertical faces of basement walls shall then be covered with a damp proof course applied in
three thicknesses with 75 mm laps to a total thickness of not less than 20 mm.

Vertical damp-proof courses shall be carried up to a minimum height of 150 mm above

ground level and connected at bottom to horizontal damp-proof coursed-in walls with
double fillet formed on top of foundations to form a complete tank to basement.

All junctions between horizontal and vertical asphalt shall be warmed, cleaned and properly
made good with two-coat angle fillets a all internal angles.

Properly made good joints between lining pits and horizontal damp proof courses to floor
shall be effected and double angle fillets to all internal angles maintained.

ASPHALT WORK 56

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 It is essential that continuity of tanking be maintained. Care must be exercised to ensure that
such continuity is not destroyed by stanchions, pits, sumps, etc.

Protect asphalt by the application of loading coats immediately each section of work is
complete. Pumping of any water gaining access shall be continued until not only the asphalt
work is complete, but also until loading coats are thoroughly set.

If the water level is near, such water level shall be maintained at not less than 0.3 m below
the level of the base concrete during the progress of tanking work to avoid the application of
asphalt on wet surfaces and this pumping operation shall be maintained until the temporary
sump has been filled and sealed.

ASPHALT WORK 57

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

9.0 ROOFING

ROOFING 58

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

9.0 ROOFING

9.1.0 ROOFING SHEETS PRE-PAINTED MILD STEEL/G.C.I. SHEETING

9.1.1 Generally

Pre-painted corrugated mild steel sheeting shall be No. 24 Gauge of best quality in
accordance with B.S. 3038, and shall conform to Uganda Bureau of Standards.

9.1.2 Laps

Sheets shall be laid with 150 mm end laps and side laps of 30 mm corrugations on
the side away from the prevailing wind.

9.1.3 Fixing of steel and timber

The sheets shall be fixed to mild steel angle purlins with 6 mm diameter pre-
painted mild steel hook bolts 50 mm longer in the shank than the depth of the steel
purlins to which they are fixed each with one diamond shaped bitumen washer,
one, pre-painted steel washer, and one pre-painted steel nut. The sheets shall be
fixed to timber purlins by using 14 gauge drive screw with bituminous felt washer
backed by cranked diamond shaped aluminium washer.

9.1.4 Holes

Holes for bolts or screws shall be punched from the inside of the sheet and
through the ridges of corrugations NOT in the hollows. A clearance of 0.80 mm
on the bolt or screw must be allowed.

9.1.5 Ridges, Valleys, Flashings

The ridges, valleys, flashings etc. shall be formed of No. 24 gauge pre-painted mild
steel sheeting of a quality equal to the sheeting on each side at 450 mm centres
maximum with 6 mm diameter seam bolts 20 mm long each with one diamond
shaped bitumen washer, one pre-painted steel washer and one pre-painted steel
nut.

Ridges and valleys shall not be less than 375 mm girth.

9.1.6 Bolts and Screws

All fixing bolts and screws shall comply with B.S. 1494.

9.1.7 Square Abutments

At the square abutments, the last two corrugated of the corrugated iron sheets next
to wall shall be flattened and turned up against wall and covered with 24 gauge pre-
painted sheet iron apron flashing.

9.1.8 Bat Proofing

Bat proofing shall consist of “Perspex” or other equal and approved translucent
plastic corrugated sheetings.

9.2.0 TILED ROOFING

ROOFING 59

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 9.2.1 Concrete single-pin tiles and fittings

Concrete single-pin tiles and fittings shall comply to B.S. 473 and 550: Part 2 group
B. Tiles are to be 381 x 229 mm nominal unless otherwise specified.

9.2.2 Concrete single-pin tiles and fittings

Surface coating, when specified must be firmly bonded. A full range of fittings are
available from the manufacturer and must match the tiles with which they are laid.

9.2.3 Mangalore Tiles

Mangalore tiles where specified, shall be interlocking clay tiles as manufactured by

M/s Clayworks Ltd. or other equal and approved. They shall be uniform in size,
shape and colour, hard, well burnt and free from defect.

They shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions.

9.2.4 Polythene Underlay

Polythene shall conform to B.S. 3012: 500 gauge and of approved manufacture.

9.2.5 Nails for underlay

Nails for underlay shall comply to B.S. 1202: Part 1.

9.2.6 Tying Wire

Tying Wire shall comply to B.S. 443, 1.6 mm diameter (16 S.W.G.) iron wire.

ROOFING 60

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

10.0 CARPENTRY

CARPENTRY 61

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

10.0 CARPENTRY

10.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice shall be
observed:-

10.1.1 British Standards

a) B.S. 565 Glossary of items relating to timber and woodwork

b) B.S. 1860 part 1 Structural timber. Measurements of characteristics

affecting strength (softwood)

c) B.S. 4471 Dimensions for softwood

d) B.S. 373 Methods of testing small clear specimens of timber.

e) B.S. 1202 part 1 Nails

f) B.S. 1579 Connectors for timber

g) B.S. 4169 Glued laminated structural members

h) B.S. 916 Black bolts

10.1.2 Codes of Practice

a) C.P. 112 The structural use of timber

b) C.P. 98 Preservative treatment for construction timber.

c) NOTE: The contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “L” of

the Standard Method of Measurement.
10.2.0 DEFINITIONS

10.2.1 Selected

The term ‘selected’ shall be deemed to include keeping the material so described
clean for staining, polishing, or any similar finish.

10.2.2 Hardwood or the like

The term ‘hardwood or the like’ which is used as a statement to which

ironmongery is to be fixed, shall be deemed to include plywood and other
manufactured materials, except when faced with metal, laminated plastics or the
like.

10.3.0 MATERIALS

10.3.1 Terminology

CARPENTRY 62

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All technical terms shall be as defined in the Glossary of Terms used in Timber
Standards, KS. 02 1976 and, where applicable, the British Standard Code of
Practice No. 112.

10.3.2 Timber Generally

Timber shall be sound, well conditioned, properly seasoned, containing not more
than 15% moisture for joinery work or 18% moisture for carpentry work, and
complying with the following performance specification:-

10.3.3 Performance Specifications

These specifications refer to all conifer (soft-wood) and broad leaved (hard-wood)
species and apply to timber sections incorporated in the building after they have
had a sufficient time to season. The period required for green timber to season
fully after installation under cover shall be assumed to be one month for each 25
mm thickness.

Unless noted elsewhere, timber shall conform to the listed specifications as

follows:-

a) F Grade Furniture and high class joinery

b) GJ Grade General joinery

c) S75 Grade Structural grade having grade stress value of

75% of basic stress.

d) S50 Grade Structural grade having grade stress value of

50% of basic stress.

e) C Grade A general construction grade for non-stressed

construction.

f) L Grade A low grade for low quality work.

Defects shall not exceed those specified in Tables, 1, 2, & 3 of KS 02-17.

10.4.0 GENERAL

All timber used for carpentry shall be sound, well conditioned, properly seasoned to suit
particular use and free from defects or combination of defects rendering it unsuitable for the
purpose intended.

Timber used for carpentry shall be in accordance with the latest approved Grading Rules
issued by the Government of Uganda. Timber used structurally shall comply with the
requirements of the Export Grading rules made under the Export of Timber Act (Uganda),
Second or Select Grade, and also with B.S. 1860.

The following timber shall be used:-

a) Cypress

b) Podocarpus (podocarpus spp)

c) Cedar (Junipers Procera)

d) Elgon Olive
CARPENTRY 63

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All timber shall be free of live borer, beetle or other insect attack when brought upon on
site. The contractor shall be responsible, to the end of maintenance period, for executing at
his own cost, all the work necessary to eradicate insect attack of timber attacked or suspected
to be attacked, notwithstanding that the timber concerned may have already been inspected
and passed as fit for use.

Timber shall be seasoned to a moisture content of not more than 18%.

All carpentry timbers shall be treated with pressure impregnated “Celcure” or “Tenalith”
solution with a minimum wet retention of 5.46 kg of dry salt per m3. If so required “charge
sheets” issued after treatment with “Celcure” or “Tenalith” shall be submitted by the
contractor to the architect for his retention. All out ends and other cut faces or timbers
sawn after treatment shall be treated before fixing with “Celcure B” or “wolmanol” solution
brushed on.

The contractor’s rates for such timber hereinafter must allow for the above treatment.

All grounds shall be podocarpus or other light and approved hardwood.

Nails shall comply with the relevant standard as above.

Black bolts shall comply with B.S. 916.

Rag bolts, coach screws and others shall comply with B.S. 1494.

Where used externally, nails and screws shall be sherardized.

Timber shall be delivered early to the site, stored under cover clear of the ground and
protected from the sun and dampness.

The architect shall be given facilities and reserves the right for inspection of all works in
progress whether in workshop or on site. The contractor is to allow for testing of pro-types
of special construction units and the architect shall be at liberty to select any samples he may
require for the purpose of testing i.e. for moisture content or identification, species, strength,
etc.

The contractor is to clear out and destroy or remove all cut ends, shavings and other wood
waste from all parts of the building and the site generally, as the work proceeds and at
conclusions of the work.

The clearance, destruction and removal is to prevent accidental borer infestation and to
discourage termites and decay.

All carpentry work shall be accurately set out in strict accordance with the Drawings and
shall be framed together and securely fixed in the best possible manner with properly made
joints. All brads, nails and screws, etc. shall be provided as directed and approved and the
rates shall be deemed to allow for these.

Carpentry work shall be left with sawn faces except where specified to be wrot.

All timber shall be as long as possible in length in order to minimize joints. Where joints are
unavoidable, surfaces shall be in contact over the whole area of the joint before fastenings
are applied.

No nails, screws and bolts are to be fixed in any split end. If splitting is likely, or is
encountered in the course of work, holes for nails are to be prepared at diameters not

CARPENTRY 64

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 exceeding 4/5th of the diameter of the nails. Clenched nails must be bent at right angles to
the grain.

Lead holes are to be bored for all screws. When the use of bolts is specified, the holes are to
be bored from both sides of the timber and are to be of the diameter D/16 where D is the
diameter of the bolt. Nuts must be brought up tight but care must be taken to avoid
crushing of the timber under washers.

CARPENTRY 65

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

11.0 JOINERY

JOINERY 66

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

11.0 JOINERY

11.1.0 STANDARD AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and codes of Practice shall be
observed:-

11.1.1 British Standards

a) B.S. 565 Glossary of terms relating to timber and woodwork.

b) B.S. 4471 Dimensions for softwood

c) B.S. 1186 Part 1+2 Quality of timber and workmanship in joinery

d) B.S. 373 Methods of testing small clear specimen of timber

e) B.S. 4512 Methods of test for clear plywood

f) B.S. 1142 part 3 Fibre building board (Insulation board softwood)

g) B.S. 3444 Blockboard and laminated board

h) B.S. 1445 Plywood manufactured from tropical hardwoods

i) B.S. 3794 Decorative laminated plastic sheets

j) B.S. 459 part 2 Flush doors

k) B.S. 459 part 3 Fire check flush doors and wood and metal frame (1.5
hour and 1 hour types)

l) B.S. 1567 Wood door frame and linings

m) B.S. 584 Wood trims (softwood architrave skirtings,

quadrants, etc)

n) B.S. 1204 parts 1+2 Synthetic resin adhesive (phenolic and type
MR-Moisture amino plastic) for wood
Resistant Type INT - Interior

o) B.S. 1210 Wood screws

p) B.S. 1494 part 2 Fixing accessories for building purposes

(bolts, screws, staples, etc)

q) B.S. 4174 Felt tapping screws and metallic drive

screws.

11.1.2 Codes of Practice

a) C.P. 201 Timber flooring

b) C.P. 201 parts 1+2 Flooring of wood and wood products

c) C.P. 151 Doors and windows including frames and linings

JOINERY 67

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 d) NOTE: The contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “M”
of the Standard Method of Measurements.
11.2.0 DEFINITIONS

11.2.1 Selected

The term “selected” shall be deemed to include keeping the material so described
clean for staining, polishing, or any similar finish.

11.2.2 Hardwood or the like

The term “hardwood or the like” which is used as a statement to which

ironmongery is to be fixed, shall be deemed to include plywood and other
manufactured materials, except when faced with metal, laminated plastics or the
like.

11.3.0 MATERIALS

11.3.1 Terminology

All technical terms shall be as defined in the Glossary of Terms used in Timber
Standards, KS 02 1976 and, where applicable, the British Standard Code of Practice
No. 112.

11.3.2 Timber Generally

Timber shall be sound, well conditioned, properly seasoned, containing not more
than 15% moisture for joinery work or 18% moisture for carpentry work, and
complying with the following performance specification:-

11.3.3 Performance Specifications

These specifications refer to all conifer (soft-wood) and broad leaved (hard-wood)
species and apply to timber sections incorporated in the building after they have
had a sufficient time to season. The period required for green timber to season
fully after installation under cover shall be assumed to be one month for each 25
mm thickness.

Unless noted elsewhere, timber shall conform to the listed specifications as

follows:-

a) F Grade Furniture and high class joinery

b) GJ Grade General joinery

c) S75 Grade Structural grade having grade stress value of 75%

of basic stress.

d) S50 Grade Structural grade having grade stress value of 50%

of basic stress.

e) C Grade A general construction grade for non-stressed

construction.

f) L Grade A low grade for low quality work.

Defects shall not exceed those specified in Tables, 1, 2 & 3 of KS 02-17.

JOINERY 68

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 11.4.0 WORKMANSHIP

The timber for joinery shall be as specified in the Export Timber Ordinance of 1951 and
obtained from an approved sawmill. All such timber shall be Prime Grade and reasonably
straight, grained and shall be purchased immediately the contract is signed. It shall be open
stacked on site for such further seasoning as may be required.

Timber which in the opinion of the architect does not satisfy the specification in character or
condition or is not suitable for the requirements of the work because of the blemishes it
contains shall not be used.

The following timber shall be used:-

a) Podocarpus

b) Mvule

c) Cedar

d) Elgon Olive

e) Elgon Teak

f) Camphor

g) Mahogany

h) Meru Oak

i) Pamba Coffee

j) Nkalati

All timber shall be wrot by machine dressings. Non-exposed faces and machine marks shall
be removed with hand plane and sanded out, unless otherwise specified.

The dimensions and thickness stated in the Bills of Quantities are the finished sizes (unless
otherwise stated) and the contractor will allow for all necessary waste.

The joinery shall be worked strictly in accordance with drawings, and is to be framed up and
put together as soon as possible and stored in the drying room, for as long as possible before
being wedged up. All joints and angles are to be glued and where necessary cross tongued
with hardwood tongues and surfaces finished clean and smooth, with machine marks sand-
papered out before fixing.

Should any of the joinery work shrink, warp, wind or deflect unduly before the end of the
maintenance period of the contract, the work is to be taken down and rectified at the
contractor’s sole expense.

Tolerance in thickness shall conform with the following extracts from the Government of
Uganda Grading Rules:-

Hardwood Grading: (First and Second Grades):-

a) 1.6 mm over size on pieces up to 25 mm in thickness

b) 3 mm oversize on pieces over 25 mm and up to 51 mm in thickness

JOINERY 69

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 c) 6 mm over size on pieces over 51 mm in thickness; undersize will not be permitted.

d) Softwood Grading: Appearance Grades (First and Second Grades); undersize will
not be allowed.

e) Oversize: All timber to be sawn oversize b 1.6 mm per 25 mm of thickness and

width. Not more than 3 mm in thickness and not more than 6 mm in width.

Seasoning of timber shall be to moisture content of not more than 15%.

Pressure impregnation treatment shall be as for “Carpentry”.

Where joinery is described as screwed, this is deemed to include sinking the head of the
screw and pellating with similar timber, and to grain in with the finished joinery.

All hardwood joinery shall be finished for oil paint/varnish, unless otherwise stated.

The rates shall be deemed to allow for all nails and screws and fixing, all labour, cuttings,
notching, halving, morticing, tenoning and wedges except where otherwise provided.

All work described as plugged shall be fixed with screws to plugs formed by drilling concrete
walls, etc., with the proper tool of suitable size at 750 mm spacing and filling the holes
completely with “philplug” rawl plastic or rawl plugs in accordance with the manufacturer’s
instructions. Alternatively and where so agreed by the architect, hardwood dovetailed fixing
slips in preservative and cut and primed or bedded in cement mortar (1:3) may be used.

The rates are to allow for all surfaces of joinery where in contact with walling or plaster, or
where otherwise unexpected being treated before fixing with two coats of approved wood
preservative.

Laminated plastic sheeting shall be “formica” manufactured by M/s Thomas de la Rue and
Co. or equal and approved, 1.6 mm thick and accurately fixed with approved type water-
proof impact adhesive and in the colours selected by the architect.

Blockboard shall comply with the standard as mentioned above.

Plywood shall comply with the standard as mentioned above and faced both sides unless
otherwise stated.

Fibreboard shall be 12.7 “Celotex” or other equal approved softboard.

All joinery work shall be accurately set out and framed together soon after commencement
of the building as is practicable but not to be wedged up or glued until the building is ready
for fixing the same. Any portions that warp, wind or dent shall be removed and new ones
fixed in their place together with other work which may be affected thereby all at the
contractor’s expense.

All work shall be properly morticed, tennoned, housed, shouldered, dovetailed, notched,
primed, bradded, etc. as directed and to the satisfaction of the architect and all glued up with
the best quality glue.

Joints in joinery shall be as specified or detailed, and so designed and secured as to resist or
compensate for any stresses to which they may be subjected. All nail strings, etc. are to be
punched and puttied. Loose joints are to be where provisions for shrinkage is necessary;
glued joints where shrinkage need not be considered and where conditions may be damp
must be of the resin type. For non-load-bearing joints or where dry conditions may be
guaranteed resin or organic glues may be used. All exposed surfaces for joinery shall be wrot

JOINERY 70

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 and all arises “cased off” by planning and sand papered to an approved finish suitable to the
specified treatment.

3 mm reduction of specified sizes will be allowed to each wrot face except in members 25
mm thick or less or where, described as finished sizes in which case joinery shall hold up the
full dimensions.

In fixing all beads, fillets and small members shall be fixed with round or oval brads or nails
well punched in and stopped. All large members shall be fixed with screws. Brass screws
shall be used for fixing of all hardwoods, to the heads in and pellated over with wood pellets
to match the gain.

Rates shall include for bedding frames, cills, etc in mortar or dressing surfaces of walls, etc in
lieu.

Round wood plugs shall not be used, and screws or plugs shall be spaced at 750 mm centres.

All fixed joinery which in the opinion of the architect is liable to become bruised or damaged
in any way shall be completely cased and protected by the contractor at his own expense
until completion of works.

Bottom edges of doors shall be painted or polished with two coats of approved primer
before fixing.

11.5.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

11.5.1 Chipboard

Chipboard shall comply with B.S. 5669.

11.5.2 Blockboard

Blockboard shall be approved imported or local manufacture complying in all

aspects with B.S.1142 of the thickness specified and softwood faced both sides
unless otherwise described. Samples of blockboard veneered with hardwood as
specified, shall be submitted to the Architect for his approval before any orders are
placed.

11.5.3 Fibreboard

Fibreboard shall be “Celotex”, or other equal and approved make, 12mm thick and
complying in all aspects with the requirements of B.S. 1142.

11.5.4 Hardboard

Hardboard shall be tempered and of approved manufacture, in accordance with

B.S.1142, suitable for painting, prepared and fixed in accordance with the makers’
instructions.

11.5.5 Medium Density Fibreboard (MDF)

MDF shall be used wherever possible in place of blockboard or chipboard. The

MDF used shall be to the thickness specified, shall be flat, smooth, straight,
without any imperfections, surface distortion, broken or chipped edges. MDF used
in damp locations (i.e. toilets) shall be moisture resistant MDF.

11.5.6 Laminated Plastic Sheeting

JOINERY 71

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Laminated plastic sheeting shall be 1.5mm “Formica” or other approved sheeting
complying with B.S.3794 Class 1, in colours to be selected by the Architect.

Prior to fixing laminated sheeting, the Contractor shall obtain the Architect’s
written approval to a sample.

11.5.7 Pressure Impregnated Treatment

All timber so described is to be vacuum pressure impregnated with “Celcure A”

preservative to a dry salt nett retention of 10.5 kg “Celcure A” per cubic metre of
timber and stacked until the moisture content returns to 18% or 15% as above
described. Timber to be treated shall be machined to finished sections and cut to
component lengths before impregnation. Cut ends, notchings, borings and faces of
timber sawn after treatment are to be swabbed literally on cross cut ends with
“Walmanol” end grain preservative, allowed to dry, and then applied in a similar
manner a second time.

JOINERY 72

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

12.0 IRON MONGERY

IRON MONGERY 73

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

12.0 IRON MONGERY

12.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

12.1.1 British Standards

a) B.S. 1227 part 1 A Hinges

b) B.S. 2028 Performance test for locks

c) B.S. 2911 Letter plates

d) B.S. 4112 Performance requirements for hardware for domestic

furniture

e) NOTE: The contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “M” of

the Standard Method of Measurement

12.2.0 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All locks and ironmongery shall be fixed with screws, etc to match. Before woodwork is
painted, handles shall be removed, carefully stored and re-fixed after completion of painting
and locks oiled and left in perfect working order.

All keys shall be labelled with the door reference on labels before handing to the architect on
completion. All ironmongery shall be carefully protected until completion of the work and
any damage is to be made good at the contractor’s expense.

Rates shall allow for easing and adjusting all doors, etc and for lubricating all locks, hinges,
etc. and left in perfect working order.

Where descriptions fixing ironmongery include catalogue numbers, such items shall be
obtained from the specified manufacturers if at all possible.

Rates shall include for labelling all keys with door references as directed by the architect.

All keys shall be provided with two keys and no keys are to pass the ward of any but its own.

IRON MONGERY 74

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

13.0 METAL WORK

METAL WORK 75

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

13.0 METALWORK

13.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice shall be
observed:-

13.1.1 British Standards

a) B.S. 4 part 1 Structural steel, hot rolled screws

b) B.S. 4 part 2 Structural steel, hot rolled hollow sections.

c) B.S. 325 Black cup and countersunk bolts and nuts.

d) B.S. 916 Black bolts, screws and nuts.

e) B.S. 4174 Self tapping screws and metallic drive screws.

f) B.S. 405 Metal washers for general engineering purposes.

g) 1161 and addendum Aluminium and aluminium alloy sections for general
engineering purposes.

h) B.S. 938 Metal ore welding of structural steel tubes.

i) B.S. 1856 Metal ore welding of mild steel.

j) B.S. 729 part 1 Hot dip galvanized coating iron and steel articles.

k) B.S. 1474 Wrot aluminium and aluminium alloy

l) B.S. 990 parts 1+2 Steel windows (domestic and similar buildings)

13.1.2 Codes of Practice

a) C.P. 499 Metal railings and balustrades.

b) C.P. 117 Composite construction in structural steel and

concrete.

c) C.P. 2008 Protection of iron and steel structures from corrosion.

d) C.P. 3012 Cleaning and preparation of metal surfaces.

e) NOTE: The contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “P” of

the Standard Method of Measurement.

13.2.0 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

Iron and steel where galvanised shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 729, part 1 entirely
coated with fine fabrication by complete immersion in a zinc bath in one operation and all
excess carefully removed.

The finished surfaces shall be clean and uniform.

All work in aluminium shall comply with the requirements of the standard mentioned above.

METAL WORK 76

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All smiting and bending shall be soundly and neatly executed, care being taken not to
overheat.

All strap bolts and similar work shall be forged neat and clean from the anvil.

All welded connections shall be ground to a smooth finish and rates shall be deemed to allow
for this.

Steel windows shall comply with the requirements of the standard mentioned above and
shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

All mild steel except galvanised shall be cleaned of rust and scale, painted one coat red lead
priming paint before delivering to site and the rates shall include for this.

METAL WORK 77

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

14.0 PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS

PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 78

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

14.0 PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS

14.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice shall be observed:-

14.1.1 British Standards

a) B.S. 416 Cast Iron spigot and socket soil, waste and
ventilating pipes (sand cast and spun) and
fittings.

b) B.S. 2871 part Copper and Copper Alloy Tubes (for water,
gas and sanitation)

c) B.S. 864 part Capillary and compression fittings of copper

and copper alloy.

d) B.S. 1184 Copper and Copper Alloy Traps

e) B.S. 4576 Unplasticised P.V.C. rainwater goods.

f) B.S. 3974 Pipe supports.

g) B.S. 1494 Fixing accessories for building purposes

(gutter bolts, pipe brackets)

h) B.S. 1212 part 1+2 Ball valves (excluding floats)

i) B.S. 2456 Floats for ball valves (plastic) for cold water.

k) B.S. 1125 W.C. flushing cisterns.

l) B.S. 417 part 1+2 Galvanised mild steel cisterns, covers, tanks
and cylinders.

m) B.S. 2760 Pitch-impregnated fibre pipes and fittings.

n) B.S. 1387 Steel cubes and tubulars.

o) B.S. 4514 Unplasticised P.V.C. solid and ventilating pipe,

fittings and accessories.

p) B.S. 3505 Unplasticised P.V.C. pipes for cold water

services

q) B.S. 143 and 1256 Malleable cast iron and cast copper
alloy,screwed pipe fittings.

r) B.S. 78 part 2 and B.S. 1180 Cast iron spigot and socket pipes (vertically
cast) and spigot and socket fittings.

s) B.S. 1010 part 1+2 Draw-off taps and stop valves for water
services.

Codes of Practice
PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 79

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 a) C.P. 304 Sanitary pipework above ground.

b) C.P. 310 Water supply

c) C.P. 305 Sanitary appliances.

d) NOTE: 01. The contractor’s attention is

drawn to Section”Q” of the
Standard Method of
Measurements.

02. The whole of the work shall be executed

by an approved licensed sub-contractor.

14.2.0 PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS

Black steel and pipework up to 65 mm nominal bore shall be manufactured in accordance

with B.S. 21. All fittings shall be of malleable iron and manufactured in accordance with B.S.
143.

Pipe joints shall be screwed and socketed and sufficient coupling and unions shall be allowed
so that fittings can be disconnected without cutting the pipe. Running niples and long screws
shall not be permitted unless exceptionally approved by the architect.

All black steel pipework - 80 mm nominal bore up to 150 mm nominal bore, shall be
manufactured to comply in all respects with the specifications for 65 mm pipe, except that
screwed and bolted flanges shall replace union and couplings for the pointing of pipes to
valves and other items of plant.

All flanges shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 10, to relevant classifications contained
hereinafter.

14.2.1 Galvanised Steel Pipe

Galvanised steel pipe shall be manufactured to comply in all respects with the
standards described for black steel pipework above.

Galvanised shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1387
and 143 respectively.

14.2.2 Copper Tubing

All copper tubing shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 659 from C. 106
‘Phosphorus
De-oxidised Non-Arsenical Copper’ in accordance with B.S. 1172.

Pipe joints shall be made with soldered capillary fittings and connections to
equipment shall be with compression fittings manufactured in accordance with B.S.
864.

Short copper connecting tubes between galvanised pipework and sanitary fitments
shall not be used because of the risk of galvanic action.

If, as may occur in certain circumstances, it is not possible to make the connections
in any other way than by the use of copper tubing, then a brass straight connector
shall be positioned between the galvanised pipe and the copper tube in order to
prevent direct contact.
PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 80

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 14.2.3 Plastic Pipes

P.V.C. pipework and fittings for the use above ground in connection with internal
building services shall be in the Terrain soil, waste and ventilation system to B.S.
4514 in modified PVC. The sub-contractor is referred to Product Catalogues in
respect of Terrain Plastics Systems for the Building Industry before and after
submission of tenders as no claims for want of knowledge will be entertained.

14.2.4 Cast Iron Pipework

Cast iron pipework and fittings for use above ground in connection with internal
building services, shall be manufactured with spigot and socket joints of the weight
required by the Local Authority and shall comply fully with the requirements of B.S.
416.

All joints on cast iron spigot and socket pipes shall be made with an approved cold
caulking compound and so installed as to allow for any expansion or contraction
which may take place.

All cast iron pipework, branches, tees, bends and other fittings shall be supplied
complete with inspection covers for cleaning purposes. These inspection covers for
cleaning purposes shall be included as part of the fittings and shall comply with the
requirement of B.S. 416.

14.2.5 Pitch Fibre Pipework

Pitch fibre pipework and fittings for use in connection with external drainage
services shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 2760.
Pipes shall be connected by means of purpose made tapered joints manufactured in
accordance with B.S. 2760.

Until such time as the use of pitch impregnated fibre pipes is covered by Code of
Practice, the jointing, laying and cutting of these pipes shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of the notes under Appendix C of B.S. 2760.

14.2.6 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes

Where asbestos cement pressure pipes and fittings are used in connection with
external, above ground or buried water services, they shall be manufactured in
accordance with the requirements of B.S. 486.

The classification of these pipes falls into four classes A, B, C, and D respectively,
and the class to be used shall depend upon the pressure conditions pertaining at site.

Where cast iron detachable joints are used for connecting pipes, the material shall
comply with B.S. 1452 and be suitably protected with a non-toxic compound against
corrosion.

When jointing components are made in any other material for which there is no B.S.
Specification, then the materials used shall be of a quality not less than required by
this standard.

Rubber jointing rings shall be used for sealing purposes and shall comply with the
requirements of B.S.2494 except where they are likely to be contaminated by oil
products, in which case the gaskets shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S.
3514.

PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 81

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 14.3.0 VALVES

14.3.1 Draw-off and Stop Valves (up to 50 mm Nominal Bore)

Draw off taps and stop valves up to 50 mm nominal bore, unless otherwise stated or
specified, for attachment or connection to sanitary fitments shall be manufactured in
accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1010.

14.3.2 Gate Valves

All gate valves 80 mm nominal bore and above, other than those required for fitting
to buried water mains shall be of cast iron construction in accordance with the
requirements of B.S. 3464.

All gate valves required for fitting to buried water mains shall be of cast iron
construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1218.

All gate valves up to and including 65 mm nominal bore shall be of bronze

construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1952.

The pressure classification of all gate valves shall depend upon the pressure
conditions pertaining to the Site of Works.

14.3.3 Globe Valves

All globe valves up to and including 65 mm nominal bore shall be of bronze

construction in accordance with B.S. 2060.

All globe valves 80 mm nominal bore and above shall be of cast iron construction
in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 3961.

The pressure classification of all globe valves shall depend upon the pressure
conditions pertaining to the Site of Works.

14.3.4 Check or Non-return Valves

All check or non-return valves up to and including 65 mm nominal bore shall be of

the swing check of bronze construction in accordance with B.S. 1953.

All check or non-return valves 80 mm nominal bore and above shall be of the swing
check type of cast iron construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S.
4090.

The pressure classification of all check or non-return valves shall depend upon the
pressure conditions pertaining to the Site of Works.

14.3.5 Ball Valves

All ball valves for use in connection with hot and cold water services shall be of the
Portsmouth type in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1212, constructed
from bronze or other corrosion resistant materials. These valves fall into three
pressure classification as follows:-

a) Low Pressure 3,538 b maximum

b) Medium Pressure 7,725 b maximum
PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 82

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 c) High pressure 12,620 b maximum

The pressure classification required for each ball valve will be designated in the
description of its associated equipment contained in Part C of the Specification.

14.3.6 Manually Operated Mixing Valves

Mixing valves for shower fittings and other appliances being provided under the
sub-contract works shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of
B.S. 1415 from bronze or other corrosion resistant materials.

14.4.0 PIPE SUPPORTS

14.4.1 General

This sub-clause deals with pipe supports securing pipes to the structure of buildings
for above ground application.

The variety and type of supports shall be kept to a minimum and their design shall be
such as to facilitate quick and secure fixings to metal, concrete, masonry or wood.

Consideration shall be given, when designing supports to the maintenance of desired

pipe falls and the restraining of pipe movements to a longitudinal axial direction only.

The sub-contractor shall supply and install all steelwork forking part of the pipe
support assemblies and shall be responsible for making good any damage to building
work associated with the pipe support installation.

The sub-contractor shall submit all his proposals for pipe supports to the Engineer
for approval before any erection work commences.

14.4.2 Steel and Copper Pipes and Tubes

Pipe runs shall be secure by pipe clips connected to pipe hangars, wall brackets, or
trapeze type supports. ‘U’ bolts shall not be used as a substitute for pipe clips
without the prior approval of the engineer.

An approximate guide to the maximum permissible support spacings in metres for

steel and copper pipes and tubes is given in the following table for horizontal runs:-

Size Copper Tube Steel Tube

Nominal Bores

15 mm 1.25 m 2.0 m
20 mm 2.0 m 2.5 m
25 mm 2.0 m 2.5 m
32 mm 2.5 m 3.0 m
40 mm 2.5 m 3.0 m
50 mm 2.5 m 3.0 m
65 mm 3.0 m 3.5 m
80 mm 3.0 m 3.5 m
100 mm 3.0 m 4.0 m
125 mm 3.5 m 4.5 m
150 mm 3.5 m 5.5 m

The support spacings for vertical runs shall not exceed one and a half times the
distance given for horizontal runs.

PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 83

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 14.4.3 Cast Iron and Asbestos Cement Spigot and Socket Jointed Pipes

Cast iron and asbestos cement socketed pipes shall generally be supported at every
socket joint by means of either holderbats secured rigidly to the structure or purpose
made straps for attachment to rigid steel support brackets.

When holderbats are used, they shall conform to the requirements of B.S. 416.

Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipes direction junctions and
tees, to counteract the effect of end thrust loads.

14.4.4 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes

Asbestos cement pressure pipes with either cast iron detachable joints or asbestos
cement screw joints shall be supported and anchored on either of the joint. The
joint shall remain free.

Pipe hangars and trappers type supporters shall not be suitable for the suspension of
asbestos pressure pipes unless they are designed with suitable restrictions to prevent
swinging while at the same time providing the necessary support requirements.

Within buildings, asbestos pressure pipes shall be carried out either on concrete
supports or on rigidly fixed steel wall brackets.

Suitable anchors shall be provided at all changes of pipe direction, junctions, and
tees to counteract the effect of end thrust loads.

14.4.5 Concrete and Pitch Fibre Pipes

These pipes shall NOT be used for above ground application.

14.4.6 Expansion Joints and Anchors

Where practicable, cold pipework systems shall be arranged with sufficient bends
and changes for direction to absorb pipe expansion providing that the pipe stresses
are contained within the working limits prescribed in the relevant B.S. specifications.

The sub-contractor shall pay particular care when supporting cast iron and asbestos
cement pipes in order to ensure that settlement and building movements shall not
break the pipe joints.

Where piping anchors are supplies, they shall be fixed to the main structure only.
Details of all anchors design proposals shall be submitted to the architect for
approval before erection commences.

The sub-contractor when arranging his piping shall ensure that no expansion
movements are transmitted directly to connections and flanges on pumps or other
items of plant.

The sub-contractor shall supply flexible joints to prevent vibrations and other
movements being transmitted from pumps to the piping systems or vice-versa.

14.5.0 SANITARY APPLIANCES

All sanitary appliances supplied and installed as part of the sub-contract works shall comply
with the general requirements of B.S. Code of Practice 305 and the particular requirements of
the latest applicable B.S. Specifications.

PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 84

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 14.6.0 GENERAL

‘Fulbora’ rainwater outlets shall be 100 mm and 150 mm diameter as manufactured by

Fulbora Limited (UK) or other equal and approved.

The words “pipe” or “tube” shall be synonymous wherever used herein or in any of the
contract documents. Pipe sizes stated herein are nominal bore.

Rates shall allow for holderbats at centres not exceeding 1000 mm, cutting and priming to
concrete block or in-situ concrete walls and making good.

Rates for all tubing shall include for all joints in the running length.

Rates for galvanised mild steel tubing not exceeding 20 mm diameter shall include for all
sockets, connectors, back-nuts, plugs, caps, elbows, bonds and made bends, made springs and
made effects.

Rates for fittings on pipes shall include for all cutting and fitting of pipes to same.

The sizes stated of reducing fittings are those of tubes which will be attached to fittings and
rates shall include for any additional socket reducers necessary to obtain the stated reduction
should it be impossible to accomplish this with only one fitting.

Pipes shall be fixed at least 25 mm clear between socket and wall face. Cast iron holderbats
shall be fixed at centres not more than 2 metres. Eared pipes must not be used.

All the plumbing and engineering installation shall be tested as instructed and any work not
found satisfactory shall be made good at the contractor’s expense.

Where tubing is laid in trenches, care shall be taken to ensure that fittings are not strained.

All tubing described as chased into walls shall have the wall face neatly out and chased, the
tubing wedged and fixed and plastered over.

All formed bends shall be made so as to retain the full diameter of the pipe.

Cast iron pipes shall be jointed with asbestos yarn and called with another lead or jointed with
special jointing compound all to be approved.

All brasswork and fittings shall conform with the requirements of the standard mentioned
above. Such fittings shall be either high or low pressure in accordance with the
recommendations of the local authority. At commencement of the contract the contractor
shall ask the architect for guidance on this point.

All sanitary fittings shall be properly cleaned, polished and left to the satisfaction of the
architect on completion.

14.7.0 TESTING AND INSPECTION

14.7.1 Site Tests - Pipework Systems

After laying, jointing and anchoring the main shall be slowly and carefully charged
with water, so that all air is expelled and allowed to stand full for three days before
testing under pressure.

The test pressure shall be maintained by the pump for about one hour and if there is
any leakage, it shall be measured by the quantity of water pumped into the main in
that time. A general leakage of one gallon per 25 mm of diameter per 1.6 kilometer
PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 85

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 per 24 hours per head may be considered reasonable but any visible individual leak
shall be repaired.

All water services pipe systems installed above ground shall be tested hydraulically
for a period of one hour to not less than one and a half times the design working
pressure.

If preferred, the sub-contractor may test the pipe lines in sections. Any such section
found to be satisfactory need not be the subject of a further test when the system
has been completed, unless specifically requested by the architect.

During the test, each branch and joint shall be examined carefully for leaks, and any
defects revealed shall be made good by the subcontractor and the section re-tested.

The sub-contractor shall take all necessary precautions to prevent damage occurring
to special valves and fittings during the tests. Any item damaged shall be repaired or
replaced at the sub-contractor’s expense.

14.8.0 SITE TEST - PERFORMANCE

Following satisfactory pressure tests on the pipework systems, operational tests shall be
carried out in accordance with the relevant B.S. Codes of Practice on the systems as a whole
to establish that special valves, gauges, controls, fittings equipment and plant are functioning
correctly to the satisfaction of the architect.

14.9.0 STERILIZATION OF WATER SYSTEMS

All underground water mains and above ground water distribution systems, cisterns, tanks,
etc. shall be thoroughly sterilized and flushed out after completion of all tests and before
being fully commissioned for handover.

The sterilization procedure shall be carried out by the contractor/sub-contractor or specialists

employed by the contractor/sub-contractor in accordance with the requirements of B.S. Code
of Practice 310, Clause 409, to the approval of the architect .

PLUMBING AND ENGINEERING INSTALLATIONS 86

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

15.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 87

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 15.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

15.1.0 GENERAL

This specification is to be read in conjunction with the drawings which are issued with
it. Bills of Quantities shall be the basis of all additions and omissions during the
progress of the works.

All electrical work shall be carried out under close supervision of a licensed operative of
an approved firm of registered Electrical Contractors.

All electrical work shall be executed in strict accordance with the latest editions of the
British Standard and other Government Regulations.

The Main Contractor shall at all times co-ordinate his own work and that of all Sub
Contractors with the of the Electrical Sub-Contractor.

Special care shall be executed to ensure that all necessary cable trenches are completed
before other subsequent floors, paths etc. including the provision of cable ducts,
chase, sinking and the like.

No patching up of floors, pavings, plastework etc will be permitted and where, work
has to be rebuilt or re-executed due to lack of planning of Sub-Contractor’s work, the
Contractor will be held responsible for all costs and expenses arising there from.

NOTE: The Contractor’s attention is drawn to section “R” of the Standard Method of
Measurement.

15.2.0 STANDARD OF MATERIALS

Where the material and equipment are specifically described and named in the
Specification followed by approved equal they are so named or described for the
purpose of establishing a standard to which the Sub-Contractor shall adhere.

Should the Sub-Contractor install any material not specified here in before receiving
approval from the proper authorities, the Engineer shall direct the Sub-Contractor to
remove the material in question immediately. The fact that this material has been
installed shall have bearing or influence on the decision by the Engineer.

All materials condemned by the Engineer as not approved for use, are to be removed
from the premises and suitable materials delivered and installed in their place at the
expense of the Sub-Contractor. All materials required for the works shall be new and
the best of the respective kind and shall be of a uniform pattern.

15.3.0 WORKMANSHIP

The workmanship and method of installation shall conform to the best standard
practice. All work shall be performed by a skilled tradesman and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer. Helpers shall have qualified supervision.

Any work that does not in the opinion of the Engineer conform to the best
standardpractice will be removed and reinstated at the Sub-Contractor’s expense.

Permits, Certificates or Licences must be held by all tradesmen for the type of work, in
which they are involved where such permits, certificates or licences exist under
Government Legislation.

15.4.0 PROCUREMENT OF MATERIALS

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 88

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The Sub-Contractor is advised that no assistance can be given in the procurement or
allotment of any materials or products to be used in and necessary for the construction
and completion of the work. Sub-Contractors are warned that they must make their
own arrangements for the supply of materials and /or products specified or required.

The Sub-Contractor may be called upon to show evidence that satisfactory

arrangements have been made for the procurement of any or all materials and products
required to complete the works. Copies of purchase order to suppliers may be
requested.

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all site and/or drawing measurements
required for completion of quantities or materials required for the proper execution of
the works.

No claim for extra payment will be considered on the ground of insufficient knowledge,
inaccurate measurements or other errors on the part of the Sub-Contractor.

15.5.0 WORKING DRAWINGS

Before manufacture is begun the Sub-Contractor shall submit six copies of detailed
drawings of all pieces of equipment including their components showing all pertinent
information including sizes, capacities, construction details, etc., and as may be
required to determine the suitability of the equipment for the approval of the Engineer.
Approval of the detail drawings shall not relieve the Sub-Contractor of the full
responsibility of errors or the necessity of checking the drawings himself or of
furnishing the materials and equipment and performing the work required by the plans
and specifications.

15.6.0 RECORD DRAWINGS

The Engineer will supply the Sub-Contractor with an extra set of white prints on which
he shall clearly mark as the job progresses, all changes and deviations from the
proposed installation so that the Architect at the completion the job, will have a record
of the exact location of all piping and equipment.

The Sub-Contractor shall also furnish, within a reasonable time after the completion of
the works and prior to the final payment being sanctioned, drawings and diagrams of
the works completed and relating to the whole installation and plant.

These diagrams and drawings shall show the complete installation including sizes, runs
and arrangements of the installation. The drawings shall be to a scale not less than 1.50
and shall include plan views and sections.

The drawings shall all details which may be useful in the operation, maintenance or
subsequent modifications or extensions to the installation.

Three sets of diagrams and drawings shall be provided, all to the approval of the
Engineer.

One coloured set of line diagrams relating to operating and maintenance instructions
shall be framed and mounted in a suitable location.

15.7.0 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS

All work executed by the Sub-Contractor shall comply with the current edition of the
“Regulations” for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings, issued by the Institution of
Electrical Engineers and with the Regulations of the Local Electricity Authority.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 89

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Where the two sets of regulations appear to conflict, they shall be clarified with the
Engineer. All materials used shall comply with relevant British Standard Specification.

15.8.0 SETTING OUT WORK

The Sub-Contractor at his own expenses, is to set out works and take all measurements
and dimensions required for the erection of his materials on site, making any
modifications or alterations in detail to the Engineer before proceeding and must allow
in his Tender for all such modifications and for the provision of any sketches or
drawings related thereto.

15.9.0 POSITIONS OF ELECTRICAL PLANT AND APPARATUS

The routes of cables and approximate positions of switchboards, etc., as shown on the
drawings shall be assumed to be correct for purposes of Tendering, but the exact
positions of all electrical Equipment and routes of cables must be agreed on site with
the Engineer before any work is carried out.

15.10.0 M.C.B. DISTRIBUTION PANELS AND CONSUMER UNITS

All cases of M.C.B. panels and consumer units shall be constructed in heavy gauge sheet
with hinged covers.

Removable undrilled gland plants shall be provided on the top and bottom of the cases.
Miniature circuit breakers shall be enclosed in moulded plastic with tripping mechanism
and chambers separated and sealed from the cable terminals.

The operating dolly shall be tripfree with a positive movement in both make and break
position. Clear indication of the position of the handle shall be incorporated.

Removable undrilled gland plates shall be provided on the top and bottom of the cases.
miniature circuit breakers shall be enclosed in moulded plastic with the tripping
mechanism and arc chambers separated and sealed from the cable terminals.

The tripping mechanism shall be on inverse characteristic to prevent in temporary

overloads and shall not be affected by normal variation in ambient temperature

The breakers shall be ground in distribution panels as specified in part 111 of this
specification, all live metal being shrouded or concealed during normal used.

A locking plate shall be provided for each size of breaker. A complete list of circuit
details on typed cartridge paper glued to stiff cardboards and covered with sheet of
perpex, and held in position with four suitable fixings, shall be fitted to the inner face
of the lids of each distribution panel. The appropriate M.C.B. ratings be state on the
circuit chart against each circuit in use. Ivorine labels shall be secured to the
insulation barriers in such a manner as to indicate the number of the circuit shown on
the circuit chart.

Insulated barriers shall be fitted between phases, and neutrals in all boards, and
shroud live parts.

Neutral cables shall be connected to the neutral bar in the same sequence as the
phase cables are connected to the M.C.B’s. This shall also apply to earth bars
when installed.

15.11.0 FUSED SWITCHGEAR AND ISOLATTORS

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 90

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All fused switchgear and isolators whether mounted on machinery, walls or
industrials panels shall conform to the requirement of B.S 861.1955 and where
applicable to B.S 2510.

All contacts are to be fully shrouded and are to have a breaking capacity on
manual operations as required by B.S 861,1955.

Fuse links for fused switches are to be of high rupturing capacity cartridge type,
conforming to B.S. 88.1952 category of duty 44ov A.C.

Isolators shall be load braking/fault making isolators.

Fused switches and Isolators are to have separate metal enclosures. Mechanical
interlocks are to be provided between the door and main switch operating
mechanism so arranged that the door may not be opened with the switch in the
“ON” position.

Similarly it shall not be possible to close the switch with the door open except
that provision shall be made within the switch for authorized persons to defeat
the mechanical interlock and close the switch with the door in the open position
for test purposes. The “ON” and “OFF” positions of all switches and isolators
shall be clearly indicated by a mechanical lag indicator or similar device. In T.P.
& N. fused switch units, bolted neutral links are to be fitted.

15.12.0 CONDUITS AND CONDUIT RUNS

Conduit systems are to be installed so as to allow the loop in system of wiring.

All conduit shall be blak rigid super high impact heavy gauged class “A” PVC in
accordance with B.S. 2782 and I.E.E. Regulations B101 - 105 tests and as
manufactured by Egatube Re: HIP or other approved equal to B.S. 4607; part
1970. No conduit less than 20mm. in diameter shall be used anywhere in this
installation.

Conduit shall be installed in plaster work and floor screed.

except when run on wooden or metal surface when they will be installed surface
supported with saddles every 600mm. Conduit run in chases shall be firmly held
in position by means of substantial pipe hooks driven into wooden plugs.

The Sub-Contractor’s attention is drawn to the necessity of keeping all conduits

entirely separate from other piping services such as water and no circuit
connections will be permitted between conduits and such pipes.

All conduits systems shall be arranged possible to be self-draining to switch

boxes and conduit outlet points for fittings. The systems, when installed and
before wiring shall be kept plugged with well fitting plugs and when short
conduit pieces are used as plugs, they shall be doubled over and tied firmly
together with steel wire. Before wiring all conduit systems shall be carried out
until the particular section of the conduit installation is complete in every respect.

The sets and beds in conduits runs are to be formed on site using appropriate
size bending springs and all radii of bends must not be less than 2.5 times the
outside diameter of the conduit. No solid or inspection bends, tees or elbows
will be used.

Conduit connections shall either be by a demountable (screwed up) assembly or

adhesive fixed and watertight by solution as Egaweld. The tube and fittings must
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 91

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 be clean and free of all grease before applying the adhesive. When connections
are made between conduit and switch boxes, circular or non-screwed boxes, care
shall be taken that no rough edges of conduit stick out into the boxes.

Runs between drawn-in boxes are not to have more than two right angle bends
or their equivalent. The Sub-Contractor may be required to demonstrate to the
Engineers that wiring in any particular run is easily with drawable and the Sub-
Contractor may, at no extra cost to the contract, be required to install additional
draw-in boxes required. If conduit is installed in straight runs in excess of
6000mm, expansion couplings as manufactured by Egatube Ref: EEC shall be
used at intervals of 6000mm.

Where conduit runs are to be concealed in pillars and beams, the approval of the
Structural Engineer shall be, obtained. The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible
for marking the accurate position of all holes, chases etc., on site, or if the
Engineer so direct, shall provide the main Contractor with dimensional drawings
to enable him to mark out and form all holes and chases. Should the Sub-
Contractor fail to inform the main Contractor of any inaccuracies in this respect
they shall be rectified at the Sub-Contractor’s expense.

Site, details of reinforced concrete or structural steel work and check from the
builder’s drawings the positions of walls, structural concrete and finishes. No
reinforced concrete or steelwork may be drilled without first obtaining the
written permission of the structural Engineer.

The drawings provided with these specifications indicate the appropriate

positions only of points and switches, and it shall be the Sub-Contractor’s
responsibility to mark out and centre on the site the accurate positions where
necessary in consultation with the Architect and the Engineer. The Sub-
Contractor alone shall be responsible for the accuracy of the final positions.

15.13.0 CONDUIT BOXES AND ACCESSORIES

All conduit outlets and junction boxes are to be either malleable iron and of
standard circular pattern to B.S. 31 of the appropriate type of suit saddles being
used or super high impact PVC manufactured to B.S. 4607: 1, 1970.

Small circular pattern boxes are to be used with conduits up to and including
25mm. outside diameter. Rectangular pattern adaptable boxes are to be used for
conduits of 32mm outside diameter and larger. For drawing in of cables in
exposed runs of conduit, standard pattern through boxes are to be used.

Boxes are to be not less than 50mm. deep and of such dimensions a will enable
the largest appropriate number of cables for the conduit sizes to be drawn in
without excessive bending.

Outlet boxes for lighting fittings are to be of the loop-in type where conduit
installation is concealed and the Sub-Contractor shall allow one such box per
fitting, except where fluorescent fittings are specified when two such boxes per
fitting shall be fitted flush with the ceiling and if necessary fitted with break joint
rings. Pattresses shall be fitted where required to outlets on surface conduit runs.

Adaptable boxes are to be of P.V.C. or mild steel (of not less than 12 s.w.g.) and
black enamelled or galvanised finish according to location. They shall be of
square or oblong shape complete with lids secured by four 2 BA brass roundhead
screws. No adaptable box shall be less than 75mm x 75mm x 50mm or larger
than 300mm x 300mm x 75mm and shall be adequate in depth in relation to the
size of conduit bushes.
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 92

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 15.14.0 LABELS

Labels fitted to switches and fuseboards:-

i). Shall be Ivorine engraved black on white

ii). Shall be secured by R.H. brass screws of same manufacture throughout.

iii). Shall indicate on switches:-

a). Reference number of switch

b). Specified current rating

c). item of equipment controlled

iv). Shall indicate on M.C.B. panels

a). Reference number

b). Type of board, i.e. lighting, sockets, etc.

c). Size of cable supplying panel

d). Where to isolate feeder cable

v). Shall be generally not less than 75mm x 50mm.

15.5.0 EARTHING

The earthing of the installation shall comply with the following requirements:-

It shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate sections of the current
edition of the Regulations, for the Electrical Equipment of Buildings issued by
the Institution of Electrical Engineers.

At all main distribution panels and main service positions a 25mm x 3mm
minimum cross sectional area Copper tape shall be provided and all equipment
including the lead sheath and armouring of cables, distribution boards and metal
frames shall be bonded thereto.

The earth tape in Sub-Clause (ii) shall be connected by means of a copper tape or
cable of suitable cross sectional area to an earth electrode which shall be a earth
(see later sub-clause).

All taoes to be sort high conductivity copper, intinned except where otherwise
specified and where run underground on or through walls, floors, etc., it shall be
served with corrosion resisting tape or coated with corrosion compound and
braided.

Where the earth electrode is located outside the building a removable test link
shall be provided inside the building as near as possible to the point of entry to
the tape, for isolating the earth electrode for testing purpose.

Earthing of sub-main equipment shall be deemed to be satisfactory where the

sub-main cables are M.I.C.S. or conduit with separate earth wire, and the

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 93

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 installation is carried out in accordance with the figure stated in the current
edition of the I.E.E. Regulations.

Where an earth rod is specified (see Sub-Clause (iii) it shall be proprietary

manufacture, solid hand drawn copper of 15mm diameter driven into the ground
to a minimum depth of 3.6m. It shall be made up to 1.2m sections with internal
screw and socket joints and fitted with hardened steel tip and driving cap.

Earth plates will not be permitted

Where an earth rod is used the earth resistance shall be tested in the manner
described in the current edition of the I.E.E. Regulations, by the Sub-Contractor
in the presence of the Engineer and the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for
the supply of all test equipment.

Where copper tape is fixed to the building structure it shall be by means of

purpose made non-ferrous saddles which space the conductor away from the
structure a minimum distance of 20mm. Fixings, shall be made using purpose
made plugs. No fixings requiring holes to be drilled through the tape will be
accepted.

Joints in copper tape shall be tinned before assembly rivetted with a minimum of
two copper rivets and sweated solid.

Where holes are drilled in the earth tape for connection to items of equipment
the effective cross sectional area regulations.

Bolts, nuts, and washers for any fixing to the earth tape must be non-ferrous
material.

Attention is drawn to the need for the earthing metal parts of lighting fittings and
for bonding ball joint suspension in lighting fittings.

15.16.0 CABLES AND FLEXIBLE CORDS

All cables used in this Sub-Contact shall be manufactured in accordance with the
current appropriate British Standard Specification which are as follows:-

a). Rubber Insulated Cables and Flexible Cords - B.S.S. 6500

b). P.V.C. Insulated Cables and Flexible Cords - B.S.S. 6004

c). P.V.C. Insulated Armoured Cables - B.S.S. 6346

d). Butyl Rubber Insulated Cables - B.S.S. 610V

The successful Sub-Contractor will, at the Engineer discretion be required to

submit samples of cables for the Engineer’s approval; the Engineer reserves the
right to call for the cables of an alternative manufacture without any extra cost
being incurred.

Insulated cables shall be 500/100 Volt grade. No cables smaller than 1.5mm sq.
shall be used unless shall be as detailed in later clauses. The colour of cables shall
conform with the details stated in the “Cable Braid and insulation Colours”
Clause.

15.7.0 ARMOURED P.V.C INSULATED AND SHEATHED CABLES

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 94

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Shall be 600/1000 volt grade manufactured to B.S. 6346:1969 with copper
stranded conductors.

The wire armour of the cables shall be used wholly as an earth continuity
conductor and the resistance not more than twice of the largest current carrying
conductor of the cable.

P.V.C./S.W.A./P.V.C. cables shall be terminated using “Telecom” “B” type or

approved equal glands and P.V.C. tapered sleeve shall be provided to shroud
each glad.

Where cables rise from floor level to switchgear etc., they shall be protected by
P.V.C. conduit, to a height of 600mm from finished floor level, whether the cable
is run on the surface or recessed into the wall.

15.18.0 ROAD CROSSING DUCTS

Underground P.V.C. or pitch fibre ducts crossing the roads, shall be buried
500mm below ground level, and surrounded with 150mm layer of 1:3:6 concrete
mix.

15.19.0 CABLES SUPPORTS, MARKERS AND TILES

All P.V.C./S.W.A./P.V.C. cables run inside the building shall be fixed in rising
ducts or on ceilings by means of die cast cables hooks or clamps, of appropriate
size to suit cables, fixed by studs and back nuts their channel sections.

Alternatively, fixing shall be by B.I.C.C. claw type cleating system with die-cast
cleats and galvanized mild steel back straps or similar approved equal method.
For one or two cables run together the cleats shall be fixed a special channel
section supports or backstraps described above which shall in turn be secured to
walls or ceilings of ducts by rawbolts.

In excessively damp or corrosive atmospheric conditions special finishes may be

required and the Sub-Contractor shall apply to the Engineer for further
instructions before ordering cleats and channels for such areas.

The above type of hooks and clamps and channels of cleats and backstraps shall
also be used for securing cables in vertical ducts.

Cables supports shall be fixed at 600mm maximum intervals, the supports being
supplied and erected under this Sub-Contract. Saddles shall not be used for
supporting cables nor any other type of fixing other than one of the two methods
described above or other system which has been received prior to approval of the
Engineer.

Cables are to be kept clear of all pipe work and the Sub-Contractors shall work in
close liaison with other services Sub-Contractors.

The Sub-Contractor shall include for the provision of fixing of approved type
coloured slip on cables end makers to indicate permanently the correct phase and
neutral colours on all cable ends.

Provision shall be made for supplying and fixing approved non-corrosive metal
cable makers to be attached to the outside of all P.V.C. / S.W.A. /P.V.C. cables
at 15 intervals indicating cable side and distinction.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 95

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Where P.V.C. / S.W.A. / P.V.C. cables are run outside the building they shall be
laid underground 750mm. deep with protecting concrete interlocking cover tiles
laid over which shall be provided and laid under this Sub-Contractor. All
necessary excavations and reinstatement of ground including sanding or trenches
will be carried out by the Sub-Contractor, unless otherwise stated.

15.20.0 P.V.C. INSULATED CABLES

Shall be of non-braided type as C.M.A. reference 6491 x 600/1000/1000 volt

grade cables, or equal approved.

P.V.C. cables shall conform to the details of the “Cables and Flexible Cords” and
“Cables Braid and Insulation Colours” clauses.

15.21.0 HEAT RESISTING CABLES

Final connections to cookers, water heaters, etc., shall be made using butyl
rubber insulated cable as C.M.A. reference 610V buty1 (single core 600/1000
volt).

This type of cable shall be used in all instances where a temperature

exceeding100o F, but not exceeding 150oF is likely to be experienced be made
using silicone rubber insulated cable or equal approved.

15.21.0 FLEXIBLE CORDS

Shall be in accordance with the “cable and flexible Cords” clause. No Cord shall
be less than 24/0.2mm in size unless otherwise specified.

Circular white twin T.R.S. flex shall be used for plain pendant fittings up to 100
watts. For all types of lighting fittings the flexible cable shall be silicone rubber
insulated.

No polythene insulated flexible cable shall be used in any lighting fitting or other
appliance (see “Heat Resisting Cables” Clause 30).

15.23.0 CABLES ENDS AND PHASE COLOURS

All cable ends connected up in switchgear, M.C.B. panels etc., shall have the
insulation carefully cut back and the ends sealed with Hellerman rubber slip on
cable end makers.

The makers shall be of appropriate phase colorful switch and all other live feeds
to the details of the “Cable Insulation Colours” clause. Bank cable with black
end makers shall only be used for neutral cables.

15.24.0 CABLE INSULATION COLOURS

Unless otherwise stated in later clauses the insulation colours shall be in

accordance with the following table.

Where other systems are installed the cable colours shall be in accordance with
details stated in the appropriate clause.

15.25.0 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

SYSTEM INSULATION CABLE END MAKER

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 96

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 LIGHTING AND POWER

1). Main and Sub-Main

a). Phase Red Red

b). Neutral Black Black

2). Sub-Circuit Single phase

a). Phase Red Red

b). Neutral Black Black

15.26.0 SUB-CIRCUIT WIRING

For all lighting and sockets wiring shall be carried out in the “looping in” system
and there shall be no joints whatsoever. No lighting circuits shall comprise more
than 20 points when protected by 100A MCB. Cables with different cross-section
area of copper shall not be used in combination.

Lighting circuits P.V.C. cable

a). 1.5mm sq. for all lighting circuits indicated on the drawing. Power circuits
P.V.C. Cable

b). 2.5mm2 for one, two or three 5 Amp sockets wired in parallel.

c). 2.5.mm2 for one 15 Amp socket.

d). 2.5mm2 for a maximum of ten switched 13 Amp sockets wired from a 30
Amp fuseway.

The wiring sizes for lighting circuits and sockets are shown on the drawings. In
such cases, the sizes shown on the drawings shall prevail over the sizes specified.

Wiring sizes for other appliances shall be as shown on the drawing or specified in
later clauses of this specification.

15.27.0 SPACE FACTOR

The maximum number of cables that may be accommodated in a given size of

conduit or trunking or duct is not to exceed the number in Tables B.5 and B.6 or
as stated in Regulation B91, B.117 and 118 of the I.E.E Regulations whichever is
appropriate.

15.28.0 INSULATION

The insulation resistance to earth and between poles of the whole wiring system,
fittings and lumps, shall not be less than the requirements of the latest edition of
the I.E.E. Regulations. Complex tests shall be made on all circuits by the Sub-
Contractor before the installations are handed over.

A report of all tests shall be furnished by the Sub-Contractor to the Engineer.

The Engineer will then check test with his own instruments if necessary.

15.29.0 LIGHTING SWITCHES

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 97

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 These shall be mounted flush with the walls, shall be contained in steel or alloy
boxes and shall be of the gangs, ratings and type shown in the drawings. They
shall be as manufactured by M.K. Electrical Ltd., other equal and approved to B.S.
3676.1963.

15.30.0 SOCKETS AND SWITCHED SOCKETS

These shall be flush pattern in steel box and shall be of the gangs and type
specified in the drawings .

They shall be 13 - amp., 3-pin, shuttered, switched and as manufactured by “M.K.

Electrical Co. Ltd. or other approved equal to B.S. 1363.1947.

15.31.0 FUSED SPUR BOXES

These shall be flush, D.P. switched as in steel box of type and make specified in
the drawings complete with pilot light and as manufactured by “M.K.Electrical
Company Ltd.” or other approved equal to B.S. 1953.

15.32.0 COOKER OUTLETS

These shall be flush mounted with 13-A switched socket outlet and the other for
the cooker.

The cooker control units shall be as manufactured by “M.K. Electric Company

Ltd.,” other approved equal to B.S. 4177: 1967.

15.33.0 CONNECTORS

Shall be as specified in the drawings and of appropriate rating. These shall be

fitted at all conduit box lighting point outlets for jointing of looped P.V.C. cables
of specified quality.

15.34.0 LAMPHOLDERS

Shall be of the extra H.O. skirted pattern and shall be provided for every specified
lighting fitting and shall be B.C., E.S. or G.E.S. as required. All E.S. and G.E.S.
holders shall be heavy brass type (except for plain pendants where reinforced
bakelite type shall be used). The screwed cap of the E.S. and G.E.S. holders shall
be connected to the neutral.

Where lamp holders are supported by flexible cable, the holders shall have “cord
grip” arrangements and in the case of metal shades earthing screws shall be
provided on each of the folders.

The Sub-Contractor must order the appropriate type of holder when ordering
lighting fittings, to ensure that the correct types of holders are provided
irrespective of the type normally supplied by the manufacturers.

15.35.0 LAMPS

All lamps shall be suitable for normal stated supply voltage and the number and
sizes of lamps detailed on the drawings shall be supplied and fixed. The Sub-
Contractor must verify the actual supply voltage with the supply authority before
ordering the lamps.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 98

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Tungsten filament lamps shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S.S. 161 for
general service lamps and B.S.S. 565 for lamps other than general services.
Tubular fluorescent lamps shall comply with B.S.S. 1853.

Pearl lamps shall be used in all fittings unless otherwise specified.

15.36.0 TELEPHONE CONNECTION FACILITIES

The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install flush telephone outlets as

manufactured by M.K. Electric Co. Ltd. or approved equal and flush galvanised
steel telephone entry boxes (T.E.B.) for UTL cables.

The Sub-Contractor shall run 25mm. gauge PVC conduits to link every telephone
outlet to its nearest T.E.B. The conduits shall link it from the top to avoid rain
water. Sufficient draw wires shall be left in all conduits, accessible at both the
outlet and the T.E.B.

15.37.0 AERIAL CONNECTION FACILITIES

The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install flush T.V. coaxial outlet boxes (ACB)
by 25mm heavy gauge conduit. A.C.B. ‘s shall be mounted 300mm from the
highest ceiling level of the unit, and the conduit shall link it from the top to avoid
rain water.

Sufficient draw wires shall be left, accessible at both ends of the conduit.

15.38.0 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM

The Sub-Contractor shall supply and install roof air termination of (20 x 3)mm
copper tape fixed on the roof ridge tiles or wall top ends, with purpose made
clamps of the right size spaced with a distance of not more than 1.2m run of the
tape. This distance shall be decreased where necessary to obtain the approved
rigidity.

The lighting arresters shall be bonded to the copper tape and firmly fixed on the
roof to approval.

The down conductors above test clamps, shall be 70mm2 copper conductors in
25mm super high impact heavy gauge column concealed conduits. The shall be
bonded to the air termination tapes at approved positions. They shall drop along
the vertical lines through approved positions and be connected to earth test
clamps mounted 2500mm above ground level.

Apart from down conductors and conduits, all the above installation material and
fittings shall be purpose made as manufactured by Furse or approved equal.

The down conductors between the earth test camps and earth electrode shall be
two number 35mm2 copper conductors in parallel. Each shall run in an approved
10mm minimum internal diameter supper high impact conduit of 26mm minimum
wall thickness by IEC ltd. or any recognized manufacturer. These shall be
concealed in builders column, but between the comn and manhole, the sub-
contractor shall surround the same by 50mm layer of 1:2:4 cement, sand and
12mm aggregate mixture.

The two down conductors shall be bonded to earth electrode, and connected to
test clamp.

15.39.0 LIGHTING FITTINGS

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 99

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 This Sub-Contract shall include for the provision, handling charges, taking the
delivery, safe storage, wiring (including internal wiring) assembling and erecting of
all lighting fittings shown on the drawings.

All fittings and pendants shall be fixed to conduit boxes with brass R/H screws.
These to be in line with metal finish of fittings. The lighting fittings are detailed
for the purpose of establishing a high standard of finish and under no
circumstances will substitute fittings be permitted.

Incase of rectangular shaped ceiling fittings, the extreme ends of the fittings shall
be secured to suitable support n addition to the central conduit box fittings.
Supports shall be provided and fixed by the Sub-Contractor.

The whole of the work of each lighting fittings shall be effectively bonded to
earth. In the case of ball and/or knuckle joints short lengths of flexible cable shall
be provided, bonded to the metal work on either side of the joints. If the above
provisions are not made by the manufacturers, the Sub-Contractor shall include
cost of additional work necessary in his tender. See “Flexible Cords for details of
internal wiring of lighting fittings. Minimum size of internal wiring shall be
20/0.20mm (23/0067). Each lighting fitting shall be provided with number, type
and size of lamps as detailed on the drawings. It is to be noted that some fittings
are suspended as shown on the drawings.

15.40.0 POSITIONS OF POINTS AND SWITCHES

Although the appropriate positions of all points are shown on the drawings
enquiry shall be made as to the exact positions of all M.C.B. panels, lighting
points, socket outlets etc., before work is actually commenced. The Sub-
Contractor must approach the Architect with regard to the final layout of all lights
on the ceiling and walls.

Where two or more points are shown adjacent to each other on the drawings, e.g.
socket and telephone outlet, they shall be lined up vertically or horizontally on
the center lines of the units.

Normally the units shall be lined up on vertical centre lines, but where it is
necessary to mount units at low level they shall be line up horizontally.

The Sub-Contractor must consult with the Engineer in liaison with the clerk of
works, or the General Foreman on site regarding the positions of all points
before fixing any conduits etc. the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for all
alterations made necessary by the non-compliance with the clause.

15.41.0 STREET/SECURITY LIGHTING COLUMNS

These shall be mild steel conforming to BS. 1840:1952 and fabricated to Ministry
of works design and specification.

The column shall be at a minimum of 225mm in the ground on 75mm thick

concrete foundations and the pole up to 6” shall be surrounded with concrete.
The top bracket and plain section of the columns shall be common to and
interchangeable with all brackets with maximum mismatching tolerance of 3mm
between any pole and brackets. After manufacture and before erection the
columns shall be treated with an approved mordant solution which shall be
washed off and the whole allowed to dry. Thereafter, the columns shall be
painted with one undercoat and two coats of gloss paint to an approved colour.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 100

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All columns shall be complete with fused cut-outs type MC 040 SL.
Manufactured by Lucy Oxford or equivalent.

15.42.0 TIMING CONTROL SWITCH

These shall be installed where shown on the drawings. Photocell timing control
circuits which will operate ‘on’ with a specified level of darkness and ‘off’ with a
given level of light. The initial adjustment will be done with approval of the
Electrical Engineer.

15.43.0 WIRING SYSTEM FOR STREETLIGHTING

Cables shall be 4mm2 PVC/SWA/PVC., 2-core, 3-core and 4-core as indicated

on the drawings, and shall be laid in a cable trench 450mm deep along the road
sides and 600mm deep across the roads and 900mm away from the road kerb or
1500mm away from the edges of the road. ‘Loop-in’ and ‘loop-out’
arrangements shall be used at every pole. Wiring to the lanterns on each pole
shall be with 1.5mm2 PVC protected by 5A cartridge fuse. Cables across the
roads and at the entrance of the plots shall be laid in ducts. No underground
joints shall be permitted.

15.44.0 DUCTS

Ducts for the road crossing and the entrance of the plots shall be of concrete
pipe jointed in a approved manner, with an internal diameter of not less than
100mm. The ducts shall be laid at least 600mm below the finished road level on
a compact bed of murram at least 50mm thick.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 101

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 15.45.0 METAL CONTROL PILLAR

These shall be metal clad and fabricated to M.O.W. design and specification.
The Sub-Contractor shall supply, install, test and commission all control pillars
including supplying, fixing connecting switchgears as detailed on the appropriate
drawings.

15.46.0 CURRENT OPERATED EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER

Current operated earth leakage circuit breaker shall conform to B.S. 4293:63
rated at 240 volts D.P. 50 cycles A.C. Mains.

The breaker shall be provided with test switch and fitted in weather proof
enclosure for surface mounting. The rated load current and earth fault operating
current shall be as specified in the drawings. These shall be as manufactured by
Crabtree, Siemens or other equal and approved.

15.47.0 M.V. SWITCHBOARD AND SWICHGEAR

The switchboards shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 162 which co-
ordinates the requirements for electrical power switchgear and associated
apparatus. It is not intended that this B.S. should cover the requirements for
specific apparatus for which separate British Standard exist. All equipment and
material used in the switchboard shall be in accordance with the appropriate
British Standard.

The switchboard shall comprise the equipment shown on the drawings together
with all current transformers, auxiliary fuses, labels small wiring and
interconnections necessary for the satisfactory operation of the switchboard.

Switchboard shall be of the flush fronted, enclosed, metal clad type with full
front or rear access as called for in the particular specification, suitable for indoor
use, sectionalized as necessary to facilitate is to be approximate 2.0. metres.

A suitable connection chamber containing all field terminals shall be provided at

the top or button of the switchboard as appropriate.

Before manufacture, the sub-contractor shall submit to the consulting engineer

for approval of detailed drawings showing the layout construction and
connection of the switchboard.

All bus-bars and bus-bar connections shall consist of high conductivity copper
and be provided in accordance with B.S. 158 and B.S. 159. The bus-bars shall be
clearly marked with the appropriate phase and neutral colours which should be
red, yellow, blue for the phases and black for the neutral. The bus-bars shall be
so arranged in the switchboard that extensions to the left and right may be made
in the future should the need arise.

Small wiring, which be neatly arranged and cleated, shall be executed in

accordance with B.S. 158 and the insulation of the wiring shall be coloured
according to the phase or neutral connection.

Switches and fuse switches, shall be in strict accordance with B.S. 861 Class 2
Switches. Means of locking the switch in the “OFF” position shall provided.

All fuseswitches shall comply with B.S. 3185 and shall have a fault rating at least
equal to the fault rating of switchboard in which they are installed. Cartridge fuse
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 102

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 links to B.S. 88 category A.C. 46 Class Q1 and fusing factor not exceeding 1.5
shall be supplied with each fused switch.

Mounting arrangements shall be such that individual complete fuse switches may
be disconnected and withdrawn when necessary without extensive dismantling
work. When switches are arranged in their formation all necessary horizontal and
vertical barriers shall be provided to ensure segregation from adjacent units.
Means of locking the switch in the “OFF” position shall e provided.

15.48.0 STEEL CONDUITS AND STEEL TRUNKING

Conduits shall be of heavy gauge class Welded to British Standard specification

B.S. 31. In no case will conduit smaller than 20mm diameter be used on the
works. Conduits installed within buildings shall be black enameled finish except
where specified otherwise where installed externally or in damp conditions they
shall be galvanized. Conduit fittings, accessories or equipment used in
conjunction with galvanized conduits shall also be in galvanized or otherwise as
approved by the service engineer.

Metal trunking shall be fabricated from mild steel of not less than 18 swg. All
sections of trunking shall be rigidly fixed together and attached to the framework
or fabric or the building at intervals of not less than 1.2m. Joint in trunking shall
not overhang points by more than 0.5m.

All trunking shall be made electrically continuous by means of 25 x 3mm copper

links across joint and where the trunking is galvanised, the links shall be made by
galvanized flat iron strips.

All trunking fittings (i.e. bends, tee, etc) shall leave the main trough completely
clear of obstructions and continuously open except through walls and floors at
which points suitable fire resisting barriers shall be provided as may be necessary.
The inner edge of bends and tees shall be chamfered cables larger than 35mm 2
are employed.

Where trunking passes through ceilings and walls the cover shall be solidly fixed
to 150mm either side of ceilings and floors and 50mm either side of walls.

Screws and bolts securing covers to trunking or section of covers together shall
be arranged so that damage to cables cannot occur either when fixing covers or
when installing cables in the trough.

Where trunking is used to connect switchgear or fuseboards, such connections

shall be made by trunking fittings manufactured for this purpose and not
multiple conduit couplings.

Where vertical sections of trunking are used which exceed 4.5m in length,
staggered tie off points shall be provided at 4.5m intervals to support the weight
of cables.

Unless otherwise stated, all trunking system shall be painted as for conduit.

Where a wiring system incorporates galvanized conduit and trunking, the

trunking shall be deemed to be galvanized unless specified otherwise.

The number of cables to be installed in trunking shall be such as to permit easy

drawing in without damage to the cables, and shall in no circumstances be such
space factor of 45% is exceeded.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 103

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Conduit and trunking shall be mechanically and electrically conditinous. Conduit
shall be tightly screwed between the various lengths so that they butt at the
socketed joints. The internal edges conduit and all fittings shall be smooth, free
from burrs and other defects. Oil and any other insulating substance shall be
removed from the screw threads. Where conduits terminate in fusegear,
distribution boards, adaptable boxes, non-spouted switchboxes, etc., they shall,
unless otherwise stated, be connected thereto by means of smooth bore male
brass bushes, compression washers and sockets. All exposed threads and
abrasions shall be painted using an oil paint for black enamelled tubing and
galvanised paint for galvanised tubing immediately after the conduits are erected.
All bends and sets shall be made cold without altering the section of the conduit.
The inner radius of the bed shall not be less than four (4) times the outside
diameter of the conduit. Not more than two right angle bends will be permitted
without the inner-position of a draw-in-box. Where straight runs of conduit are
installed, daw-in- boxes shall be provided at distances not exceeding 15m. No
tees, elbows, sleeves, either of inspection or soil type, will be permitted.

Conduit shall be swabbed out prior to drawing in cables, and they shall be laid so
as to drain off all condensed moisture without injury to end connections.

Conduits and trunking shall be run at least 150mm clear of hot water steam
pipes, and at least 75mm clear of cold water and other services unless otherwise
approved by the services Engineer.

All boxes shall conform to B.S. 31, to be of malleable iron, and black enamelled
or galvanised accordingly to the type of conduit specified. All accessory boxes
shall have threaded brass inserts.

Box lids where required shall be heavy gauge metal, secured by means of zinc
plant or cadmium planted steel screw.

All adaptable boxes and lids of the same size shall be interchangeable.

Boxes used on surface work are to be taped or drilled to line up with the conduit
fixed in distance type saddles allowing clearance between the conduit and wall
without the need for setting the conduit.

Where used in conjunction with mineral insulated copper sheathed cable,

galvanized boxes shall be and painted after erection.

Draw-in boxes in the floors are generally to be avoided but where they are
essential they must be grouped in positions approved by the services engineer
and covered and by suitable floor traps, with non-ferrous trays and covers.

The floor trap covers are to be recessed and filled in with a material to match the
surface.

The Sub-Contractor must take full responsibility for the filling in of all covers,
but the filling in materials will be supplied and the filling carried out by the Main
Building Contractor.

Where buried in the ground outside the building the whole of the buried conduit
is to be painted with two coats of approved bitumastic composition before
covering up.

Where run on the surface, unpainted fittings and joints shall be painted with two
coats of oil bound enamel applied to rust and grease free metal work.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 104

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 15.49.0 APPLYING FOR AND FOLLOWING UP UEDCL POWER SUPPLY

The Sub-Contractor shall supply for and follow up UEDCL’s power supply. He
shall make sure there is power up to every meter box on every site before the
completion date.

The Electrical Engineer may help in applying only.

15.50.0 TESTING ON SITE

The sub-contractor shall conduit during and at the completion of the installation
and, if required, again at the expiration of the maintenance period, tests in
accordance with the relevant section of the current edition of the Regulations for
the electrical equipment of buildings issued by the I.E.E of Great Britain, the
Government Electrical Specification and the Electric supply Company’s By-
Laws.

Tests shall be carried out to prove that all single pole switches are installed in the
‘live’ conductor.

Tests shall be carried out to prove that all socket outlets and switched socket
outlets are connected to the ‘live’ conductor in the terminal marked as such, and
that each earth pin is bonded to the earth continuity system. Tests shall be
carried out to verify the continuity of all conductors of each ‘ring’ circuit.

Phase tests shall be carried out on completion of the installation to ensure that
correct phase sequence is maintained throughout the installation. Triplicate
copies of the results of the above tests shall be provided within 14 days of the
witnessed tests and the sub-contractor will be required to issue to the service
engineer the requisite certificate upon completion as required by the regulations
referred to above.

Any faults; defects. Of omissions or faculty workmanship, incorrectly positioned

or installed parts of the installation made apparently by such inspections of tests
shall be rectified by the sub-contractor at his own expense.

The sub-contractor shall provide accurate instruments and apparatus and all
labour required to carry out the above tests. The instruments and apparatus shall
be made available to the services engineer to enable him to carry out such tests as
he may require.

The sub-contractor shall generally attend on other contractors employed on the

project and carry out such electrical tests as may be necessary.

The Sub-contractor shall test to the services engineer’s approval and as specified
elsewhere in this specification or in standards and regulations already referred to,
all equipment, plant and apparatus forming part of the works and before
connecting to any power or other supply and settling to work.

Where such equipment, etc., forms part of or is connected to a system whether

primarily of n electrical nature or otherwise (e.g. air conditioning system) the sub-
contractor shall attend on and assist in balancing, regulations testing and
commissioning, or if primarily an electrical or other system forming part of the
works, shall balance, regulate, test and commission the system to the service
engineer’s approval.

ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 105

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

16.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES

GLAZING 106

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 16.0 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING FINISHES

16.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice shall be
observed.

British Standards

a) B.S. 1191 Part 1 Gypsum building plaster (excluding premixed light

Class B weight plasters)

b) B.S. 1193 Standard for internal plastering with gypsum

plasters.

c) B.S. 1199 Table 1 Sands for external renderings, internal plastering

with lime and Portland Cement, and floor screeds.

d) B.S. 1201 Aggregate for granolithic concrete floor finishes.

e) B.S. 1281 Glazed ceramic tiles and tile fittings for internal
walls.

f) B.S. 1369 Metal lathing (steel for plastering)

g) B.S. 890 Class A Building limes

h) B.S. 1187 Wood block for floors

i) NOTE: The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “S”

of the Standard Method of Measurement.

j) C.P. 211 Internal plastering

k) C.P. 221 External rendered finishes

l) C.P. 204 In-situ floor finishes

m) C.P 202 Tile flooring and slab flooring

n) C.P. 203 Sheet and tile flooring (cock, linoleum, plastics and
rubber)

o) C.P. 212 part 1+2 Wall tiling

p) C.P. 209 Care and maintenance of floor surfaces

16.2.0 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

16.2.1 Cement

GLAZING 107

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Cement shall be described in “Concrete”

16.2.2 Sand

Sand shall comply with the requirements of the Standards mentioned earlier.

16.3.0 LIME

Lime shall be non-hydraulic lime to satisfy the Standards mentioned above. It shall be
obtained from an approved source. It must be freshly burnt and shall be slaked at least one
month before using by drenching with water, well broken up and mixed and the wet mixture
shall be passed through a sieve of 10 meshes to the square centimeter. Lime putty shall
consist of freshly slaked lime as described above saturated with water until semi-fluid and
passed through and fine sieve, it shall then be allowed to stand until superfluous water has
evaporated and it has become of consistency of thick paste, in no case for shorter period of
one month before being used during which it must be kept damp and clean and no portion
of it allowed to become dry.

Alternatively, hydrated lime with 70% average calcium oxide content may be used and it
must be protected from damp until required for use. It shall be soaked to a putty at least 24
hours before use.

16.3.0 CONCRETE BED OF SLABS

All concrete beds and slabs shall be thoroughly brushed clean, hatched if necessary and well
wetted and flushed over with a cement and sand (1:1) grout immediately before screeds or
paving are laid .

Screeds and cement paving shall be laid in accordance with the relevant British Standards
and/or Codes of Practice and in alternate bays generally not exceeding 3.0m during any
period of working hours with neat joints and shall be damp cured with sand or sawdust and
kept damp for at least 7 days after laying.

As bays are formed batten strips must be used to retain the exposed edge of the screed.

Thicknesses and mixes of screeds are adjusted to suite the various top dressing and the
Contractor must first ascertain what finish is intended to each specific area before the work
of the laying screeds is put in hand.

Screeds shall be finished with a wood float for wood blocks and steel trowel for
thermoplastic and similar tiles.

16.4.0 SURFACES TO BE PLASTERED

All surfaces to be plastered must be brushed clean and well wetted before plaster is applied.
Joints of walling shall be raked and concrete hacked to form a key. Care shall be taken to see
that paving and plastering do not dry out prematurely. Adequate time intervals must be left
between successive coats in two coat work in order that the drying shrinkage of the
undercoat may be substantially complete.

16.5.0 INTERNAL LIME PLASTER

To be applied in minimum two coats to finish not less than 12mm total thickness. The
rendering coat shall be in the proportion of cement and sand (1:4) and the finishing coat not
less than 1.50mm thick shall consist of fine sieved lime putty with 10% of cement
thoroughly incorporated immediately before use, trowel led hard and smooth with a steel
trowel and sprinkled with water during the process.

GLAZING 108

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The first coat must be well scored to form a key and at least fourteen days must elapse
between the completion of any portion of the rendering coat and application of the finishing
coat.

16.6.0 EXTERNAL CEMENT AND SAND RENDERING

External cement and sand rendering shall consist of cement and sand (1:4) applied in two
coats and finished with wood float.

16.7.0 SAMPLES

If required the Contractor shall prepare samples of the screeds, pavings and plastering as
directed until the quality, texture and finish required is obtained and approved by the
Architect, after which all work executed shall conform with the respective approved samples.

16.8.0 SCREEDS AND PAVINGS

All screeds and pavings shall be finished smooth, even and truly level, unless otherwise
specified and paving shall be steel trowel led.

16.9.0 FINISHING

Rendering and plastering shall be finished plumb, square, smooth, hard and even and
junctions between surfaces shall be perfectly true straight and square.

All work not found to be of satisfactory standard shall be hacked away and made good at the
Contractor’s expense.

Partially or wholly set materials will not be allowed to be used or re-mixed. The plaster etc.,
mixes must be used within two hours of being combined with water.

16.10.0 GRANOLITHIC PAVING

Granolithic topping is to be in two layers to the total thickness shown on the Drawings
and the topping shall consist of one part colored cement to two parts aggregate shall be
70% black trap and remainder approved local colored stones.

Colours shall be as selected by the Architect.

Paving shall be rolled and trowel led to a dense even surface and rubbed down at
completion, to a grit finished surface free from holes and blemishes. The paving shall be
laid in squares divided by plastic strips anchored securely in the screed and having their
top edge truly level with the finished floor surface. The granolithic work shall be laid and
polished complete to the approval of the Architect.

16.11.0 WOOD BLOCK FLOORING

Wood block flooring shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1187 mentioned above
and shall be dipped in a cold latex bitumen emulsion adhesive before laying. Any one
package or bundle shall contain wood blocks of a single species, thickness, width, length
and type of manufacture only. The pattern shall be approved by the Architect.

Wood parquet flooring shall comply with relevant standards and shall be laid using and
approved adhesive in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

16.12.0 P.V.C. COVERINGS

GLAZING 109

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 P.V.C. covering shall satisfy the Standard mentioned above and shall be obtained from
an approved manufacturer’s agent. Floor tiles shall be Dunlop or other equal and
approved. Rates shall include for two or an approved emulsion floor polish or other
protective coating.

16.13.0 GLAZED WALL TILES

Glazed wall tiles shall be cushion edged and satisfy the relevant Standard as mentioned
earlier. Tiles shall be well soaked in water laid with straight horizontal and vertical joints
painted in white cement and cleared down at completion.

Tiles joints of 2mm width shall be formed and filled with the redding mix but using very
fine, well screened, care shall be taken that tiles are not over soaked and water shall be
avoided during fixing.

The fixed tiles shall be kept damp for 4 days. Tiles as slash backs to lavatory basins,
sinks and baths shall be fixed with necessary rounded-edge corner tiles.

Rates for linear items shall allow for all special fittings and cutting at angles and
intersections.

16.14.0 GENERAL

Rates for in-situ work shall allow for raking out joints walling or hacking of treating with
an approved bonding fluid. Hacking concrete form key, dubbing out irregular surfaces
of base to provide a finished surface in the same plane as the surrounding surface, cutting
out cracks, making good and leaving the whole of the work sound and perfect on
completion.

Rates shall also allow for fair edges, whether square, splayed or rounded, arises,
chamfered external angles not exceeding 25mm wide, rounded external angles not
exceeding 25mm radius coved internal angles not exceeding 25mm radius, intersections
to groins and the like, and for making good round pipe, brackets, floor spring boxes and
all other items of a like nature.

Rates for all linear items shall allow for all short lengths, angles, end and arises, mitres
and intersections and the like.

Rates for all paving shall allow for adequate covering protection during the progress of
the works to ensure that the floors are handed over in perfect condition on completion.

Rates of external rendering shall allow for work at any height and for any scaffolding,
ladders, cradles etc. required.

16.15.0 TERRAZZO PAVINGS:

Aggregate for terrazzo shall be good quality marble or other natural stone of similar
characteristics, hard angular in shape, free from clay, iron oxide and other foreign matter,
graded from 10mm to 6mm unless otherwise specified and without excessive content of
fines or dust. The source of supply and the colour are to be approved by the Architect
before bulk ordering.

Terrazzo flooring must be laid and finished by an approved specialist Sub-Contractor.

All base surfaces must be thoroughly cleaned to remove dust, dirt, rust, oil and loose
material.

Terrazzo shall be laid in two courses as follows:-

GLAZING 110

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 a) Base course: cement-sand screed 1:3, not less than 20mm thick, followed
immediately by

b) Topping terrazzo mix as specified, not less than 20mm finished thickness.

c) Skirtings are to be 6mm thick on a screed not less than 10mm thick.

Terrazzo bays shall not be more than 1M2 and joints shall be formed with plastic or
aluminium strips set out to an approved pattern. Strips must be carried through the
backings screed and finish flush with the floor surface.

Tamp lightly immediately after laying and compaction trowel lightly, taking care to avoid
excessive laitance on the surface. Not less than 3 days after laying, rough polish by an
approved mechanical means using water. Grout with a fine mix reserved from the
initial mix. Not less than 8 days after grouting, fine polish by an approved mechanical
means using water to a texture approved by the Architect.

16.16.0 TERRAZZO FLOOR TILES

Terrazzo floor tiles shall be B.S 4131 of approved manufacturer. The faces of tiles must
be free from projections, depressions, flakes and crazes. The overall colour must be
practically uniform in any one delivery. The facing level must not be less than 6mm
thick after grinding.

Unless otherwise specified or approved by the Architect, tiles are to be 197mm x

197mm x 22mm.

16.17.0 MOSAIC FINISHES

Mosaic finishes shall comply with the requirements of B.S Codes of Practice C.P. 212
Part 2.

16.18.0 QUARRY TILE FINISHES:

Quarry tile finishes shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1286

16.19.0 GRANITE:

Granite is to be sourced from an approved supplier.

Granite tiles (panels) shall be minimum 20mm thick and
Shall be cut straight and true to the pattern to be
Approved by the architect.

Granite tiles shall be laid on a suitable adhesive as

Recommended by the supplier.
All joints shall be filled with grout to match the granite colour
After laying and polished to provide a smooth even surface.

Exposed tile surfaces shall be bull nosed (or rounded and polished)

16.20.0 GRANITE / MARBLE WALL FINISHES

Granite and marble wall finishes shall be applied to areas as indicated on the drawings
and no larger than can be safely fixed with an approved adhesive – i.e. no mechanical
fixing and shall be minimum 8mm thick.

GLAZING 111

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Granite shall be securely fixed, butt jointed, to form a smooth, even and vertical face.

Joints shall be pointed with a matching grout in accordance with the suppliers’
recommendations.

Colours shall be carefully selected to match the approved shampoo colour

16.21.0 CERAMIC TILE PAVINGS AND ACCESSORIES

Ceramic tiles and accessories of the type described herein are to be fixed with an
adhesive to comply with BF Code of Practice 202 : 1972 (“ tile flooring and flab?
Flooring”), tiles are to be laid with close straight joints in each direction and upon
completion grouted in matching coloured cement and washed and cleaned down.

Tiles are to be cut with an electric tile cutting saw.

16.22.0 PLASTERBOARD

The external plasterboard shall be to BS1230 and where described as insulating, shall
have a bright aluminium foil model to one side.

Plasterboards shall be fixed on galvanized steel framework complete with all accessories
and fixing. Beads shall be to BS6452.

Plasterboard shall be supplied complete with all jointing materials, including compounds
and jointing tape to BS6214.

17.0 GLAZING

GLAZING 112

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

17.0 GLAZING

17.1.0 STANDARDS AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice shall be
observed.

British Standards

a) B.S 952 Glass for glazing.

b) B.S. 544 Linseed oil putty for use in wooden frames

c) NOTE: The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “T” of

the Standard Method of Measurements.

Codes of Practice

d) C.P. 152 Glazing and fixing glass for buildings.

17.2.0 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

The whole of the glass shall be of the best quality and be free from bubbles, specks, waves
flaws or any other defects and shall comply with the requirements of the standard mentioned
above.

All glass is to be accurately cut to fit easily into rebates. Glass shall be well puttied and
sprigged with copper springs.

Glazing to wood frames shall be secured with glazing beads fixed with brass caps and screws
and wash leather or approved “Neoprene” beading strips. Putty for lazing in wood frames
shall be composed of pure linseed oil and powdered whiting, free from grittiness all in
accordance with the standard mentioned above.

Glazing to metal frames shall be with clips, glass shall be properly back puttied and the front
putty finished neatly and cleanly.

Putty for glazing in metal frames shall be quick hard setting tropical putty specially
manufactured for use with steel windows.

Rebates of metal frames receiving glass shall be prepared and treated with primer for putty
prior to glazing and putty shall be primed 10 days after glazing.

Rates for glazing Georgian wired glass shall include for aligning lines in adjoining panes both
ways.

Glass panes shall be cut to sizes to fit the opening with not more than 1.6mm play all round.
Clear sheet shall be ordinary glazing (OQ) quality and polished plate shall be (GG) quality.

Mirrors to be of selected glazing (S.G) quality plates glass of approved manufacture with
beveled edge and fixed at all corners to walls with raw plugs and brass screws with
removable chromium plated dome heads.

Cut out all cracked or broken glass re-glazed to match and leave perfect on completion. On
no account shall windows be cleaned by scraping with glass.

17.3.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

GLAZING 113

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 17.3.1 GLAZING

17.3.1.1 Definitions

17.3.1.1.1 Fixings

The provision of glazing compounds and putties and sprigs,

clips and other sundry fixings, shall be deemed to be included
with all items of glazing.

17.3.1.1.2 Materials

17.3.1.1.2.1 Glass Generally

All glass shall comply in all respect with the appropriate section
of B.S.952. Plain sheet clear glass shall be O.Q; plate glass shall
be GG; all glass shall be as manufactured by Pilkington Brothers
Limited or another approved manufacturer.

17.3.1.1.2.2 Putty for Glazing to Wood

Putty for glazing to wood shall comply with B.S.544.

17.3.1.1.2.3 Putty for Glazing to Metal

Putty for glazing to metal shall be approved mastic

manufactured for the purpose, used in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions.

17.3.1.1.2.4 Samples

Samples not less than 150mm square are to be submitted to the

Architect for approval before any glass is cut.

17.3.1.1.3 Workmanship

17.3.1.1.3.1 Glass to be kept free from moisture

All glass surfaces shall be kept dry during transit and storage.
Glass becoming moist from condensation or other causes shall
be thoroughly dried and aired.

17.3.1.1.3.2 Rebates and Beads

All rebates and beads in wood shall be primed, before glazing is

commenced.

17.3.1.1.3.3 Edges of Glass

All glass shall have clean cut edges. All exposed edges (i.e.
louvers) shall be rounded and polished.

17.3.1.1.3.4 Bead Glazing

Glazing fixed by beads shall have both glass and beads bedded
and back puttied, and the putty trimmed off flush. Where
sealing strip is used, it shall pass round both faces of the glass
GLAZING 114

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 and be trimmed off flush on both sides. Metal surfaces to
receive sealing strip shall be treated with mineral oil before
glazing.

17.3.1.1.3.5 Putty Glazing

Glazing in putty shall be executed in proper bed and back

putties, sprigs, clips and splayed and mitred front putties. The
back putties shall be trimmed off flush with the top of rebate
and the splayed front putties shall be finished 3 mm back from
sight line to allow for sealing between glass and putty with paint.

17.3.1.1.3.6 Wired Glass

Wired glass shall in all cases be 6 mm Georgian wired, either

polished or cast as specified. The wire in wired glass shall
extend to the edges and be free from rust, and be parallel to the
framing.

17.3.1.1.3.7 Mirrors

All mirrors shall be 6 mm polished plate, foil backed and with

rounded polished edges. Mirrors with chips, cracks, scratches
on back or front will not be accepted.

17.3.1.1.3.8 Safety Glass

All glass fixed below 900mm above floor level shall be either
6mm clear toughened or 6.5mm clear laminated, unless specified
otherwise.

All other glass to doors and internal partitions shall be 6mm

clear float glass.

Glass to existing windows shall match the original or adjacent

glass.

17.3.1.1.3.9 Glass to Partitions

Glass to internal aluminium partitions shall be fixed in

accordance with the approved partition system and as
recommended by the supplier / manufacturer.

17.3.2 STRUCTURAL GLAZING

Specification for structural glazing. Applicable to :

17.3.2.1 All vertical feature façade panels.

17.3.2.2 Ground and mezzanine floor showroom windows.

Glazing should be Cool-Lite P: Pastel Blue tempered high

performance glass by Saint Gobain and shall be:

a. 10mm thick.

b. Supplied complete with corresponding spandrel panels.

GLAZING 115

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 c. Supplied complete with floor to floor smoke / heat insulation.

d. Supplied complete with matching aluminium frames, opening

and stay mechanism and completely watertight.

e. The wind exposure shall be based on the attached climatic data

and a city center site.

f. Suitable for an internal air-conditioned environmental –

ambient temperature – 23 degrees centigrade.

The structural glazing shall be supplied and installed by a specialist

approved by the Architect and based on approved shop drawings.

GLAZING 116

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 STATION NAME : KAMPALA MET. STATION
LATITUDE 0?20N LONGITUDE 32?36*E LATITUDE: 4304 FEET 1312 METRES

ATMOSPHERIC TEMP (60-95) RELATIVE HUMIDITY RAINFALL DAILY WIND SPEED CALMS
PRESSURE (60-95) MEANS 0300Z 0600Z 1200Z MEAN NUMBER SUNSHINE (1960-95) (1960-95)
MONTH 0600Z 1200Z MAX MIN % % % (1960-95) OF RAIN (1960-95) 0600Z 1200Z 0600Z 1200Z
MB MB ?C ?C mm DAYS MAX MEAN MIN.MEAN KNOTS KNOTS DAYS DAYS

JAN 870.1 867.3 28.4 18.1 53 78 53 51 6 9.2 5.4 7 12 2 0

FEB 869.9 867.3 28.3 18.1 84 80 55 62 7 9.2 3.7 6 13 2 1
MAR 869.8 867.3 27.5 18.0 91 82 60 113 11 8.0 5.0 7 12 1 0
APRIL 870.5 868.2 26.1 17.6 92 88 69 182 16 8.1 4.7 7 11 3 1
MAY 871.3 869.2 25.4 17.5 92 89 71 140 13 7.5 4.9 7 12 2 1
JUN 872.1 870.4 25.2 17.2 91 87 68 75 9 7.7 4.2 7 13 2 1
JUL 872.0 870.5 25.1 16.5 89 89 66 50 7 7.7 2.9 8 12 3 2
AUG 871.6 869.7 25.6 16.4 92 89 66 86 10 6.6 4.7 8 11 2 1
SEPT 871.3 868.9 26.6 16.6 93 87 65 101 11 8.0 3.5 8 11 2 1
OCT. 870.8 867.9 27.2 16.9 91 83 63 109 12 7.8 4.8 7 10 2 1
NOV. 870.3 867.4 27.2 17.3 86 81 61 114 11 7.9 5.1 6 10 2 1
DEC. 870.3 867.6 27.2 17.4 87 81 60 97 9 9.4 5.2 7 11 2 1

1 Knot = 1.85 km/hr

LONG/LAT 32.6 E/0.3N MARCH JUNE SEPT. DEC.
TIMES OF SUN RISE 6.52 A.M. 6.47 A.M. 6.39 A.M. 6.44 A.M
TIMES OF SUN SET 6.59 P.M. 6.59 P.M. 6.46 P.M. 6.51 P.M.

GLAZING
PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY
18.0 PAINTING AND DECORATING

PAINTING AND DECORATING 118

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

18.0 PAINTING AND DECORATING

18.1.0 STANDARD AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice shall be
observed:-

British Standards

a) B.S 2521 + 2523 Lead based joint

b) B.S. 3968 Calcium plumbate priming paints
c) B.S. 4756 Ready mixed aluminium priming paints for woodwork
d) B.S. 1335 Knotting
e) B.S. 3842 Treatment of plywood with preservatives.
f) B.S. 4800 Paint colours for building purposes
g) B.S 2524 Red-Oxide-Linseed oil priming paint
h) B.S. 2525-7 Undercoating and finishing paints
i) B.S. 1215 Oil Stains
j) NOTE: The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “U” of the
Standard Method of Measurements.
Codes of Practice

k) C.P. 231 Paints for buildings

l) C.P. 3012 Cleaning and preparations of metal surfaces.

18.2.0 GENERAL

All work under this trade must be executed by an approved specialist unless otherwise
permitted.

The Contractor’s Programme in this area shall be so arranged that all others trades are
completed and away from the area to be painted prior to the commencement of painting.
Before painting the Contractor must remove all concrete and mortar droppings and the like
from all work to be decorated and remove all strains from and obtain uniform colour to
work to be oiled and polished.

18.3.0 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

All plaster, metal, wood or other surfaces which are to receive finishes of paint, stain, polish,
distemper or paint work of any description are to be carefully inspected by the Contractor
before he allows any of his painters to commence work. The Contractor will be held solely
responsible for all defective work as a result of his painters failure to insist on receiving from
the other trades surfaces in the proper condition to allow first class finishes to the various
kinds specified being applied to them.

All painting and decorating schemes shall be carried out in colours selected by the
Architects.

Paints shall be ready mixed, oil based priming paint shall comply with the requirements of
the relevant standards mentioned earlier.

The oil shall comply with the requirements of B.S. 1215

PAINTING AND DECORATING 119

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All materials shall be of the best quality and shall be of an approved proprietary brand
selected from the latest Schedule of Approved paints issued by the Ministry of Works.

Materials to be applied externally shall be of external quality and/or recommended by the

manufacturers for external use.

Materials shall be delivered to site intact in the original sealed drums ortins and shall be
mixed and applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and to the
approval of the Architect.

Unless specifically instructed or approved by the Architect, no paints, distemper etc. are to
be thinned or otherwise adulterated, but are to be used as supplied by the manufacturers and
direct from the tins.

If required by the Architect the Contractor shall provide at his own expense samples of
paints etc. with containers and cases to be forwarded, carriage paid, by the Contractor for
analyzing to a laboratory.

The priming, undercoat and finishing coats shall each be of differing tints, and the priming
and undercoats shall be the correct brands and tints to suit the respective finishing coats, in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. All finishing coats shall be of colours and
tints selected by the Architect. Each coat must be approved by the Architect before the next
coat is applied.

Each coat shall be properly dry and in the case of oil or enamel paints shall be well rubbed
down with fine glass paper before the next is applied. The paintwork shall be finished
smooth and free from brush marks.

Colour cards of all paints etc. shall be submitted to, and samples prepared for approval of
the Architect before laying on, and such samples, when approved, shall become the standard
for the works.

All paints, emulsion paints, and distempers shall be applied by means of a brush or spray gun
or rollers of an approved type, where so agreed by the Architect.

No painting is to be done in wet weather or on surfaces which are not thoroughly dry.

Woodwork to be painted shall be rubbed down and all knots and resin pockets shall be
scorched back and coated with knotting. After priming all nail holes and other
imperfections shall be stopped and the whole surface be rubbed down and all dust brushed
off. The surface of woodwork shall be lightly sand prepared between the coats.

All work in contract with walling or plaster shall be treated after cutting and preparation but
before assembly or fixing with one coat of wood preservative. The solution is to be brushed
on all faces of all timbers, unless exposed to view and painted. The Contractor shall not that
this solution is poisonous and shall take all necessary precautions and instruct his workmen
accordingly.

Wax polish shall be furniture polish of an approved branch, and wood surfaces shall be clean
smooth free from oil or grease or any other blemishes. A minimum of two coats shall be
applied to approval.

Plaster surfaces shall be perfectly smooth free from defects and ready for decorations. All
such surfaces shall be allowed to dry a minimum period of six weeks, stopped with approved
plaster compound stopping and rubbed down flush as necessary, and then thoroughly,
immediately prior to decorating.

PAINTING AND DECORATING 120

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Plaster surfaces which are to be finished with emulsion, oil or enamel paint shall be primed
with an alkali resisting primer complying with the particular paint manufacturer’s
specifications and applied in accordance with their instructions.

Fibre board or similar surfaces shall be lightly brushed down to remove all dirt, dist or loose
particles and have all nail holes or other defects stopped with an approved plaster compound
stopping rubbed down flush and left with a texture so match surrounding materials and shall
receive one coat petrifying liquid at last or two coats polyurethane or clear laquar.

All metal surfaces shall be thoroughly brushed down with wire brushes and scrapped where
necessary to remove all scale, rust, etc. immediately prior to decorating. Where severe rust
exists and if approved by the Architect a proprietary de-rusting solution may be used in
accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Hot primed and unprimed surfaces shall be given one coat of metal chromate primer.

Galvanized surfaces shall be treated before painting with an approved proprietary or de-
greasing solution before priming.

Coated surfaces already treated with bituminous solution shall be scrapped to remove soft
parts and then receive two isolating coats of aluminium primer or other approved anti-tar
primer.

Existing painted and decorated surfaces shall be prepared as described above. Painted
plaster, metal or wood surfaces shall then be rubbed down to expose the material beneath
and old paint burnt off with blow torches if necessary in the Architect’s opinion.

Emulsion paint on ceilings and all undercoats of emulsion paint and complete oil painting on
walls shall be completed before PVC flooring are laid. Final coat of emulsion paints on walls
shall be applied after such flooring has been laid complete.

Three coats of emulsion paints shall be applied to receiving surfaces using a thinning
medium or water only if and as recommended by the manufacturer. An approved plaster
primer tinted to match may be substituted for the first coat.

Enamel paint shall be applied in two undercoats and one finishing coat after preparation and
priming as specified above.

All ironmongery shall be removed from joinery steel windows and louver before painting is
commenced and shall be cleaned and renovated if necessary and re-fixed after completion of
painting.

Rates for painting shall be deemed to include for preparing and priming surfaces above
described.

Rates for paints, distemper etc. shall allow for covering up all floors, fittings, etc. with dust
sheets when executing the work and for removing, covering when no longer required and
floor cleaning off, touching up and leaving perfect at completion.

PAINTING AND DECORATING 121

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

19.0 DRAINAGE

DRAINAGE 122

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

19.0 DRAINAGE

19.1.0 STANDARD AND CODES OF PRACTICE

The requirements of the following British Standards and Codes of Practice shall be
observed.

British Standards

a) B.S. 556 Part 1+2 Concrete cylindrical pipes and fittings (including manholes,
inspection chambers and street gullies)

b) B.S. 401 Concrete un-reinforced tubes and fittings (with ogee joints
for surface water drainage)

c) B.S. 437 Part 1 Cast iron spigot and socket drain pipes and fittings.

d) B.S. 1247 Manhole step irons (in malleable cast iron)

e) B.S 2760 Pitch-impregnated fibre drainage pipes and fittings.

f) B.S. 1211 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas
and sewage.

g) B.S. 1130 Cast iron drain fittings.

h) NOTE The Contractor’s attention is drawn to Section “V” of the

Standard Method of Measurement.
Codes of Practice

i) C.P 301 Building drainage

j) C.P. 2005 Sewerage
k) C.P. 2010 Pipelines

19.2.0 PLASTIC PIPES

The pipework and fittings for use underground shall be u PVC to B.S. 4660

19.3.0 CAST IRON PIPEWORK

Cast iron pipework which is used in connection with buried external services, shall be
manufactured, coated and tested in accordance with the requirement of B.S. 1211

All buried cast iron bends, elbows sweep tees and other fittings, shall comply with the
requirements of B.S. 1130.

Jointing on external cast iron pipe shall be carried out in accordance with one of the
methods described in British Standards Code of Practice 301, Clause 505 c (v), to the
approval of the Architect.

19.4.0 PITCH FIBRE PIPEWORK

Pitch fibre pipework and fittings for use in connection with external drainage services shall
be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 2760. Pipes shall be connected
by means of purpose made tapered joints manufactured in accordance with B.S. 2760.

DRAINAGE 123

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Until such time as the use of pitch impregnated fibre pipes is covered by Code of Practice,
the jointing, laying and cutting of these pipes shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of the notes under Appendix C of B.S. 2760.

19.5.0 CONCRETE PIPEWORK

Where concrete pipes and fittings are used in connection with the conveyance of surface
water or sewage under atmospheric pressure, they shall be manufactured in accordance with
the requirements of B.S. 556, Class 1, except where otherwise stated.

The joints of concrete pipe and fittings may be one of the following depending upon
application and conditions:-

1) Flexible spigot and socket type

2) Flexible rebated type (stormwater drainage only)
3) Ordinary spigot and socket type.
4) Ordinary rebated type (Stormwater drainage only)

Joints (1) and (2) shall be sealed with suitable rubber gaskets manufactured in accordance
with B.S. 2494 except where they are likely to be contaminated by oil products, in which case
the gaskets shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 3514.

Joints (3) and (4) shall be made with approved cement mortar mix.

19.6.0 ASBESTOS CEMENT SOIL WASTE AND VENTILATION PIPES

Where spigot and socket asbestos cement pipes and fittings are used in connection with the
conveyance of soil and waste or ventilating purposes in above ground applications, they shall
be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 583 and shall comply with Uganda Environment
requirements.

Pipes and fittings shall be joined with cement/sand mortar cement content not to be greater
than 30% of the fibrough cementations jointing compound.

Alternatively, if synthetic rubber rings are used, the annular space between socket and pipe
above the ring shall be packed with a suitable mastic compound.

Rubber rings shall comply fully with the requirements of B.S. 2494.

19.7.0 VALVES

19.7.1 DRAW-OFFS AND STOP VALVES (UP TO 50MM NOMINAL BORE)

Draw off taps and stop valves up to 50mm. Nominal bore, unless otherwise stated
or specified, for attachment or connection to sanitary fitments shall be
manufactured in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1010.

19.7.2 GATE VALVES

All gate valves 80mm. Nominal bore and above, other than those required for
fitting to buried water mains shall be of cast iron construction in accordance with
the requirements of B.S. 3464.

All gate valves required for fitting to buried water mains shall be of cast iron
construction in accordance with the requirement of B.S. 1952.
DRAINAGE 124

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All gate valves up to and including 65mm. Nominal bore shall be of bronze
construction in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1952.

The pressure classification of all gate valves shall depend upon the pressure
conditions pertaining to the Site Works.

19.7.3 GLOBE VALVES

All globe valves up to end and including 65mm. Nominal bore shall be of bronze
construction in accordance with B.S. 2060.

All globe valves 80mm. Nominal bore and above shall be of cast iron construction
in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 3961.

The pressure classification of all globe valves shall depend upon the pressure
conditions pertaining to the Site of Works.

19.7.4 CHECK OR NON-RETURN VALVES

All check or non-return valves up to and including 65mm. Nominal bore shall be
of the swing check of bronze construction in accordance with B.S. 1953.

All check or non-return valves 80mm. Nominal bore and above shall be of the
swing check type of cast iron construction in accordance with the requirements of
B.S. 4090.

The pressure classification of all check-non-return valves shall depend on the

pressure conditions pertaining of Site of the Works.

19.7.5 BALL VALVES

All ball valves for use in connection with hot and cold water services shall be of the
Portsmouth type in accordance with the requirements of B.S. 1212, constructed
from bronze or other corrosion resistant materials. These valves fall into three
pressure classification as follows:-

(a) Low Pressure - 3,538 b maximum

(b) Medium Pressure - 7,725 b maximum

(c) High Pressure - 12,620 b maximum

The pressure classification required for each ball valve will be designated in the
description of its associated equipment contained in Part C of the Specification.

19.7.6 MANUALLY OPERATED MIXING VALVES

Mixing valves for shower fittings and other applications being provided under the
Sub-Contract Works shall be manufactured in accordance with the requirements of
B.S. 1415 from bronze or other corrosion resistant materials.

19.8.0 WASTE FITMENT TRAPS

19.8.1 STANDARD AND DEEP SEAL P AND S TRAPS

DRAINAGE 125

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Where standard or deep seal traps are specified they shall be manufactured in
suitable non-ferrous materials in accordance with the full requirements of B.S.
1184.

In certain circumstances, cast iron traps may be required for cast iron baths and in
these instances bath traps shall be provided which are manufactured in accordance
with the full requirements of B.S. 1291.

19.8.2 ANTI-SYPHON TRAPS

Where anti-syphon traps are specified, these shall be similar or equal to the range of
traps manufactured by Greenwood and Hughes Ltd., Deacon Works,
Littlehampton, Sussex, England.

19.9.0 GENERAL

Drain pipes have been measured over all bends, junctions and other fittings and the
Contractor shall include in his prices for all joints, short lengths, cutting and waste. Rates for
bends, junctions, etc., shall include for the extra joints, cutting and waste and any labour
required.

Lines of drains shall be accurately set out and trenches excavated and bottom trimmed to
accurate gradients to approval before pipe laying commences.

Generally the drainage is to be executed in suitable sections to cause the minimum

interference to the continual use of any existing drains. The location and depths of any
existing drains shall be ascertained before other work is commenced and the rates are to
include for all costs of complying with this requirement.

Excavation for drain trenches shall be not less than 300mm wider than the external diameter
of the pipes and rates shall include for grading ground under beds, carefully filling earth to
avoid damaging pipes, ramming and carting away surplus excavated material, keeping
excavations free from water, if necessary executing such works and installing such pumps as
may be required to keep the excavations dry at all times, and any necessary planking and
strutting.

No subsoil water shall be discharged into the sewers without the written permission of the
Architect.

Excavations shall be made to such depths and dimensions as may be required by the
Architect to obtain proper falls and firm foundations. No permanent construction shall be
commenced on any bottom until the excavation has been examined and approved by the
Architect. Should the Contractor in error or without the instruction of the Architect, make
any excavation below the required level of the drain or bed, as the case be, he will be
required to refill such excavation to the correct levels with concrete (1:4:8 – 38mm gauge).

Rates shall include for excavating in all materials met with and for trimming bottoms to the
necessary falls and working space.

The first back filling of pipes trenches is to be of material free from stone and shall be
watered and carefully tamped over and around the pipes in 300mm layers until they are
covered to a depth of 600mm. Subsequent filling is to be in 150mm layers watered and
rammed, only, materials approved by the Architect are to be used for backfilling.

Where hardcore is used for backfilling it is not to exceed 150mm gauge and all interstices
shall be properly filled with small pieces and fine binder. Surplus excavated materials are to
be removed from site.

DRAINAGE 126

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 If in the opinion of the Architect care has not been exercised in refilling trenches, he may
order a fresh test to be on the drain. In the event of the drain failing to pass the test the
contractor will be required to remedy the fault at his expense.

Concrete beds and surrounds shall be of concrete 1:3:6 – 20mm gauge to the thickness falls,
and widths specified. Hollows shall be left to receive the collar of the pipe, so that the pipes
sufficiently wide to form hard-holds to permit the joining of pipe, and after resting drains
shall be haunched to both sides to half the diameter of the pipe in similar concrete.

Where pipes are specified to the surrounds, the concrete shall be carried up from the bed in
a square section with a minimum of 150mm in thickness over the barrel of the pipe.

Rates for beds and surrounds shall include for forming recesses and filling with concrete, for
mortar layer etc. and for any necessary formwork.

Each pipe shall be carefully examined on arrival, any defective pipes shall be removed
immediately from the site and not used in the works. Minor damage to the protective
coating of cast iron pipes shall be made good by painting with hot tar; if major defects in the
coating exists such pipes shall be rejected and removed form the site.

Drains are to be laid in a straight line from point to point and each pipe is to be properly
bowed in so that the invert is a true and even gradient in order to achieve a fall giving a self
cleansing velocity. The Contractor shall provide suitable equipment and set up and maintain
all sight rails, bowing rods, and bench marks etc. necessary for the purpose.

All drains shall be kept free from earth debris, superfluous cement and other obstructions or
water during laying and until completion of the contract when they shall be handed over in a
clean condition.

Pipes shall be laid with sockets leading uphill and shall rest on solid and even foundations
for the full lengths for the barrel, sockets recesses shall be formed in the foundations, as
short as practicable but sufficiently deep to allow the pipe jointer room to work right round
the pipe. Such recesses shall be filled with cement mortar (1:4) on completion of laying.

All joints are to be accurately made by butting the pipes together, caulking with tarred rope
neat cement finished externally with bold fillet neatly pointed. As each pipe is laid it is to be
drawn with a badger and left free of all obstructions.

Rates of bends junctions and other fittings in drains shall include all cutting and waste and
extra joints.

The testing of drains shall be done at completion and before the trenches are filled in. They
shall be tested in the presence of the Architect and a representative of the Local Authority
by filling with water having a head not less than 1.5m at the highest point of the section
under test. A second and similar test may be applied, after the drain trenches are filled in
and the work complete.

Manholes shall be construction in the position indicated on the Drawings or as required by

the Architect. Such chambers shall be to the depths required to obtain even gradients in the
drain and of sufficient size to contain the requisite main channel and any branches thereto
and all the entire satisfaction of the Architect and Local Authority.

Rendering to manholes shall be trowelled smooth coved at all internal angles and rounded at
arises.

Manholes are to be tested for water-tightness in the same way as to drain by filling with
water but not exceeding 1.5m head. The Contractor shall supply all testing apparatus and
materials necessary for these tests and provide all labour and assistance required. Any failure
DRAINAGE 127

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 whatsoever in the drainage system to withstand the specific tests and any defects appearing
are to be made good and the drains re-tested to the satisfaction of the Architect and Local
Authority.

For connection to public drainage the Contractor shall make all arrangements with the Local
Authority and pay all fees that may be required for connections to main sewers.

19.10.0 TESTING AND INSPECTION

Site Tests – Pipework System

19.11.0 UNDERGROUND DRAINAGE SYSTEM

A Site test shall be carried out on all drainage pipes before concrete haunchings or surrounds
are applied. These tests shall be carried out preferably from manhole to manhole.

Short drains connected to a main drain between manhole shall be tested as one system with
the main drain. In long branches a testing junction shall be inserted next to the junction
with the main drain and the branch tested separately. After the test has been passed, the
testing junction shall be effectively sealed.

All test on underground drains shall be water tests. Smoke tests shall not be permitted.

In certain circumstances air tests may be permitted on cast iron drains at the discretion and
to the approval of the Architect.

Water tests shall be carried out in accordance with the methods described under B.S. Code
of Practice 301. Clauses 601 (b) and (c) and the test pressure shall be not less than 1.520mm
head at the highest point in the pipe section and not more than 10.360m head at any point in
the section.

The test pressure shall be maintained for a period of one hour during which time the pipes
and joints shall be inspected for sweating and leakage. Any leaks discovered during the tests
shall be made good by the Sub-Contractor and the section re-tested.

In addition to pressure tests, drain pipe runs shall also be tested for straightness where
applicable. This test shall be carried out in accordance with one of the two methods
described in B.S. Code of Practice 301, Clause 601 (C).

Testing of manholes shall be carried out in accordance with the methods described under
B.S. Code of Practice 301, Clause 601 (f).

19.12.0 ABOVE GROUND SOIL WASTE AND VENTILATION PIPE SYSTEMS

All soil, waste and ventilation pipe system forming part of the above ground installation,
shall be given a smoke test to a pressure of 38mm of water gauge and this pressure shall
remain constant for a period of not less than three minutes.

All soil, waste and ventilation pipe system forming part of the above ground installation,
shall be given a smoke test to a pressure of 38mm of water gauge and this pressure shall
remain constant for a period of not les than three minutes.

Water tests on above ground soil, waste and ventilating pipe systems shall not be permitted.

Pressure tests shall be carried out before any work which is to be concealed is finally
enclosed.

DRAINAGE 128

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Any defects revealed by the tests shall be made good by the Sub-Contractor and the test
repeated to the approval of the Architect.

In all other respects, tests shall comply with the requirements of B.S. Codes of Practice 304.

19.13.0 SITE TEST – PERFORMANCE

Following satisfactory pressure tests on the pipework systems, operational tests shall be
carried out in accordance with the relevant B.S. Codes of Practice on the system as a whole
to establish that special valves, gauges, controls, fittings equipment and plant are functioning
correctly to the satisfaction of the Architect.

DRAINAGE 129

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

20.0 EXTERNAL WORKS

EXTERNAL WORKS 130

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY
20.0 EXTERNAL WORKS

20.1.0 STANDARDS

The requirements of the following British Standards shall be observed:-

British Standards

a). B.S. 1621 Bitumen Macadam (with crushed rock or slag aggregate)

b). B.S. 340 Precast concrete kerbs, channels, edgings and quadrants

c) B.S. 368 Precast concrete flags

d) B.S. 4428 General landscape operations (excluding hard surfaces)

e) B.S. 3882 Recommendations and classifications for top soil

f) B.S. 3936 Nursery stock

g) B.S. 3998 Recommendations of treework

h) NOTE Preambles to precending trades where applicable shall apply equally to the work
contained herein.
20.2.0 GENERALLY

20.2.1 Standard specification

In case where no particular specification or standard is given for any article or material to be used in
the Contract, the relevant Specification of the British Standards institution or other relevant standard
shall apply unless otherwise stated.

20.2.2 Submission of samples

As soon as possible after the Contract has been awarded, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect
a list of the suppliers from whom he proposes to purchase the materials necessary for the execution
of the works. Each supplier must be willing to admit the Architect, or his representative to this
premises during ordinary working hours for the purpose of obtaining samples of the materials in
question. Alternatively, if desired by the Architect, the Contractor shall deliver the samples of
materials to be used as aggregates, shall be taken and tested in accordance with the provisions
of British Standard 812: Sampling and Testing of Mineral Aggregates, sands and Fillers. Subsequent
supplies shall conform, within the specified tolerances, to the quality of approved samples.

The information regarding the names of the suppliers may be submitted at different times, as may be
convenient, but no source of supply shall be changed without the Architect’s prior approval.

Samples of materials approved will be retained at the Architect’s office until the completion of the
Contract. Samples may tested to destruction.

All materials delivered to site must be at least equal in all respects to approved samples.

20.2.3 Manufacturer’s Certificates

The Contractor shall, whenever required obtain from the manufacturer and submit to the Architect,
certificates showing that tests of materials have been carried out in accordance with the requirements

EXTERNAL WORKS 131

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 of the relevant British Standards, or other approved Standards, or with the requirements of
this Specification.

No payment will be made in respect of any costs incurred by the Contractor or by the manufacturers
in connection with tests required by this clause or for supplying test certificates in respect thereof.

20.2.4 Rejected materials

Should any materials or articles manufactured on or off the site be, in the of the judgement
Architect, of inferior quality, or damaged in any way as to make it unsuited for the work, then such
materials or articles shall not be used on the works and shall be removed and replaced, all at the
Contractor’s expense and in each case as the Architect shall decide and direct.

20.2.5 Building stone

All building stone shall be capable of withstanding when wet a crushing stress of 1.4kg/sq.mm. The
source shall be approved by the Architect and stone supplied there shall be free from
magadi,overburden, mudstone, cracks sandholes, veins laminations or other imperfections. The
stone shall be chisel-dressed into true rectangular blocks, with each surface even and at right angles to
all adjoining surfaces, to the size specified. For exposed stonework the maximum permissible
variation of any of the specified dimensions shall be 6mm provided that cut stone, supplied as rock
face stone may be hammer dressed on one face only, or on the face and one end, if in other
respects it conforms with this specification. Stone shorter than 75mm will not be accepted.

Unless the Architect allows otherwise the Contractor shall at his own expense provide and dress for
100mm cubes of stone for testing.

The stone shall be sound when tested in accordance with B.S. 1438: madia for Biological percolating
filters, Appendix B, (sodium sulphate soundness test) except that:

a). The treatment shall be repeated for 10 cycles only ; and

b). The second criterion of failure shall be amended to allow for a loss of weight of not more
than 20% of its original weight.

20.2.6 Stone dust

Stone dust for blinding shall be blacktrap screened to the following grading:-

a). Passing 10mm sieve 100%

b) Passing No. 4 sieve 85% - 100%

c) Passing No. 100 sieve 5% - 25%

20.3.0SITE CLEARANCE AND EARTHWORKS

20.3.1 Levels to be agreed in advance

Prior to any site clearance, the Contractor shall satisfy himself that the existing ground levels as
indicated on the Drawings or schedules of longitudinal or cross section levels are correct. Should the
Contractor wish to dispute any levels he shall submit to the Architect a schedule of the position of the
levels considered to be in error and a set of revised levels. The existing ground relevant to the
disputed levels shall not be disturbed before the Architect ‘s decision as to the correct levels is given.
If the Contractor fails to take the requisite levels, the ground levels shown on the Drawings and
sections or as determined by the Architect shall be taken as correct.

20.3.2 Clearing
EXTERNAL WORKS 132

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Prior to commencement of any earthworks, the Contractor shall clear the area of the Site indicated
on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the Architect. He shall also, at times required or
approved by the Architect, clear the site over the area of stockpiles, road junctions, lines of ditches
or drains and such areas as the Architect may require.

All surface objects and all trees, hedges, scrub, undergrowth, stumps and tree roots,
not designated to remain, shall be cleared and/or grubbed.

Materials and debris which cannot be burnt shall be carted to tips provided by the Contractor or
otherwise disposed of to the satisfaction of the Architect.

20.3.3 Removal of topsoil, roots and grass

Topsoil, roots and grass shall be stripped in a separate operation from clearing.

Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, topsoil, roots and grass shall not be stripped over the full
area of the site, but only over the area affected by the earthworks.

20.3.4 Dust

The Contractor shall implement measures to control dust, by periodically spraying the works with
water.

The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against the growth on the site of weeds and shall
remove them as necessary throughout the period of works and maintenance.

20.3.5 Earthworks limits

The Contractor shall restrict his workings to the limits described in the Contract, unless otherwise
approved by the Architect.

20.3.6 Definitions

Fill-material : “Fill-material” shall mean material deposited in accordance

specifications from any of the classes specified in clause W.9 in order to build up an
earthworks construction to formation level as shown on the Drawings or as ordered
by the Architect.

Spoil-material : “Spoil-material” shall mean material deposited in accordance with these

specifications from any of the classes specified in clause W.9 and which, being
obtained from “cut” is unsuitable surplus to the requirements of the works.

Sub-grade : “Sub-grade” shall mean the upper layer(s) of material, either insitu or infill. Where
there is no improved sub-grade, the top of the sub-grade is at formation level.
When an improved sub-grade is placed, the top of the improved sub-grade is then
considered as the formation level. In this section, unless otherwise
specified, “sub-grade” shall mean the upper 300mm of earthworks (compacted
thickness), either in-situ or infill.

Improved : “Improved sub-grade” shall mean the layer(s) of selected infill

sub- grade material, the top of which is at formation level, placed where the natural in-situ or
fill-material is, in the opinion of the Architect,
unsuitable for the direct support of the pavement. The material for sub-grade shall
be obtained from borrow areas. The thickness of an improved sub-grade shall be
at least 150mm.

20.3.7 Classification of excavated material

EXTERNAL WORKS 133

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

Excavation will be paid for separately for the following three classes of material:-

a). Class 1 : Hard material (or rock) : This class shall

include all material which, in the opinion of the Architect, either:-

i) requires blasting for its removal or,

ii) requires the use of metal wedges and sledge hammers for its removal, or
iii) requires the use of compressed air drilling for its removal or,
iv) is such that, when worked with a tractor of at least 200kw (270 flywheel h.p.), fitted with a
rearmounted heavy-duty hydraulic single tune of 100mm maximum width, the tine penetrates to a depth less
than 75mm.

b). Individual boulder greater than 1C.M. in volume shall be included in this class when their nature and
size are such that, in the opinion of the Architect they cannot be removed without recourse to one of the
above methods.

c). Where a portion of excavation contains 50% or more by volume of boulders of this order, such
portion shall be considered as class 1 material throughout.

d) Class 11 :Medium-hard material (or rippable) : This class shall include all material such as
consolidated gravel, weathered or stratified rock, stones or boulders less than 1 C.M. in volume, which, in
the opinion of the Architect:-

i). Can be extracted without recourse to the methods

specified for class 1 material, but

ii). requires ripping for its removal, or

iii). in confined spaces, requires hand-excavation using

compressor tools for its removal.

e) Provided all reasonable steps have been take to the satisfaction

of the Architect, to facilitate the removal of the material by other
methods.

f) Class 111 : Normal Material : This class shall include all

material which does not require recourse to the methods for class 1 and 11 materials.

20.3.8 Excavation

Over excavation: Any excess excavation shall be made good at the Contractor’s own expense by backfilling
with approved “base” material, deposited and compacted as specified.

Where slopes in rock are excavated in excess the tolerance specified shall be reinstated in class 25 reinforced
concrete all suitably bolted to the rock face as directed by the Architect at the Contractor’s own expense.

Excavation below embarkments and below formation level: where any material below the natural ground
level under embarkments or below formation level in cuttings is required to be excavated, it shall be removed
to such depth and over such areas as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Architect. The resultant
excavation shall be backfilled with an approved material deposited and compacted as specified for the forming
of embarkments and sub-grade.

If, after the removal of material as specified in the above paragraph, the Contractor allows the material
exposed to reach a condition where compaction of back-filling is impracticable, he shall make good at his
own expense, either by additional excavation and backfilling or by other measures.

20.3.9 Stockpile areas

EXTERNAL WORKS 134

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

The Contractor shall obtain the approval of the Architect to the sitting of the stockpiling areas.

No material shall be stockpiled without the consent of the Architect. The Contractor shall give the Architect
at least 24 hours notice of his intention to stockpile. Stockpile areas shall be chosen and prepared and all
stockpile material shall be deposited in such a way as to facilitate subsequent measurement of stockpile
volume and in all instance shall be to the satisfaction of the Architect.

20.3.10Construction of embankments and fills

General : All embankments and fills shall be formed and completed to the correct lines, slopes, widths and
levels shown on the Drawings.

Where shown on the Drawings or directed by the Architect, shoulders and beam shall be constructed as part
of the earthworks operation and paid for as such.

Unless otherwise specified, where an embankment of less than 1m below formation level is to be made,
topsoil and all vegetable matter shall be removed from the surface upon which the embankment is to be
placed and the cleared surface shall be completely broken up by ploughing or scarifying to a minimum depth
of 150mm. This area shall then be compacted to a dry density of at least 95% MDD (Standard Compaction).

Unsuitable material: Embankments and fills shall be constructed only of material approved by the Architect,
obtained from the excavations of cuttings, ditches and borrow-areas.

Materials with high swelling characteristics or high organic matter content and any other undesirable material
shall not be used, unless specifically directed by the Architect. Unsuitable material shall include:-

a). All material containing more than 5% by weight, of organic

matter (such as topsoil, material from swamps, peat, loggs, stumps and
perishable material).
b) All material with a swell of more than 3% (such as black cotton
soil).
c) All clay of liquid limit exceeding 80 or plasticity index exceeding
50.
d) Materials having a moisture content greater than the maximum
permitted for such materials.

20.3.11 Rock-fill: “Rock-fill” shall consist predominantly of class 1 material of such size that the material
can be placed only in layers of compacted thickness exceeding 300mm.

Unless otherwise directed by the Architect, stones and boulders greater than 0.2 C.M. in volume (average size
: 600mm) shall not be used for the construction of embankments and fills.

Selection of materials for the upper layers : The Architect may direct the certain materials to be excluded
from the sub-grade (see clause W.15) or from the upper layers of fill. He may also direct that other materials
be set apart or obtained from borrow and used only for these layers. The Contractor shall then comply
with the Architect’s directions and shall allow in his rates for such selection of materials.

Rock-fill shall not be placed less than 600mm below formation level.

20.3.12 Laying of Compaction : Where material other rock-fill is used for the construction of
embankments and fills, it shall be placed in layers of compacted thickness not exceeding 300mm, unless
otherwise directed by the Architect. The layers shall be parallel to the top of sub-grade level and cross-
section.

Unless otherwise specified, the layers of fill material shall be compacted throughout to a dry density of at
least 95% MDD (Standard Compaction), except for the upper 300mm (sub-grade) which shall be compacted
to a dry density of at least 100% MDD (Standard Compaction).
EXTERNAL WORKS 135

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

The moisture contents of the material shall be adjusted so that the above minimum compactions are obtained.
Unless otherwise accepted by the Architect, the moisture contents at the time of compaction shall not exceed
105% of the optimum moisture content (Standard Compaction). Where water needs to be added, it shall be
applied in an even manner and the rate of application shall be such that no transverse or longitudinal flow
occurs.

Where rock is used a filling, the rock shall be placed in the bottom of the embankment or as directed by the
Architect. The largest portions of rock shall be placed in layers of maximum compacted thickness of 1m.
The interstices shall be filled with spalls and finer material approved by the Architect. The whole layer shall
be material approved method, until the interstices are completely filled and until the specified compaction is
obtained.

20.3.13 Drainage of works

All cuttings and embankments shall be kept free of standing water and drained during the whole of the
construction.

Should water accumulate on any part of the earthwork either during construction or after construction the
Contractor shall remove and replace at his own expense any material, which in the opinion of the Architect,
has been adversely affected.

The Contractor shall so order his construction programme that the construction of culverts and drains does
not lag behind the earthworks. Well in advance of commencing the earth-moving operations over swampy or
waterlogged areas, the Contractor shall cut drains and ditches and carry out any other works as necessary to
assist in draining the ground.

All drains and ditches shall be maintained in proper working order throughout the duration of the Contract.

The Contractor shall allow in his rates for draining the earthworks satisfactorily at all stages during the
construction and arrange his methods and order of working accordingly.

He shall provide within the site where necessary temporary water-courses, ditches drains, pumping or other
means of maintaining the earthworks free from standing water. Water discharged from the site shall not be
run into a road but be carried direct to an approved sewer, ditch or river through troughs, shutes or pipes.

Such provision shall include carrying out the work of forming the cuttings and embankments in such a
manner that their surfaces have at all times a sufficient minimum crossfall and, where practicable, a
sufficient longitudinal gradient to enable them to shed water and prevent ponding.

In pumping out excavations and in any lowering of the water table the Contractor shall pay due regard to the
stability of all structures.

20.3.14 Side ditches

Side ditches, considered as earthworks and measured and paid for as such, shall be shaped by excavating to
the lines, slope and widths shown upon the Drawings and finished off so that the sub-grade levels and
Camber or super-elevation of the of the sub-grade level and cross fall of the shoulders and slope and invert
levels of the side ditches are everywhere in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Architect.

20.3.15 Sub-grade and improved sub-grade

Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Architect, materials forming the direct support of the pavement
shall comply with the following requirements:-

a) CBR (100% BS - 4 days soak) : Minimum 5%

b) Swell (100% BS - 4 days soak) : Maximum 2%

EXTERNAL WORKS 136

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

c) Organic matter (percentage by weight : maximum 3%

Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, material unsuitable for the direct support of the pavement occurs in
cuttings, the Contractor shall excavate it to the depths and widths directed and replace it with selected fill
material to form an improved subgrade. The work will be paid for at the appropriate rates of “spoil” and
“fill” and no additional payment will be made.

20.3.16 Laying and compaction:

The maximum compacted thickness which shall be laid, processed and compacted at one time shall be
300mm.

The layer shall be clarified, water shall be uniformly mixed in or the material allowed to dry out to the correct
moisture content.

The upper 300mm of the earthworks (that is to the subgrade) shall be compacted to a dry density of at least
100% MDD (Standard Compaction) in cuttings where there is no improved subgrade and everywhere in fills
and embankments.

In cuttings where an improved subgrade is to be placed, the upper 150mm of the subgrade prior to the
placing of the improved subgrade layer(s), shall be compacted to at least 100% MDD (Standard
Compaction), unless otherwise specified.

All improved subgrade shall be compacted to a dry density at least 100% MDD (Standard Compaction) for its
full depth.

The moisture content shall be adjusted in order that the above minimum Compactions are obtained. Unless
otherwise accepted by the Engineer, the moisture content at the time of compaction shall not exceed 105%
of the optimum Moisture Content (BS).

Top of subgrade (including improved subgrade) : During the above process, the surface of each subgrade
layer shall be graded to level, parallel to the crossfall and camber and profile shown upon the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer and to the Tolerance specified.

The subgrade shall be cleaned of all foreign matter and way potholes, loose material ruts, corrugations,
depressions or other defects which have appeared in the subgrade layer, due to improper drainage, traffic or
any other cause, shall be corrected. If directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall scarify, grade and
recompact the subgrade to line, level and specification at his expense.

No work above the subgrade shall be executed until the subgrade has been inspection and approved by the
Engineer.

20.4.0 CONSTRUCTION OF SUB-BASE AND BASES

20.4.1 General

The term “gravel” used throughout this section shall be deemed to include; lateritic gravel, Quartizitic gravel,
some forms of weathered rock, soft stone, coral rag and conglomerate.

A “grade” base will be made up of one of these natural gravels, or of sand or clay sand, or of a combination
of these materials, without the addition of any stabilizing agent.

20.4.2 Material requirements

Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer, the material shall comply with the following
requirements:-

EXTERNAL WORKS 137

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

California bearing ratio:

a). The material for base shall have CBR of least 80.

b). The material for sub-base shall have a CBR of at least 30.

c)Unless otherwise specified, the CBR shall be measured at a dry density corresponding to 95% MDD (heavy
compaction) and after 4 days.

20.4.3 Requirements for gravel:

In addition to the CBR requirements, the gravel material shall comply with the following specification:-

Gravel for Base Sub-base

Plasticity Index - Maximum 15 25

Loss Angels value - Maximum 30 70
Aggregate Crushing value - Maximum 35 75

Grading:

The grading curve of the material, after processing compaction shall be a smooth curve within either of the
following envelopes, as applicable:-

Sieve Size Percentage by weight passing

(mm) Base Sub-grade

80 - 100
63 - 95 - 100
50 100 90 - 100
40 95 - 100 85 - 100
28 80 - 100 72 - 100
20 60 - 100 55 - 100
10 35 - 90 30 - 100
5 20 - 75 18 - 85
2 12 - 50 10 - 65
1 10 - 40 8 - 52
0.425 7 - 33 7 - 43
0.075 4 - 20 4 - 35

Clayey Sand:

In addition to the CBR requirement, the clayey sand for sub-base shall comply with the following
specification:-

Percentage passing 2mm Sieve: Maximum 95

Percentage passing 0.075 mm Sieve: Maximum 10 - Maximum 30

Uniformity coefficient: Minimum 5

Plasticity Index Minimum 5- Maximum 20

20.4.4 Setting Out Sub-base to line and level

EXTERNAL WORKS 138

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

The Contractor shall set out the road line and level at intervals of not more than 25 metres or such lesser
intervals on horizontal and vertical curves as the Engineer may require, and sufficient to ensure that the levels
of the sub-base are constructed within the specified tolerances and the minimum thickness ordered for the
course. Reference pegs shall be provided clear off the road and at right angles to it from which the centre-
line or level can be re-established at any time. These shall be maintained so long as they are needed by the
Engineer to check the work.

All setting out shall be agreed by the Engineer before any sub-clause or base course work is commenced.

20.4.5 Laying and compacting natural material sub-base and base

The sub-base and base material shall be deposited in such quantity and spread in a uniform layer across the
full width required, so that the final compacted thickness is nowhere less than shown upon the Drawings or
ordered by the Engineer.

The compacted thickness of any layer laid, processed and compacted at one time shall not exceed 200mm
and where a greater compacted thickness is required, the material shall be laid and processed in two or more
layers.

The material shall be broken down so that the maximum size of any particle is not greater than specified.
This may require a grid-cleator sheep-foot roller or a pulverizer and the Contractor shall allow for such
processing in his rates.

Any oversize material which cannot be broken down to the required size shall be removed and disposed of as
directed by the Engineer.

The layer shall then be scarified and water shall be uniformly mixed in, as directed by the Engineer. It shall
be graded, Compacted to a dry density of at least 95% MDD (Heavy Compacted) and graded to final level.

The moisture content shall be adjusted so that the above minimum Compaction is obtained. Unless otherwise
directed by the Engineer, the moisture content at the time of compaction shall be between 80 and 105% of
the optimum Moisture Content (Heavy Compaction).

20.4.6 Tolerances

The Sub-base and base shall be constructed within the tolerance specified.

20.4.7 Surface levels of flexible pavement course and concrete pavement

The level of any point on the surface of each of the pavement course of the carriageway, the true level as
specified, shall on completion of compaction, conform to that shown on the Drawings within the tolerances
stated in column 3 of the following table.

Compliance with the requirement shall be checked, in respect of the surface of each course, either by
levelling in relation to a survey Datum using pegs or pins, or if raised or flush kerbs or concrete marginal
haunches, concrete form, rails or bankettes have been laid, by use of a template or stretched line, using a
datum the top surface of the levelling device after the profile or level of the latter have been approved by the
Engineer.

All longitudinal profile devices shall be laid true to line and level each within a tolerance of +/- 3mm the
tolerance in level being measured over 8 metres. If this tolerance is exceeded the level and alignment shall be
corrected, if necessary, by lifting and relaying or resetting.

In case of the base course and wearing course of flexible surfacing, and the surface of concrete pavements,
the finished surface, in addition to conforming to the limits of tolerance from the true surface levels as
specified above, shall when tested with a 3 metre straight edge placed parallel to the center line of the road,
have no depression greater than the appropriate one stated in the following table:-

EXTERNAL WORKS 139

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

Measurements of level of tolerances shall be made while the material is still warm and rectification where
necessary, carried out immediately; otherwise the Engineer may require the whole area involved to be
removed to the full depth of the layer and reconstructed with fresh material.

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Tolerance from Maximum Depression tested
Surface true surface level with 3m straight edge placed
on the surface parallel to the center line of carriageway
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Sub-grade +0-50mm -
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

20.5.0 DRIVE WAYS AND PARKING AREAS

20.5.1 Excavations

Excavations to areas to receive bitumen macadam or other road or paved finish shall be carried out in a
manner ensuring that excavations plant and vehicles do not cause shear failure more than 250mm in the sub-
grade. Wheel loads and tyre pressures shall be limited and work shall be interruption to let the sub-grade dry
out as necessary to avoid such
sub-grade failure.

If shear failure more than 250mm deep occurs in the sub-grade, the soil affected shall be excavated and
replaced by soil filling as described.

If the soil develops a highly elastic conditions as excavation approaches formation level, excavations shall be
interrupted until the excess pore consequently disappears.

Before any further work is executed the formation level must be inspected and approved by the
Engineer.

20.5.2 Compaction

The sub-grade shall be compacted by a smooth-wheeled roller of 8 to 10 tonnes weight or vibrating roller of
minimum 1,300kg., or other approved plant. The number of coverages shall be at least 10 and there shall be
a 50% overlap of successive coverages. If so instructed by the Engineer, water shall be added during
compaction to obtain optimum water content. Filling shall be compacted as above but in maximum 200mm
deep layers.

20.5.3 Sub-grade surface finish

The surface of the sub-grade shall be finished to the levels, falls and crossfalls shown on the Drawings within
the following tolerances:-

i). The level shall not be above and not more than 50mm below the level shown on the Drawings.

ii). The falls shall be within 10% of the falls shown on the Drawings.

iii). The smoothness shall be such that departures from a 3 metre straight edge laid in any direction shall
not exceed 50mm and there shall be no ponding of water.

20.5.4 Coarse Aggregate

Coarse aggregate for the base shall be crushed stone or rock confirming to the following requirements:-

EXTERNAL WORKS 140

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

20.5.5 Sub-base

The material for use in the sub-base shall consist of crusher dust as described, or other approved material. It
shall be placed in one layer of such thickness that when compacted it shall attain the finished thickness shown
on the Drawings. The material shall be watered as necessary and compacted as described. The sub-base
material shall have a CBR value (unsoaked) for not less than 25.

20.5.6 Base

The material for use in the basecourse shall consist of one layer of course aggregate as described of which the
interstices are filled with fine material consisting either of crusher dust or a mixture of crusher fines. The
proportions of crusher dust and crusher fines in the fine material shall be such as to obtain the maximum
density of base course when compacted.

The procedure for construction shall be as follows: The course aggregate shall be placed in a layer of such
thickness so as to obtain the required thickness after compaction. It shall then be compacted lightly until the
Engineer is satisfied that a layer true to shape and level has been obtained. The fine material shall then be
spread over the layer by hand mechanical means. The application of fine material shall be made gradually in
successive layers not exceeding 25mm in thickness and each be worked into the voids in the coarse aggregate
before the application of the succeeding layer. The fine material shall be laid as described and brushed into
the course aggregate and rolled and consolidated by an approved vibrating roller feed to the bottom of the
layer.

Final compaction shall be by an 8-10 tonnes smooth-wheeled roller until there is no visible movement under
the action of the roller and until the required tolerances are achieved. Water may be applied during final
compaction subject to the Engineer’s approval.

Compaction shall in any case achieve 100% maximum dry density in accordance with B.S. 1377.

20.5.7 Quarry waste

Quarry waste shall mean material to the same specification as crusher dust, except as follows:-

i). The plasticity index taken on material passing the No. 36 sieve shall not exceed 16%.

ii). The material may have up to 35% of stones not larger than 38mm provided that the material
passing the 5mm sieve is within the limits specified.

Quarry waste shall be clean and completely free from earth, organic or other foreign matter.

20.5.8 Basecourse finish

The surface of the base course shall be finished to the levels, falls and crossfalls shown on the Drawings
subject to the following.

i). The level shall be within + or - 12mm of the levels shown on the Drawings.

ii). The falls shall be within 19% of the falls shown on the Drawings.

iii). The smoothness shall be such that departures from a 3 metre straight edge laid in any direction
shall not exceed 12mm..

The surface of the basecourse shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before bitumen paving is
commenced.

EXTERNAL WORKS 141

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

Immediately before applying the priming coat, the surface of the basecourse shall be brushed free from dust
and loose stones. The material for the priming coat shall be a cutback of M.C.O. grade or other approved.

Approximately 30 minutes before applying the priming coat the surface of the basecourse should be made
slightly damp by use of a water spray.

The priming coat shall be applied at a temperature of 100-150 degrees Fahrenheit at a rate of 0.60 litres per
square meter.

After application of the primer graded premix of 30mm to 40mm compacted thickness shall be used, with a
seal coat.

2.5.9 Bitumen macadam surfacing

A single course open graded premix of 30mm to 40mm compacted thickness shall be used, with a seal coat.

Course aggregate shall be crushed blacktrap with particles having a cubicle shape to the Engineer’s approval
and shall be washed free from dust.

The Coarse aggregate gradings shall be:-

Sieve Size Percentage passing

19 mm 100
13 mm 60 - 100
10 mm 45 - 70
6 mm 30 - 50
4 mm 25 - 40
8 mm 15 - 25
200 mm 2- 5

The binder shall be shellmac MC/RC2 or other approved. The percentage by weight of binder shall be 4.5%.
Mixing shall be in an approved mixer and mixing shall proceed until the stone is evenly coated with binder.
The temperature (at mixing) shall be within the following range:-
Aggregate Binder

Mixing Temperature 50o 95o F 125o - 150o F

The laying temperature shall be not less than 20o F below the mixing temperature.

The mix shall be spread evenly over the primed surface and shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling with a
minimum of 6 passes. A smooth-wheeled roller of not less than 5 tonnes weight and with rear wheel loading
of 0.25 kg per square millimeter width shall be used.

20.5.10 Rolling

Any longitudinal joints shall be rolled first, after which rolling shall start longitudinally at the side and proceed
towards the center of the carpet. Each pass of the roller shall overlap the preceding one by at least one half
width of the rear wheel. Alternate passes of the roller shall be of varying length. Immediately following initial
compaction, the surface shall be checked with a straight edge to ensure that it meets the surface finish
requirements. Minor variations shall be corrected by rolling, but major imperfections shall be compacted by
adding or taking away mix while it is still workable.

20.5.11 Surface finish

EXTERNAL WORKS 142

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

The surface of the bitumen macadam shall be finished to the levels, contours and slopes shown on the
Drawings with the following tolerances:-

i). The level shall be within + or - 6mm. of the level shown on the drawings.

ii). The gradient shall be within 10% of the gradient shown on the drawings.

iii). The smoothness shall be such that departures from a 3 metre straight edge laid in any direction shall
not exceed 6mm.

20.5.12 Seal coat

The seal coat shall consist of precoated fines consisting of crushed blackstrap stone graded from 3mm to dust,
or coarse sand. The binder shall consist of 4.5% by weight of MC/RC2. The seal coat shall be spread and
brushed into the macadam surface at the rate of 180 square metres per tonne and compacted by rolling as for
the macadam.

EXTERNAL WORKS 143

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

21.0 SOLAR INSTALLATIONS

SOLAR INSTALLATIONS 144

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 21.0 SOLAR INSTALLATIONS

21.1.0 EXTENT OF WORKS

The contract works shall comprise the supply to site, storage, replacement of breakage,
hoisting, cleaning, installations, connection, testing, commissioning and guarantee and
maintenance during defects liability period of the solar electrical installation services as
described in this specification and on contract drawings and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer and Architect.

21.2.0 MODULE SUPPORTING STRUCTURES

Each module supporting structure shall be made of pure aluminium parts.

All these aluminium parts shall be jointed to approval, and the structure shall be able to
withstand 25kg. weight or three times, the weight of the installed module, whichever is
heavier.

The module shall be supported at 15o angle to allow self cleansing.

The structure (module) shall be installed at any suitable position of the roof, determined
on site. The tenderer must allow for this flexibility

21.3.0 SOLAR MODULES

Each solar module shall be manufactured to give a minimum of 40 watts peak power, and
be capable of charging 12 volt 100AH battery through a charge controller.

Each module shall have sufficient means of providing shock resistance, and overheating
due to localised shading.

21.4.0 BATTERY AND CONTROL UNIT BOXES

Battery boxes and electronic control unit boxes shall be made from 20mm. thick camphor
wood, or the approved equivalent, with three layers of varnishing. Sufficient ventilation
shall be provided to approval.

The whole top part of the box shall be hinged and lockable with cover of the same wood
material.

Each internal dimension of each type of box shall be 100mm. longer than that of the
battery itself.

Boxes shall be supported by horizontal and parallel wall mounted steel bars provided by
the builder.

Each box shall have 4 No. semi-circular sandles at the bottom for this bar supporting.

Battery boxes shall be installed 100mm. away from control unit boxes.

Jointing and finishing of all boxes shall be done to approval.

21.5.0 BATTERIES

Every battery shall be 12 volt deep cycle maintenance free photo voltaic type lead acid,
capable of storing 100 Amp-hours and manufactured to the relevant British or Uganda
Standards. The battery shall be capable of being charged by a 40 watt peak power solar
module, and shall be completely maintenance free.
SOLAR INSTALLATIONS 145

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 21.6.0 CHARGE CONTROLLER

All charge controllers shall prevent any damage to the batteries. The controllers shall
consist of series relay battery charge regulator, with low voltage load disconnect, a load
fuse and status light indicator.

Each charge controller shall provide a minimum of the following functions;

a). Charge regulation;

b). Maximum module usage;
c). Current compensated low voltage load disconnect;
d). Load fuse;
e). Status lights;
f). Input noise suppression;
g). Reverse leakage protection;
h). Lightning protection;
i). Central wiring.

21.7.0 LIGHT FITTINGS

Ceiling suspended light fittings shall be installed, by means of chains supported by holes
in metal or timber purlins. It shall be the sub-contractor’s responsibility to drill these
holes. These shall be connected to a ceiling box by flexible cord. Each fitting shall have
its own home made lamp shade supplied by the client. The tenderer must allow in this
price for the fitting, collection, transportation and installation of the lamp shade.

21.8.0 INSTALLATIONS DETAILS

Modules, batteries and control units shall be interconnected by 10mm squared single
core copper cables installed in water proof terminated flexible 25mm steel conduits. All
conductor terminations shall be done by means of purpose made copper terminals of the
right size, to approval.

Flexible steel conduits shall be fixed on purlins and walls by means of stainless steel
sandles, spaced at 500mm intervals. Steel conduits shall hide all cables completely.

All sub-circuit wiring shall be done by means of 2.5mm squared single core copper
cables, installed in white P.V.C. (25 X 12)mm section mini-trunking along and through
the walls, and steel conduits along the purlins (i.e. for ceiling fittings only).

3 No. 15 Amp switches shall be installed (mounted) inside the control unit, for isolating
the load, battery and module respectively.

No two or more switches and no two or more lighting fittings shall share one 2.5mm
squared conductor, unless otherwise stated in the contract drawings.

The sub-contractor shall provide approved means of connecting all the load conductors
to their 15 Amp switch.

21.9.0 CONDUITS, CABLES AND SWITCHES

Conduits, cables, switches and any other part of the electrical installations, shall meet
the requirements given in general specifications (section 2 of this specifications).

21.10.0 RECORD DRAWINGS, MANUALS, INSTRUCTIONS AND TRAINING

SOLAR INSTALLATIONS 146

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The Sub-Contractor shall produce three accurate sets of drawings, detailing all the final
solar electrical installations and manuals for maintaining and using the modules,
batteries, charge controllers, lighting fittings and all other parts of the installations. He
shall also train two persons in the materials suppliers workshop. The training course shall
cover maintenance of all the provided solar installations. The tenderer must state the
training period.

SOLAR INSTALLATIONS 147

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

22.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 148

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND

WORKS ......................................................................................................................................................152
1.1 Regulations ......................................................................................................................................................... 152
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK ......................................................................................................................................... 152
1.3 POWER SUPPLY............................................................................................................................................. 152
1.3.1 Mains incoming supply ........................................................................................................................... 152
1.3.2 Standby Power Supply ............................................................................................................................. 152
1.3.3 Back-up Power System ............................................................................................................................ 153
1.3.4 Generator ................................................................................................................................................... 153
1.3.5 Performance .............................................................................................................................................. 153
1.3.6 Diesel Engine ............................................................................................................................................ 154
1.3.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................154
1.3.6.2 Exhaust ...........................................................................................................................................................154
1.3.6.3 Fuel System ....................................................................................................................................................154
1.3.6.4 Lubricating Oil...............................................................................................................................................154
1.3.6.5 Instrumentation .............................................................................................................................................154
1.3.3.6 Ancillary Equipment .....................................................................................................................................155
1.3.6.7 Governor ........................................................................................................................................................155
1.3.6.8 Starting ............................................................................................................................................................155
1.3.6.9 Cooling ............................................................................................................................................................155
1.3.6.10 Protection..................................................................................................................................................155
1.3.6.11 Noise Level ...............................................................................................................................................156
1.3.6.12 Auxiliary Power Requirements ..............................................................................................................156
1.3.7 Alternator................................................................................................................................................... 156
1.3.7.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................156
1.3.7.1 Rating ..............................................................................................................................................................156
1.3.7 Alternator A.C. Exciter ........................................................................................................................... 156
1.3.8 Automatic Voltage Regulator ................................................................................................................. 156
1.4.1 General ....................................................................................................................................................... 156
1.4.2 Function ..................................................................................................................................................... 157
1.4.3 Control and Logic Section ...................................................................................................................... 157
1.4.4 Protection Circuits ................................................................................................................................... 157
1.4.5 Switching Section ..................................................................................................................................... 157
1.4.6 Indicators ................................................................................................................................................... 157
1.4.7 Control Switching .................................................................................................................................... 158
1.4.8 Alarm .......................................................................................................................................................... 158
1.4.9 Main Detection Unit ................................................................................................................................ 158
1.4.10 Switchgear, Instrumentation and Controls .......................................................................................... 158
1.4.11 Terminations ............................................................................................................................................. 159
1.4.12 Earthing ..................................................................................................................................................... 159
1.4.13 Starting Battery and Charger .................................................................................................................. 159
1.4.14 Starting Battery and Charger Hours Counter ...................................................................................... 159
1.4.15 Automatic Change-Over Contactor Unit ............................................................................................ 159

1.5 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS160

1.5.1 Low Voltage Switchgear Standards ....................................................................................................... 160
1.5.2 General requirements for Switchboards .............................................................................................. 161
1.5.3 Bus-bars ..................................................................................................................................................... 162
1.5.4 Over and Under-voltage, Phase Failure and Phase Sequence Protection ...................................... 162
1.5.5 Surge Voltage Protection ........................................................................................................................ 162
1.5.6 Terminals ................................................................................................................................................... 163
1.5.7 Gland Plates .............................................................................................................................................. 163
1.5.8 Door and Desk Mounted Components ............................................................................................... 163

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 149

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.5.9 Access in Service ...................................................................................................................................... 164
1.5.10 Particular Requirements for Switchboards .......................................................................................... 164
1.5.11 MCCB ........................................................................................................................................................ 165
1.5.12 Distribution Boards ................................................................................................................................. 166
1.5.13 Rubber Mats .............................................................................................................................................. 166
1.6 PVC INSULATED ARMOURED CABLES ............................................................................................. 166
1.6.1 PVC Insulated Armoured Cables .......................................................................................................... 167
1.6.2 XLPE Insulated P.V.C. Sheathed Armoured Cables ......................................................................... 167
1.6.3 Installation ................................................................................................................................................. 167
1.7. LIGHTING FITTINGS ................................................................................................................................. 169
1.7.1 General ....................................................................................................................................................... 169
1.7.2 Lighting Fittings Sources ........................................................................................................................ 169
1.7.3 Lighting Levels.......................................................................................................................................... 169
1.7.4 Lighting Controls ..................................................................................................................................... 170
1.7.5 Site Lighting .............................................................................................................................................. 170
1.7.6 Emergency Lighting ................................................................................................................................. 170
1.8. WIRING ACCESSORIES .............................................................................................................................. 170
1.8.1 Non-metallic conduit (Conduits for Electrical Installations) ........................................................... 170
1.8.2 Final Sub-circuit wiring ........................................................................................................................... 171
1.9. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM ............................................................................................................ 172
1.9.1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................................... 172
1.9.2 APPROVED EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................ 172
1.9.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................... 172
1.9.4 SOFTWARE CONTROL ..................................................................................................................... 173
1.9.5 STORAGE OF SOFTWARE ............................................................................................................... 173
1.9.5.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................173
1.9.5.2 Operating Programmes ................................................................................................................................173
1.9.5.3 Configuration Data .......................................................................................................................................173
1.9.6 POLLING SYSTEM .............................................................................................................................. 173
1.9.6.1 .......................................................................................................................................................................................174
1.9.6.2 System Control ..............................................................................................................................................174
1.9.6.3 .......................................................................................................................................................................................174
1.9.6.4 Device Ide ......................................................................................................................................................174
1.9.6.5 Device Status .................................................................................................................................................174
1.9.6.6 Number of Devices in Alarm .....................................................................................................................174
1.9.7 SYSTEM FACILITIES .......................................................................................................................... 174
1.9.7.1 System Wiring ................................................................................................................................................174
1.9.7.2 Device Sensitivity ..........................................................................................................................................174
1.9.7.3 Calibration ......................................................................................................................................................174
1.9.7.4 Line Protection and Monitoring .................................................................................................................175
1.9.7.5 Processor Monitoring ...............................................................................................................................................175
1.9.7.6 Panel Capacity ............................................................................................................................................................175
1.9.7.7 Device Types ..............................................................................................................................................................175
1.9.7.8 Device Identification ................................................................................................................................................175
1.9.7.9 Device Status ..............................................................................................................................................................175
1.9.7.10 Maintenance Alarm Thresholds ...........................................................................................................................176
1.9.7.11 Alarm Decisions ......................................................................................................................................176
1.9.8 SIGNALLING AND ANNUNCIATION ........................................................................................ 176
1.9.8.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................176
1.9.8.2 Zoning .............................................................................................................................................................176
1.9.8.3 Panel Indicators .............................................................................................................................................176
1.9.8.4 Panel Display .................................................................................................................................................177
1.9.8.5 Panel Controls ...............................................................................................................................................177
1.9.8.6 Standard Outputs ..........................................................................................................................................177
1.9.8.6.1 COMMON FIRE ....................................................................................................................................177
1.9.8.6.2 COMMON FAULT ..............................................................................................................................................177
1.9.8.7 Printer ..........................................................................................................................................................................178
1.9.9 ALARM MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................... 178
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 150

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.9.9.1 Control Outputs ........................................................................................................................................................178
1.9.9.2 Addressable Line Relays...........................................................................................................................................178
1.9.9.3 Double-Knock (Coincidence) Operation .............................................................................................................179
1.9.9.4 Silencing Operation ..................................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.5 Activation Delay ........................................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.6 Software Control .......................................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.7 Data Outputs .............................................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.8 Colour Graphics ........................................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.9 Maintenance ...............................................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.10 Monitoring................................................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.11 Maintenance Printout .............................................................................................................................................179
1.9.9.12 Zoning/Type Printout ...........................................................................................................................................180
1.9.9.13 Zone Test Mode ......................................................................................................................................................180
1.9.9.14 Isolate ........................................................................................................................................................................180
1.9.10 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ................................................................................................................ 180
1.9.10.1 General ......................................................................................................................................................180
1.9.10.2 Control Unit Test ....................................................................................................................................180
1.9.10.3 Field Test ..................................................................................................................................................180
1.9.10.4 Acceptance Test .......................................................................................................................................181
1.9.11.1 Power Supply............................................................................................................................................181
1.9.11.2 Standby Battery........................................................................................................................................................181
1.9.11.3 Mains Supply ............................................................................................................................................................181
1.9.12 FIRE DETECTION ............................................................................................................................... 182
1.9.13 DETECTOR IDENTIFICATION ..................................................................................................... 182
1.9.13.1 Ion Chamber Smoke Detector .............................................................................................................................182
1.9.13.2 Heat Detector ..........................................................................................................................................................182
1.9.13.3 Duct Probe Units ....................................................................................................................................................182
1.9.13.4 Extended Indicators Light Units ..........................................................................................................................182
1.9.14 AUDIBLE ALARM UNITS ................................................................................................................. 182
1.9.14.1 Audible Alarm Silencing .........................................................................................................................183
1.9.15 MAGNETIC DOOR RELEASE SYSTEM ...................................................................................... 183
1.9.16 CONDUIT INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................. 183
1.9.16.1 Cabling .......................................................................................................................................................183
1.9.17 INITIAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS................................................. 183
1.9.17.1 Detection System ....................................................................................................................................................183
1.9.17.2 Wiring ........................................................................................................................................................................184
1.9.17.3 Battery Chargers ......................................................................................................................................184
1.9.17.4 Certificates and Approvals .....................................................................................................................184
1.9.21.1 Detection Circuit .....................................................................................................................................................185
1.9.21.2 Line Impendence and Capacitance ......................................................................................................................185
1.9.27.1 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION ....................................................................................................187
1.9.27.2 AMPLIFIERS .........................................................................................................................................187
1.9.27.3 MIXER/PRE-AMPLIFIER .................................................................................................................187
1.9.27.4 INPUT: .....................................................................................................................................................188
1.9.27.5 OUTPUT: .................................................................................................................................................188
1.9.27.6 TONE CONTROL ................................................................................................................................188
1.9.27.7 FIRE EVACUATION EMERGENCY PANEL ............................................................................188
1.9.27.8 MUSIC SOURCE ..................................................................................................................................188
1.9.27.8.1 AM/FM TUNER ....................................................................................................................................188
1.9.27.8.2 COMPACT DISC PLAYER ................................................................................................................188
1.9.27.10 LOUDSPEAKERS ................................................................................................................................188
1.10 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VOICE AND DATA, AND CABLING .......................... 188
1.10.2 Multimode Fibre Cabling ........................................................................................................................ 189

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 151

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

1 SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT
AND WORKS

1.1 Regulations

The Contract works must be carried out strictly in accordance with the following documents:-

i) BS 7671: 1992: Requirements for Electrical Installations or “The IET Wiring

Regulations” published by the Institution of Electrical Technologists, London (with local
amendments, where applicable).
ii) Local Uganda laws and by-laws and Supply and Local Authority requirements.
iii) Relevant British Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice, published by the British
Standards Institution (hereafter referred to as B.S. and C.P. respectively) as implemented
in Uganda.
iv) Uganda National Bureau of Standards relevant publications.
v) Any working drawings produced by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
vi) The Engineer’s instructions, drawings and details.

The Contractor shall undertake all modifications demanded by the authorities in order to comply
with the regulations, and produce all certificates, if any, from the authorities without extra charge.

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

The Electrical Installation comprises the following:

a. Securing HV Mains (UMEME) power supply connection

b. 11 kV Switchgear & 1No x 315 KVA, 11000/433/240V transformer
c. 415Volt, 630A MCCB type, Main Distribution Board (MDB) complete with Automatic
Mains Failure Unit, Power Factor Correction Units, Instrumentation and accessories.
d. 250 KVA Standby Generator set
e. All main and sub-main distribution cables
f. All power and lighting installation
g. All wiring accessories such as conduit/trunking light switches, socket outlets, telephone
outlets
h. All light fittings including emergency lighting and controls
i. Facade and compound lighting installation
j. All fire detection and alarm installation and voice evacuation system.
k. A complete system of lightning protection and system earthing
l. Voice and Data cabling and outlets
m. Earthing
n. Mechanical services field wiring
o. All main and sub-main distribution boards complete with all required switchgear
p. A Building Management System (BMS)
q. CCTV and access control cabling and equipment.

1.3 POWER SUPPLY

1.3.1 Mains incoming supply

Under this project, it is required to provide a dedicated transformer substation to serve the
building. This substation shall be complete with a transformer, and HV switchgear. The Low
Voltage Main Distribution Board (MDB) shall be located in the Main Power Room in the
Basement of the Building.

1.3.2 Standby Power Supply

The power supply system will have one standby generator set rated at 250 KVA, 415/240Volts.
In case of mains power failure, the generator set shall be capable of providing power supply to all
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 152

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 loads within the building. The generator shall be complete with Automatic Mains Failure (AMF)
and Automatic Transfer Switch (ATS) and own daily fuel tank. The generator shall be enclosed in
a weatherproof and soundproof canopy and will be placed on a pad at the back of the building.

The generator shall be configured to automatically start in the event of a power failure and shall
run continuously until the main electricity supply is restored. However, the changeover panel shall
have a provision for off, auto, test and manual provision for the generators.

The Generator and corresponding switchgear should automatically transfer from the normal
source to the generator source. All of the following systems shall be powered by the generator:

 All lighting and small power

 Emergency lighting
 Fire pumps
 Security systems
 Telephone system
 All computer facilities
 Fire alarm

1.3.3 Back-up Power System

In addition, the following items should have internal battery backup to avoid these systems from
shutting down during the transfer of power from normal feed to the generator feed:

 Fire Life Safety System

 Security Systems
 Emergency Lighting (Stairwells and Mechanical Rooms)

1.3.4 Generator

In particular the contractor shall supply and install 1No. Diesel Electric Generator Set rated at
315KVA 3 phase 415V/240V 50Hz prime power together with an auto-start system.

The generator set and auxiliary equipment shall be mounted on a durable skid under-base. The
under-base shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent distortion when the set is being hauled into position.
Hooks or other means for the safe attachment of lifting slings shall be installed on the under-base.
Oil resistant resilient mountings shall be provided between the under-base and the concrete
foundation. The under-base shall house the day tank of the generator.

The generator set shall comply with DIN 6281 “Generator Sets with Reciprocating Internal
Combustion Engines”, BS 649 and BS 5514.

1.3.5 Performance

(1) Design voltage shall be 415/240 V, 3 phase, 50 Hz supply, capable of sustaining a minimum
of 10% over load for one hour in any period of 12 hours consecutive running.

(2) The steady state voltage shall be maintained within +/- 2.5% of rated voltage at any load
between zero and 110% full load, unity to 0.8 power factor lagging, hot or cold. After any
change of load, the voltage shall not vary by more than +/- 10% of the rated voltage and
shall return to 3% in not more than 2 seconds.

(3) The frequency regulation of the set shall be such that when it is taking full load at rated
frequency and sudden removal of it, the frequency shall not rise above 110% of the
frequency and shall return to within 105% within 3 seconds. The resultant steady state
frequency shall not exceed 104%. If full load is then re-imposed, the frequency shall not fall

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 153

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 below 94% and shall return to 99% within 3 seconds and ultimately to the rated frequency.
The cyclic irregularity of the set at full load shall not be more than 1/150.

(4) The deviation of the wave-form of the line voltage output from a pure sine wave shall not
exceed the limits specified in VDE 0530, but in any case no single harmonic shall exceed
5%.

(5) Radio interference shall not exceed the units of BS 833 and CP 1006.

1.3.6 Diesel Engine

1.3.6.1 General

(1) The diesel engine shall be of the automatic priming, cold starting, multi cylinder,
compression ignition type. The engine shall operate on a four stroke cycle with direct fuel
injection and may be naturally aspirated or turbo-charged.

(2) The engine speed shall not be more than 1,500 rpm and a centrifugal speed switch shall be
incorporated to shut down the unit in case the speed exceeds 115% of this nominal design
figure.

A tachometer shall be fitted to provide a continuous indication of engine speed. Manual

speed adjustment shall be possible within +/-5% of the rated speed at any load.

(3) The set shall be provided with pressure lubrication from an integral gear driven pump,
through full flow filters with renewable elements. An oil cooler, strainer and relief valve
shall be fitted.

1.3.6.2 Exhaust

The exhaust shall be a complete system with residential type silencer, spark arrester and piping to take
exhaust gases through the generator house wall or roof. The piping shall include a flexible connection
of at least 300mm between the engine and the exhaust system. All supports and brackets shall be
included.

1.3.6.3 Fuel System

The base of the generator shall house an integral day tank of capacity enough for 12 hours. A
6000litre underground tank shall be provided together with an electric fuel pump complete with pipe
work and fittings to deliver fuel to the generator day tank.

1.3.6.4 Lubricating Oil

The Sub-Contractor shall allow for draining the lubricating oil system and refilling with a fresh supply
of oil after site testing and commissioning.

1.3.6.5 Instrumentation

The engine shall be provided with the following instrument to indicate the various speeds and
temperatures:

(a) Tachometer indicating engine speed.

(b) Instrumentation to indicate the temperature of the exhaust gases.

(c) Instrumentation to indicate the temperature of the lubricating oil.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 154

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 (d) Instrumentation to indicate the temperature of the cooling water.

1.3.3.6 Ancillary Equipment

The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive tool kit with the engine to enable all maintenance
functions to be carried out. This tool kit shall include, but not limited to the following:

(a) Set of open-ended spanners

(b) Set of ring spanners
(c) Set of box spanners with Tommy bar
(d) Circlip pliers (internal and external)
(e) Normal pliers
(f) Insulated crocodile pliers
(g) Set of insulated screw-drivers
(h) Hammer
(i) Valve spring compression tool
(j) Piston band assembling set
(k) Set of feeler gauges
(l) Valve grinding tool
(m) Cleaning outfit for injector nozzle.

1.3.6.7 Governor

The Governor shall be of the centrifugal type operating direct on the fuel line and shall be capable of
maintaining the speed constant within 3% of nominal output in accordance with BS 649.1958 class
A2.

1.3.6.8 Starting

The engine shall be equipped with an electric starting system which shall include 24-volt lead acid
battery of adequate capacity for cranking the engine at firing speed for at least 30 seconds under the
climatic conditions specified.

The battery shall have adequate capacity to permit up to 10 start-ups in one hour when dully charged.

A suitable engine driver battery charger shall be provided with provision for “higher charger” or
“trickle charger” charging rates. The starter battery charger may form part of the general control
panel.

1.3.6.9 Cooling

The engine shall be provided with a radiator for the cooling water and lubricating at requirements of
the engine when operating under the site conditions stated. This shall be complete with an engine
driven fan and drive, a guard for fan and drive, belt tensioner and all integral oil and water piping
connections.

Circulation of both lubricating oil and primary water shall be catered for by means of geared or belt
driven pumps, integral with the engine.
A thermostatic by-pass shall be fitted in the water outlet from the engine to give a quick warm-up and
even temperature control over the load range.

1.3.6.10 Protection

The engine shall be provided with the following protection devices of providing audible and visible
alarm signals at one or more remote locations:

(a) Low Lubricating oil pressure

(b) High lubricating oil temperature
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 155

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 (c) High cooling water temperature
(d) High engine speed

1.3.6.11 Noise Level

The Tenderer shall state the level of noise in decibels expected.

1.3.6.12 Auxiliary Power Requirements

In selecting the size of the diesel engine, the Contractor shall make suitable allowances for power
requirements for the cooling system, the lubricating system and any other requirements that may be
necessary for the set.

1.3.7 Alternator

1.3.7.1 General

The alternator shall be of the brushless, self exciting and self regulating type. Voltage regulation shall
be maintained within limits of 2.5% from no load to full load including compensation for cold to hot
variations and any power factor from unity to 0.8 lagging. The Tenderer shall indicate standard
features in the design of the alternator and optional equipment which may be provided to enhance the
performance of the alternator if this is considered necessary at a later stage.

The construction of the alternator shall be of the screen-protected drip-proof type complete with
amply dimensioned terminal box suitable for cable entry.

1.3.7.1 Rating

The machine shall be continuously rated in accordance with BS 2613 at the rating specified in the
Specification and with an overload capacity of 10% for one hour in any 12 hours of continuous
running.

1.3.7 Alternator A.C. Exciter

An A. C. exciter of direct-coupled flange mounted type shall be supplied. The Exciter frame shall be
of modular iron and shall serve additionally as the bearing. The exciter armature shall be mounted on
aluminium casting, from the main room.

1.3.8 Automatic Voltage Regulator

A thyristor type static automatic voltage regulator shall be built into the machine. This regulator shall
incorporate a Zener diode bridge reference voltage circuit thyristor drive reactor with service silicon
diode and a further commutating diode.

Under steady state conditions, the automatic voltage regulator shall maintain the generator output
voltage within +-2.5% for all balanced loads between unity and 0.8 lagging. The automatic voltage
regulator shall be complete with hand-operated manual control potentiometer with shall be fitted in
the control panel.

1.4 CONTROL CUBICLE

1.4.1 General

The control cubicle shall be integral with the unit and shall consist of, a hinged instrument panel,
front hinged access doors with lockable handle, an un-drilled gland plate for top entry cables, and
shall be finished in stove enamelled grey hammer paint.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 156

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.4.2 Function

The control cubicle shall house the auto start/stop and protection system shall be complete with all
the necessary relays and circuitry to the specified requirements.

1.4.3 Control and Logic Section

Facilities shall be available with suitable fuse protection for the following functions:

(a) Automatic start, remote and local manual

(b) Automatic stop, remote and local manual
(c) Failed to start – an adjustable delay giving engine lock-out until manually reset.
(d) Stall lock-out, i.e. a lock-out to prevent re-cranking of any engine upon fuel failure or stall
condition.
(e) Energization of the governor run/stop solenoid.

1.4.4 Protection Circuits

Suitable fused protection circuits, for oil, water, speed and one spare, shall be allowed for. The first stage
protection shall be by means of failsafe circuits while the second stage shall be
energized on that halt circuits. All circuits except over-speed shall be
commissioned after a delay following engine start-up.

The circuits for:

(a) Lubricating oil pressure

(b) Water temperature
(c) Spare

Shall be either alarm or shut-down. The latter shall be achieved by means of a link within the control
panel.

The circuit for the engine over speed shall give simultaneous alarm and shut-down.

When the engine has a fault condition, the protection circuits shall still accept further faults. Once
shut-down signal has been given, the protection circuits shall be locked out so as:

(a) Not to give further fault indicating as engine stops.

(b) To give indication of fault condition even when the engine has stopped.

The fault condition shall be reset by pushing the “Reset” button.

One audible alarm mute shall be provided for each fault channel. This shall mute the alarm for the
fault causing the alarm, but shall reset the system to accept subsequent alarms.

1.4.5 Switching Section

A suitable fused switching section for engine functions as per list below shall be provided:

(a) Fuel rack solenoid (start or stop)

(b) Starter motor solenoid via a repeater (Electrical start)
(c) Air start solenoid (air start)

1.4.6 Indicators

Indicator lamps as per list below shall be provided:

(a) Failed to start-Red

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 157

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 (b) Panel on – White
(c) Engine running and protection circuit commissioned – Green
(d) Fault Parameters – All Red

The indication circuits shall have a lamp test push button by means of which the lamp filament can be
tested.

The Contractor shall allow spare terminals for each set of indicators.

1.4.7 Control Switching

A rotary switch with off/local/remote/auto position to switch the control circuit supplies and to
select manual or automatic operation shall be provided. In the manual position the Engine shall be
started by depressing a “stop” push button. In both cases changeover of the supplies shall occur,
unless inhibited by a test key switch on the main failure section.

The indicators, switches and push-buttons shall be mounted on the front of the chassis unit.

1.4.8 Alarm

The Contractor shall supply and install a bell which is loud enough to be heard even when the engine
is running. The supply for this bell shall be obtained from the control cubicle through suitable rated
fuses.

1.4.9 Main Detection Unit

A mains detection unit which can register a mains voltage failure under the following conditions shall
be provided:

(a) Failure to any one or more phase.

(b) Incorrect phase sequence.
(c) Low voltage on any individual or all phases- i.e. below 85% or normal voltage.
(d) Excessive frequency change, i.e. +-3Hz.

The failure condition shall be used to produce a start signal for the standby engine after a delay. The
delay shall be adjustable and shall ensure the failure is not a transient condition.

Mains detection units shall receive their sensing supply from bus bars feeding the load.

1.4.10 Switchgear, Instrumentation and Controls

The following equipments shall be provided by the Contractor:

(a) Moulded case air circuits breaker, triple pole and neutral with magnetic release to provide
alternator short circuit protection, trip free handle and shunt strip.
(b) One bolted neutral link.
(c) Alternator voltage trimmer regulator.
(d) 3 No (one per phase) flush mounting ammeter, OR 1 No. ammeter and 1 No. rotary selector
switch.
(e) 1 No. flush mounting voltmeter.
(f) 1 No. voltmeter rotary selector switch.
(g) One set of control circuit instruments and the accompanying fuses.
(h) All internal wiring, terminals, cable lugs, legends and one main earthing bar.
(i) 1 No. frequency meter vibrating leaf type.
(j) 1 No. governor motor raise and lower switch.
(k) Cable boxes and glands to suit.
(l) 1 No. kilowatt-hour meter.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 158

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.4.11 Terminations

All internal wiring termination shall be mounted and marked with ferules.

1.4.12 Earthing

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the earthing of the generator neutral is
carried out efficiently and that the resistance of the generator neutral from the earth does not exceed
one ohm.

The Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of a set of earth electrodes. The
Electrodes shall comprise 4 earth rods, installed in pairs, each pair connected together and to the earth
bus-bar by an insulated stranded conductor. The earth rods shall be 1.2m long by 20mm diameter
extensible type as “copper-weld” or other equal and approved. Each pair of electrodes shall be
located not less than 3m apart, the first pair being not less than 3m from the building. The head of
the earth rods shall be driven to 300mm below the surface of the ground and enclosed in concrete
box with a concrete inspection.

The Contractor shall ensure that the earthing of the permanent earth system of the normal (mains)
supply shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate section of the IEE Regulation.

1.4.13 Starting Battery and Charger

(a) The battery shall be either 12 or 24 volts and capable of withstanding the loads imposed
upon it by its specified duties. It may be of lead-acid or alkaline type and shall be of
sufficient capacity for four starts in succession once in an eight-hour period. Auxiliary
circuits connected to the battery shall be protected by fuses.

The battery shall be used to supply any automatic starting and control equipment, and relay
operation shall not be impaired when the battery is supplying current to the starter motor.

(b) A single phase supply for battery charging shall be available form the set when it is in
service.

(c) A charger shall be provided which will recharge the battery after engine starting and maintain
it in a charged condition when the set is standing or is in service. It shall also supply the load
of any automatic starting and control equipment, and an additional load up to 24 watts when
the set is running and in service. An alternative quick charge rate shall be provided. The
charge and discharge current excluding the starter motor current.

1.4.14 Starting Battery and Charger Hours Counter

The sub-Contractor shall allow for the installation of an hour’s counter on the control panel of the
generator.

1.4.15 Automatic Change-Over Contactor Unit

This shall be a free standing panel housed in the power room and will receive the power cables and
control cables from the generator and the power cables from the UMEME (Utility Company) Supply
Transformer. This unit shall be supplied together with the standby generator.

(a) A Contactor unit shall be provided which when the Utility Supply voltage falls below a set
minimum will automatically initiate the starting of the stand-by generator to charge to take
the load. The unit shall contain power contactors and ancillary apparatus as required.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 159

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 (b) The minimum Utility Voltage shall be pre-settable to -/+15% of the nominal supply voltage
(220Volts).

(c) When the standby supply is in and the Utility Voltage is restored and remains within -/+5%
of the nominal supply voltage for a pre-set time (adjustable to 30 seconds) the standby
generator shall be shut down.

(d) Provision should be made so that automatic return to the Utility supply can be prevented if
required.

(e) Once a start signal has been sent to the standby generating set, the engine starting sequence
shall be allowed to continue until the set is ready to take the load before a stopping signal is
sent or accepted.

(f) Each switch shall be labelled with its duty, and position shall be marked. The following
switches shall be fitted.

(i) Contactor Control Switch, with make before-break contacts and “Hand” and
“Auto” position. In the “Hand” position, the unit shall be controlled by the
“Contactor Hand Control Switch”. In the “Auto” position, the unit shall operate
automatically irrespective of the position of the “Contactor Hand Control Switch

(ii) A Contactor Hand Control Switch, with “standby” and “UMEME” position.

(i) An Auto Return Switch, having “On” and “Off” positions. In the “On” position
the return to UMEME supply shall be automatic when the Utility voltage returns
and remains within a preset range for a preset period of time.

(ii) Contactor By-pass switches; these shall be provided to enable the load to be served
direct from the Utility supply to enable the generator and/or the control equipment
to be serviced. The by-pass switch shall be provided with a suitable and
conspicuous label warning against leaving the generator in the disconnected
position.

(g) Indicating lamps shall be provided. They shall be appropriately labelled easily visible and
shall give the following information:

(i) UMEME supply available

(ii) Standby Generator supply available

(iii) UMEME supply in use

(iv) Standby Generator supply in use.

(h) A push-button labelled “Test” shall be provided to enable a failure of UMEME supply to be
simulated. If the button is pressed and released the equipment shall complete the starting
sequence and when the set is ready to take the load it shall be shut down. If the button is
held depressed the equipment shall change over to the standby supply when the set is ready
to take the load.

The control circuit supply shall be 12 volts D.C No current shall be drawn from the control supply
when the unit is accepting the normal power supply

1.5 LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARDS, DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND CONSUMER UNITS

1.5.1 Low Voltage Switchgear Standards

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 160

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The transformers and/or generator shall supply 415/240 Volt low voltage supplies to the low voltage
switchgear.

All switchboards shall have a minimum fault capacity of 50kA for one second.

The switchboards for the control of equipment rated 415 Volts shall comply in all respects with BS
5486 (IEC 439), BS 5227, BS 7354, BS 88, BS 5424, and BS 7340.

1.5.2 General requirements for Switchboards

The main low voltage switchboards shall be of modular cubicle pattern, extensible from both ends, of
folded sheet steel construction, and floor standing with operation and switch access from the front
and cabling access from the top or bottom. The switchboards shall have fully compartmentalised
interior sections with with-drawable switchgear and control gear assemblies, with the design based on
IEC 439-1 and related international standards. The Main Switchboards shall be designed for
conductor entry from bottom for the incomers and top entry for outgoing cables.

All switchgear, distribution boards, motor control centres, and other panels shall comprise factory
built assemblies of the multi-cubicle type. Each air circuit breaker, fuse switch, busbar,
instrumentation and protective relaying section indicated on the drawing shall be housed in a separate
compartment with an individual cover, fully divided from adjacent compartments by the sheet metal
housing; circuit interconnection, etc, penetrations shall be of fully shrouded type. The bus-bars shall
be coloured according to phase. All equipment shall have fully shrouded fixed contacts and
connection terminals, such that contact with adjacent live metal is impossible when working on
individual units. All sections of the board shall be suitable for safe, effective working, for
maintenance, cable removal and installation, etc., with the switchboard live and without shutting down
adjacent sections.

Panels shall be free standing, of uniform height, flush mounted and totally enclosed to not less than
IP 31. When size of starters and other components does not justify this type of construction, wall
mounted patterns may be used.

The base of the panel shall be effectively sealed against the ingress of vermin and termites, and all
equipment shall be rated for continuous operation in a tropical climate.

Any ventilation louvres shall be backed by brass fine mesh gauze to exclude termites.

Framework for the panels shall be of welded construction, and panels shall be fabricated from mild
steel sheet of 2mm minimum thickness, folded and braced where necessary to provide a rigid
structure.

All bolts, nuts, screws, hinges, handles, etc., shall be corrosion resistant.

Interiors shall be finished white, and the exterior shall be finished to a light grey shade except the
plinth, which shall be black.

Cabling access shall be from the rear by means of gasketed bolt-on plates, which shall be fitted with
handles to facilitate removal/replacement.

Access to the cubicles or cubicle compartments for all normal routine maintenance shall be from
front with hinged and lockable doors fitted with neoprene gaskets (all gaskets shall be termite
resistant) and chromium plated lockable tee type handles. All doors shall be eclectically bonded to the
main frame, using adequate flexible conductors, protected against mechanical damage. All locks on a
given panel unit shall be operated by the same key.

Each multi-compartment control panel shall comprise an assembly of individually constructed

cubicles. These shall be assembled to include a metallic sheet between adjacent cubicles.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 161

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 In each multi-compartment panel at least one empty compartment shall be provided for future use.
In single unit panels, enough space shall be available for the addition of at 10% more components for
future use.

Panels shall be readily capable of extension at either end, within the bus-bar rating.

Where panel size is excessive, easily handled sections shall be supplied for site assembly. Sections
shall be fitted with eyebolts, which after positioning of the panel, shall be removed and replaced with
plated bolts and washers.

Bases shall be of rigid construction capable of withstanding stresses during placement, such as those
imposed by moving the sections on rollers.

1.5.3 Bus-bars

All bus bars shall be of electro-tinned HDHC copper, and shall be of uniform section throughout the
length of the panel.

They shall be run in a separate screened compartment, divided with barriers into as many
compartments as there are cubicles in the panel. Access to individual compartments shall be via bolt-
on cover plates each bearing the legend white on a red background: -

“DANGER – LIVE BUS BARS”, also the Red Arrow symbol denoting danger from electric shock

The neutral bus-bar shall be equal to the cross-sectional area of the phase bars, Phase bars shall, be
colour coded Red, Yellow and Blue: the neutral shall be black.

1.5.4 Over and Under-voltage, Phase Failure and Phase Sequence Protection

The main incoming 415-volt switchboards and control panels shall be equipped with a relay, which
detects un-acceptably high or low voltage.

It will monitor all phases and will cause all incoming circuit breaker(s) to trip when the voltage
exceeds a maximum or minimum (which shall be selected from a range of settings). Visual indication
shall be given of the cause of tripping and an electrical hours counter will record the time during
which the supply exceeds the set limits.

Resetting of the relay shall be automatic but re-closure of the tripped circuit breaker shall be manual.

It shall be possible to delay the operation of the relay in order to ride through transient voltage
variations.

Phase failure shall cause the circuit breaker to trip immediately and incorrect phase sequence will
prevent the circuit breaker from being closed.

The Lovato Electronic Voltmeter Relay type RVT manufactured by the Officine Electromechanical
Lovato of Italy meets the requirements for this application. Alternatives may be offered for the
approval of the Engineer.

1.5.5 Surge Voltage Protection

In order to give protection against transient over-voltages or voltage surges such as result from
lightning strike, surge arresters shall be installed on the 415-volt bus bar of the main LV panel.

They shall be connected permanently between each phase and earth and shall be as near as possible to
the incoming circuit breakers.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 162

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Each unit shall be sealed and encapsulated with connecting tails and be suitable for continuous
operation at 415 volts. It shall also comply with the class 2.5KA requirements according to IEC 99.

All solid-state control or electronic device, which may be located within the panel, shall be individually
protected by surge arresters.

1.5.6 Terminals

Terminals board insulation shall be polyamide or equivalent. Melamine types are not acceptable.

All connectors shall be of brass or bronze, with screw of similar material. Contact between dissimilar
metals is not acceptable. No steel screws, plated or otherwise shall be used. Insulating barriers shall
be fitted between supplies at different voltages.

All terminal screws shall be captive.

Terminals shall be mounted at least 250mm above their associated gland plates.

Only one conductor shall be connected to each terminal. Multiple connections shall be effected using
links.

Main power terminals shall be stud and nut types, with plain and locking washers. Conductors
terminating on these shall be fitted with insulated crimped lugs. Rail mounted terminals for cables in
excess of 32mm sq. cross sectional area is not acceptable.

1.5.7 Gland Plates

Adequately sized blank gland plates shall be provided below each outgoing terminal section to
accommodate the requisite glands.

Gland plates shall be positioned 200mm minimum above the base of each cubicle, and shall be solidly
bonded to earth.

Suitably sized compression type cable glands shall be provided for all cables. Glands used for
armoured cables shall include provision for sealing the armour wires to protect them from corrosion
and to prevent ingress of moisture into the cable.

Brass lugs shall be provided for connection of the cable armouring to earth.

1.5.8 Door and Desk Mounted Components

All indicating instruments shall be moving iron type with quadrant scale of minimum length 75mm
and conform to IEC 51. Their accuracy shall be to Class 2.5 or better.

Main switchboards and control panels shall be equipped with voltmeter and ammeter selection
switches.

All instruments and protective relays shall be flush mounted and effectively sealed against ingress of
moisture, dust insects.

Where connected in motor circuits, ammeters shall have ‘overload’ scales capable of withstanding
starting inrush current.

Hours run counters shall be flush mounted cyclometers type, scale 99,999.9 hours.

Control and selector switches shall have their positions clearly labelled, and additionally shall each
have a separate label to indicate the switch function. Labels shall correspond with the associated
schematic diagrams.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 163

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Interlocks of a substantial mechanical type shall be provided on each cubicle between door and the
circuit breaker or fuse switch such that the door cannot be opened unless the circuit breakers or fuse
switch is in the OFF position. On/Off switches and circuit breakers shall be padlockable in the
“OFF position.

Push buttons and indication lamps shall be selected from a matching range and they shall be colour
coded in compliance with IEC 73 as follows: -

Indicating lamps Colour

On White
Off Green
Fault Red
Alarm Yellow
Heaters Blue

Push Buttons Colour

Start Green
Stop Red
Alarm accept Black
Emergency stop Red
Heaters Blue

Each indicating lamp shall incorporate a push-test feature. Alternatively a test push button shall be
provided which activates all lamps simultaneously via a contactor. Lamp fittings shall be capable of
re-lamping from the front of the panel, and shall be positively locked against rotation.

Fault indicating lamps shall remain on until the associated trip relay is reset or the fault is corrected.
Should there be an interruption to the electricity supply, the fault indicating lamps will again be
illuminated on reconnection of the supply, until the fault is cleared or the trip relay is reset.

All exposed terminals on the rear of door-mounted components shall be shrouded to prevent
accidental contact when the panel doors are open.

1.5.9 Access in Service

Access in service shall provide accessibility for inspection, maintenance, and similar operations, with
the following being performed when the assembly is in service: -

a) Visual inspection (all parts)

b) Adjusting relays etc
c) Replacing fuse links
d) Replacing indicator lamps
e) Fault location
f) Testing

1.5.10 Particular Requirements for Switchboards

The switchgear, control equipment and all relevant electrical circuits shall be contained in single, multi
section, floor mounted panels. They shall comply with the General Requirements for switchboards,
as per the General Specifications. This section should be read in conjunction with the drawings.

Main low voltage switchboard (MDB)

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 164

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 This panel shall be supplied at 415Volts, 3 phases from the 315kVA, 11kV/433V transformer, and
300kVA, 415-volt standby generator, via incoming circuit breakers. It shall perform the following
functions:

a) Serve as distribution centre for feeders to the Low Voltage distribution boards in
the Building.

In addition to whatever chambers are incorporated for cable termination or cable marshalling, the
following shall be included:

(i) Main UMEME supply section:

630A 16 way TPN MCCB free-standing Distribution Board, with 630A TPN incomer/main switch
MCCB, complete with 2Nox200A, 7Nox100A, 6Nox63A,TPN MCCBs, Digital Universal meter
(Voltage, current, KW, KWHr, KVA, KVAr, Hz), with Over-voltage/under-voltage and phase failure
protection and surge protection, and all accessories as HAUSMANN or equal approved (MDB1).

These shall comprise one compartment which shall house the 630A TPN MCCB complete with
adjustable magnetic over current protection. They shall accept the 415 V supply from the
transformer/Feeder Pillar.

A set of current transformers (CTs’) shall be housed within the compartment for current
measurement purposes. On the front panel shall be mounted:

A Digital Universal meter to measure: Voltage (phase to phase and phase to line), phase currents,
KW, KWHr, KVA, KVAr, Hz.

The compartment shall be labelled ‘Mains Supply’

(ii) All other compartments shall be labelled accordingly

Automatic Change-Over Switch Panel

This shall be a free standing panel housed in the power room and will receive the power cables and
control cables from the generator and the power cables from the UMEME (Utility Company) Supply
Transformer and shall as a minimum contain the following:

 630A TPN MCCB for the Standby Generator Supply

 630A TPN MCCB for the UMEME Supply
 630A TPN Change-over contactors with appropriate interlocks
 630A TPN MCCB outgoing Circuit Breaker
 Monitoring and control circuits and appropriate power supply
 Voltmeters and selector switches
 Ammeters and associates CTs
 All accessories and components required for proper operation.

1.5.11 MCCB

Each circuit breaker shall comply with BSEN 60947 and be of the triple pole hinged single air break,
controlled arc type with separate butt type main, and horn type arcing contacts in magnetic blow out
splitter, plate arcing, chutes, designed to reduce contact burning to the minimum and facilitating
contact inspection and replacement.

All circuit breakers shall be ASTA certified for minimum breaking capacity of 50kA and a making
capacity of 105 kA.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 165

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.5.12 Distribution Boards

General lighting and power distribution boards shall comply with BS 3817, BS 5861 and BS 5486 and
shall be of the metalclad pattern, flush mounted except where otherwise specified on the drawings or
Bills of Quantities.

a) Construction

Enclosures shall be substantially constructed from 16SWG minimum thickness sheet having
hinged front cover and shall be vermin and insect proof. Each unit shall house MCBs and
shall be supplied complete with bus bars, earthing terminal, neutral bar, circuit chart and any
blanking plate for any spare ways. The incoming isolator switch shall be integral with the
distribution board or as may specifically be requested for. The distribution boards shall be
lockable by key.

b) Mounting

All distribution boards and consumer units shall, unless detailed to the contrary, be mounted
with the lower edge 1800 mm from the finished floor level.

Not withstanding the above, generally, switchboards and distribution boards shall be
installed so that any item to which easy access is required such as fuse, circuit breaker,
instrument, etc is not more than 2150 mm above finish floor level.

Isolators, switch fuses (other than those mounted on bus-bar chambers or providing local
control), cooker control units, water heater controls, etc, shall on the other hand, unless
otherwise stated on the drawings, be mounted at 1350mm from the finished floor level to
the underside of the fittings.

c) Miniature circuit Breaker

All distribution boards shall be supplied with MCBs manufactured to BS 3871 and of a
rating as specified on the drawings. The circuit breakers shall incorporate both terminal
overload and magnetic short circuit tripping, with a trip-free mechanism.

Three phase circuits shall be controlled by integrally manufactured three pole breakers, with
one common operating lever. An inter-tripping mechanism shall ensure isolation of all three
poles in the event of an overload or short circuit on any one phase.

1.5.13 Rubber Mats

A full-length 6 mm thick mat shall be positioned directly in front of the Main Switchboard and that
mat shall be 1.5 metres wide.

1.6 PVC INSULATED ARMOURED CABLES

All cables shall be BASEC approved. P.V.C. insulated cables shall be 500V/1000V grade to B.S. 6004.
Flexible cables shall be 300V/500V grade to B.S. 6500.

No cables forming sub-circuits connected to different sub-distribution boards are to be drawn into
the same conduit or draw- in box.

No reduction of the strands forming the conductors will be allowed at switch or other terminals, but
all strands shall be efficiently secured by screws, nuts and washers or other approved means.

Cable may be jointed together at the terminals of ceiling roses and other accessories. Under no
circumstances will joints be permitted in the run of the cable.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 166

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All cables shall be of stranded copper conductors.

The minimum size of cables on lighting and power final sub-circuits shall be 1.5mm sq. for lighting
and 2.5mm sq. for power.

1.6.1 PVC Insulated Armoured Cables

These shall be 500/1000V grade to BS 6346 and BS 6004 having stranded copper conductors,
armoured and PVC sheathed overall. The cores of four core cables shall be distinctively coloured red,
yellow, blue and black.

1.6.2 XLPE Insulated P.V.C. Sheathed Armoured Cables

XLPE insulated P.V.C. bedded galvanized steel wire armoured and P.V.C. overall sheathed twin and
multi-core cables shall have stranded copper conductors, and shall be 600/1000V grade manufactured
in accordance with B.S. 5467. This type of cable shall generally be treated in a manner similar to that
for P.V.C. insulated and sheathed cables.

The Contractor shall provide suitable glands and accessories for all armoured cable terminations and
the cost of these items shall be included within the rates inserted in the Bills of Quantities.

1.6.3 Installation

a) Laying of Cables

The work of excavating and back-filling of all trenches for cables is included in this contract and the
responsibility for positioning, width and depth of trenches, laying and bedding of all cables and
protective covers in included with the Electrical Works covered by this Specification. Unless
otherwise stated, all underground cables shall be laid in uPVC conduits with draw pits as shall be
indicated on the drawings or as may be required by the Site conditions. The uPVC pipes shall be laid
to a minimum of 750mm below ground. The uPVC ducts shall be sand bedded to a depth of 50mm
below and above the pipe. The rates inserted for uPVC pipes shall included the costs of sand
bedding.

In case it is required to lay cables direct in ground, the following shall apply: -

Where more than one cable is laid in a trench, cables shall be spaced as follows: -

Between MV cables 100mm

Between MV and telephone cables 400mm
Between MV and LV cables 400mm
Between LV and telephone cables 400mm
Between LV cables 100mm

In straight run trenches, cable crossings shall not be permitted except where a cable branches from the main
run.

At every draw-in point, joint or junction box, the cable should be snaked.

Before cables are laid, the bottom of the trench shall be evenly graded and cleared of all loose stones and shall
then be covered with an 80mm layer of sand or sifted soil and lightly compacted. A further 80mm layer shall
be placed on top of the cables.

The approved cable protection shall then be laid and the trench refilled with excavated materials in 200mm
layers, each layer being well compacted by hand or mechanical punners before the next layer is filled.

The width of the trench shall be such that a clearance of 80mm shall be provided between the outermost cable
and the side of the trench.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 167

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

Where cables are disposed in more than one layer, the vertical spacing shall be 400mm between centres of
cables or cable groups the depth of the trench being made suitable accordingly. Stones or other hard objects
shall not be included in any of the backfilling materials.

In the laying of cables in the uPVC ducts, the internal radius of bends shall be six times the overall cable
diameter.

The rates inserted for cables shall be deemed to include for the above requirements.

b) Protective Covers

The protective covers, manufactured in accordance with BS 2484 shall be provided over cables laid in
the ground, each complete with and interlocking device to prevent lateral displacement. The rates
inserted for cables shall be deemed to include for the protective covers.

c) Cable Position Markers

These should be place adjacent to all points where cables change direction and all intervals of not
more than 30 meters and at other positions designated by the Engineer.

d) Sealing of Cable Entries

Where cables enter buildings, pipes, or ducts, the mouths of the pipes or ducts shall be effectively
sealed by means of close fitting solignum impregnated wooden plugs and a mixture of compound and
transformer oil, or other approved manner.

e) Protection against Mechanical Damage

All cables located in such positions where they are vulnerable to damage by mechanical or other
means shall be protected by suitable lengths of steel pipe bushed to prevent damage to the cable.

f) Rating Plates

Each cable when completely erected shall have permanently attached to it at each end in such
intermediate positions as may be considered necessary by the Engineer, metal plates upon which is
engraved, or stamped, the identification number of cable together with the voltage, size and make-up,
and the service which it supplies.

The information shall be recorded by the contractor so that it may appear on drawings of the
completed installation.

g) Cable Sealing and Termination

The contractor shall be wholly responsible for the sealing and jointing of all cables supplied and
erected under the contract.

The cable boxes, looping-boxes and glands for LV cables on all items or equipment shall be provided
under the contract.

Sealing and jointing shall be in accordance with the best current practice and of first class
workmanship. Where cable armouring is used as earth continuity conductor, the glands shall have
the necessary contact surface or provided a low resistance path under fault conditions.

The tender shall include for all cable jointing where appropriate and all labour, jointing material and
compound, together with the use of all jointers’ tools and making off the cable tails to the apparatus
terminals.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 168

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

c) Cabling Details

The contractor shall submit a schedule of all cables, detailing the following for each cable proposed: -

a) Reference Number
b) Type
c) Cross Section Area
d) Number of Cores
e) Origin
f) Destination
g) Cost per metre installed
h) Cost for each termination (glanding and making off)
i) Route Length
j) Operating Voltage
k) Estimated Current
l) Percentage Volt Drop

Rate (g) and (h) shall be used to assess costs in the event of any agreed route length variation.

The Contract Price shall include all cables required for a fully operational installation and for laying all
the cables in accordance with the requirements in Section 5.3 of this Specification.

1.7. LIGHTING FITTINGS

1.7.1 General

The Contractor shall supply and fit all lighting fittings of the type indicated on the drawings and in
the Schedule/Bills of Quantities, and he shall determine the exact positions of fittings as indicated on
the drawings, agreeing where necessary with the Engineer.

Fittings shall be suitable for operation on a 240V, 50Hz supply and where necessary shall be supplied
complete with control gear. In some cases, some lighting fittings for low voltage supply shall be
installed where specified. These low voltage lighting fittings shall be supplied complete with their
transformer and control gear.

The control gear for ALL fluorescent lamps shall consist of an electronic ballast high frequency
control with power factor correction to better than 0.9 lagging. The control gear shall have an
interface or the BMS control. The lamps shall withstand an operation voltage range between 160 V
and 250V, with a NON-FLICKER operation (high frequency operation). In effect these lamps shall
be highly efficient and energy saving compared to the traditional choke type fittings.

1.7.2 Lighting Fittings Sources

The preferred source is OMS..

1.7.3 Lighting Levels

In particular the following fittings are proposed:

Offices: Low brightness cat 2 recessed VDU fluorescent luminaries with T5 Tubes
to provide 500 lux on the working plane. Luminaries to be 600 x 600 mm
arranged on a regular grid and fitted with allow flexible connections to
flexible partitioning options.

Toilets & Circulation Areas: Provide 300-lux level using ceiling mounted low voltage fittings.

Entrance Foyer: Provide recessed fitting for general lighting in conjunction with feature
lighting.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 169

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Plant Room & Basement Car Park: Surface mounted fittings with T5 tubes

Emergency Lighting: Incorporate emergency lights within general lighting fittings. Provide
illuminated fire exit signs all to meet building regulations/fire officer
requirements for building shell works. (As may be found necessary)

The following minimum levels of illumination shall apply at a height of 1m AFL.

Kitchen areas 200 lux

Bathrooms and Circulation areas 200 lux
Laundries 200 lux
Garages/Parking Areas 150 lux
Offices 400 lux
Workshop 300 lux
Operational areas 200 lux
Entrance halls and storage areas 200 lux
Bedrooms 200 lux

1.7.4 Lighting Controls

All lighting shall be controlled by switches strategically placed.

1.7.5 Site Lighting

Site lighting shall consist of High Pressure Sodium lamps mounted on lighting columns or on the
building walls or on the perimeter wall. Site lighting shall be controlled by a suitably located solar
cell also linked to the BMS.

Photo-electric cell units shall be used to control the lighting. The units shall be dust-proof and
splash-proof (IP53) and shall be suitable for mounting on columns by means of brackets or
elsewhere as shall be agreed upon with the Engineer.

1.7.6 Emergency Lighting

Emergency lighting shall be designed to provide sufficient light for escape purposes only. The
system of emergency lighting luminaires shall be of the maintained type self contained and
equipped with fluorescent tubes and lamps as specified in the Bills of Quantities. The mounting
position shall be above pedestrian exit doors and in other locations as shown on the drawings.

Self contained emergency lighting fire exit signs shall be provided above all escape doors and as
required along the escape route. The bulkhead fittings shall be suitable for conduit entry and with
protection to IP 54.
A minimum duration of operation of 3 hours from a re-chargeable battery, having an LED charge
indicator, shall be provided.

1.8. WIRING ACCESSORIES

1.8.1 Non-metallic conduit (Conduits for Electrical Installations)

All non-metallic conduit shall be class "A" heavy gauge, high impact PVC complying with British
Standard BS 6099 Part 1: 1981, IEC 614-1: 1978 or the latest Edition thereof.

The minimum size to be used on the contract is 20mm external diameter. All conduit installations
shall be concealed in the walls and floors or in structural slabs, except under false ceilings where
they can be run on the surface of the slab soffit.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 170

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Conduits shall be kept at least 150 mm clear of gas piping and colour coded orange when
required. Conduits shall be kept at least 150 mm clear of steam and hot water systems and
preferably beneath the aforementioned services.

Conduit runs shall be complete before wiring is begun and shall not be dismantled for wiring
operations.

1.8.2 Final Sub-circuit wiring

All power and lighting wiring cables shall be 600/1000V grade, single core PVC insulated, with
stranded copper conductors in accordance with BS 6004. The minimum sizes of lighting circuits shall
be 1.5mm sq; and ring main circuits shall be 2.5mm sq.

i) Socket Outlets

In all areas, general power outlets shall be of the 13A 3-pin fused plug type complying with BS 1363.
They shall be flush pattern, with white or ivory cover plates unless otherwise specified on the
drawings. Where the circuits are supplied from a common feed, two outlets shall form a twin unit in a
common box. The earthing terminal of every socket outlet shall be connected to the earth continuity
conductor of the final sub-circuit by an appropriately sized insulated copper conductor. Unless
otherwise stated they shall be mounted at 300mm above the finished floor level or 400 mm above the
work tops.

ii) Telephone Outlets

These shall be of the type as specified in the Bills of Quantities, or in the particular specification for
telephone work. Unless otherwise specified they shall be mounted at 300mm above the finished floor
level or 400 above work tops.

iii) Lighting Switches

Lighting switches, unless specified otherwise in the Bills of Quantities, shall be of the all-insulated
rocker-operating plate-switch type to BS 3676, and shall be of ample rating. Switch inserts shall be
white with ivory cover plates.

Switches controlling points in bathrooms shall be placed outside the bathroom, or consist of a ceiling
switch operated by a non-conducting cord, as specified. Switches mounted outdoors shall be of a
weather tight pattern.

All flush or surface installed switches shall, unless otherwise specified, be mounted at a distance of
1350mm above finished floor level.

Ceiling switches shall on the other hand be positioned at not less than 300mm from the point which
they control.

iv) Sub-main Power Distribution

Sub-main cables will distribute power from the main switchboards and from the sub-main boards to
the consumer units.

Cables shall be routed as per drawings or Engineer's instructions on site. But allowance for cable
passage (pipes or ducts, etc) shall be put in place at the earliest possible stage of construction to avoid
having to cut walls, floors, roads etc.

v) Power Installation

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 171

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 All power installations shall be concealed in floors, walls and in space above the false ceiling.
However, in offices power installations shall be in metallic trunking mounted at window sill level,
unless otherwise specified in the Bills of Quantities.

Unless indicated otherwise the following installation heights shall be used:

 Power outlets at 300mm above finished floor level (AFFL)
 Socket outlets at 300mm AFFL
 Isolators for various equipment at 1350mm AFFL

vi) Cables and Wires

All cables and wires to be used in the Electrical Installation shall be of stranded copper conductors.

All cables for outdoor installation as well as sub-main cables installed indoors shall be XLPE-SWA-
PVC or PVC-SWA-PVC as specified in the Bills of Quantities. Proper glands shall be used for
termination.

Unless specifically indicated otherwise, no conductors smaller than 1.5mm 2 shall be used for any
purpose. All conductors for ring main circuits shall not be less than 2.5mm 2.

1.9. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

1.9.1 GENERAL

This Specification comprises the technical part of the tender document and describes the various
components of an automatic fire alarm system. Tenderers must therefore refer to PART 5 for the
specific requirements of the site and the service.

1.9.2 APPROVED EQUIPMENT

Tenderers must state whether the equipment and plant offered is of a type approved by and
guaranteed to comply with the following bodies:

a) The Fire Offices Committee in the United Kingdom

b) National Board of Fire Underwriters in the U.S.A.
c) The Council of Fire Insurance Companies in South Africa
d) Any similar internationally recognised body

Where applicable, the equipment must agree in every respect with the officially approved samples.

1.9.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The Fire Detection system shall comprise a Central Control Unit, connected to field devices,
including fire detection devices, alarm and control devices, and annunciation devices located
throughout the protected building area.

The control unit shall continuously monitor the analogue status of all sensing devices and initiate
action when a fire or smoke condition is present. All decisions are to be taken by the control unit,
and sensing devices must not switch into an alarm state.

The alarm management shall be field configurable from the control panel via a keypad to enable the
system to be tailored to suit the protected building and to permit future changes. This configuration
shall be maintained under power failure conditions.

The control unit shall have a front panel comprising of indicated L.E.D.'s, control keyboard, and
plasma display, as described in detail later.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 172

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Data outputs are to be provided for communicating with devices such as intelligent mimic panels and
graphics computers.
Facilities for "locking-off" controls are to be provided.

1.9.4 SOFTWARE CONTROL

The system shall at all times be under software control. Two types of software shall be provided, the
operating programme and the configuration programme.

The software shall be so arranged that all configuration data necessary to carry out system operation
as described below, is automatically programmed by the operating system.

Upon switch-on the panel shall, automatically and without manual intervention, programme itself to
operate as follows:

 Be fully functional (Fire and Fault) within the following limits.

 All device addresses present to be logged.
 All device types to be logged.
 Devices to be automatically calibrated.
 Common fire lamps must operate.
 Common sounder outputs (2) must operate.
 Common fault output must operate.
 Display must operate.

1.9.5 STORAGE OF SOFTWARE

1.9.5.1 General

All software (programmes and data) shall be held in solid state memories. In particular software shall
not be held on magnetic tapes or discs, or any device requiring mechanical moving parts.

1.9.5.2 Operating Programmes

Operating programmes shall be stored in non-volatile ready-only memories. These programmes shall
provide all auto-star and self-programming features to provide an operational system, without any
manual programming, as described above.

1.9.5.3 Configuration Data

Configuration Data shall be stored in alterable memory, backed by a dedicated lithium battery,
permanently soldered to the P.C. Board, with a minimum life of 10 years.

1.9.6 POLLING SYSTEM

The Fire Detection system is to incorporate a polling system which polls each detector individually
and transmits analogue information from each detector to the control unit, or instructions from the
control unit to each detector.

The idle value of each detector shall be continuously updated at regular intervals by the control unit,
in order to compensate for contamination and atmospheric conditions.
The panel shall make all decisions based upon the information received from each detector. The panel
is to instruct each detector in an alarm state to switch on its led.

Even when a detector is in an alarm state, it shall continue to send variable analogue information to
the control unit, indicating changes in the smoke or heat level.
System polling time shall be 2 seconds or less for each complete scan of all devices attached.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 173

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

1.9.6.1 Communication Circuit

A 2-wire circuit is to be used for power and communication between the panel and the detector.
The circuit is to be suitable for looped arrangement and must accept tee-off's with full monitoring.

1.9.6.2 System Control

All communication shall be under the control of the control unit, which shall sequentially poll each
device in turn and authorize communication. No device shall communicate with the control panel
without authority. The control unit must be able to read information from a device or send
instructions to a device.

1.9.6.3 Device Address

Each device on line must be uniquely identifiable by the control unit. This must be achieved by
presetting the address of each device in its base by means of a dip switch.
Removal of a detector head from its base must not cause the device address to be removed from line.

1.9.6.4 Device Identification

The identification of each type of address unit and each type of sensor (i.e. ionisation detector, heat
detector, sprinkler switch, etc.) must be transmitted to the panel on each polling scan.

1.9.6.5 Device Status

The condition of each detector, or other line device, including circuit, calibration and contamination,
must be transmitted to the panel on each polling scan.

1.9.6.6 Number of Devices in Alarm

There shall be no limit to the number of devices which may be in alarm simultaneously. When a
detector is in alarm, an L.E.D. in its base shall flash. In this state its variable analogue output must
continue to function.

1.9.7 SYSTEM FACILITIES

1.9.7.1 System Wiring

The system shall operate on a single 2-wire circuit. Wiring is to be suitable for return loop
arrangement, or single direction arrangement.
Tee-off's may be permitted, with full monitoring.

1.9.7.2 Device Sensitivity

Sensitivity of each detector is to be individually adjustable, device by device, remotely from the
control panel. Not less than four levels of adjustment required for each device.

1.9.7.3 Calibration

The system must check and adjust the calibration of each analogue detector for changes caused by
environmental contamination. This must be done every 24 hours.
When the maximum calibration adjustment of a detector is reached the panel must indicate a
"Maintenance Required" signal for that detector.
The type, calibration, sensitivity and status of each detector or device must be able to be displayed at
the control panel.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 174

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.9.7.4 Line Protection and Monitoring

The addressable line must be monitored for short circuit, open circuit and earth leakage.

1.9.7.5 Processor Monitoring

A hardware "watchdog" circuit must be provided on the central processor module. In the event of a
microprocessor failure the watchdog must cause an auto reset of the microprocessor.
Failure of the microprocessor must cause a "Processor Failed" lamp to illuminate.

1.9.7.6 Panel Capacity

The capacity of each address line shall be a minimum of 126 addressable devices.
These may be input devices, such as smoke detectors, or output devices such as sounders or relays.
The capacity of the panel shall be 4 loops, providing a minimum of 504 addressable devices. It must
be possible for panels to be interconnected to provide additional capacity as required.

1.9.7.7 Device Types

It shall be possible to connect the following detectors/devices to the address lines of the control unit.
Ionisation Smoke Detectors -analogue type Optical Smoke Detectors -analogue type Heat Detectors
-analogue type Manual "Break-glass" Units Addressable relays Addressable Sounders Interface
Units Line Isolators Conventional Detectors - all types Flame Detectors

1.9.7.8 Device Identification

The panel must automatically identify every device on the address lines during initial start-up, and
record this information in memory.
The following device types must be recognised by the panel:

a) Ionisation Detector (analogue)

b) Optical Smoke Detector (analogue)
c) Heat Detector - fixed temperature (analogue)
d) Heat Detector - Rate-of-Rise (analogue)
e) Break glass Unit
f) Sprinkler Flow-switch
g) General Interface
h) Security Interface
i) Conventional Detector

Subsequently, the panel must check the detector and device types on every scan, and indicate a type-
fault signal should a device be changed to an incorrect type.

1.9.7.9 Device Status

Each addressable device must be polled by the panel every 2 seconds or less. The analogue status and
equipment condition must be read and stored in the panel on every scan.
The software algorithms must access the varying status of each device, and indicate the following
conditions:

a) ANALOGUE DETECTORS

 Detector healthy
 Fire Alarm
 Pre-alarm
 Detector contaminated
 Detector failed

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 175

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

  Address Unit faulty
 Incorrect type of Detector
 Detector removed
 Address Unit removed
 Faulty calibration

b) INTERFACE TO CONTACTS

 Contacts normal
 Fire Alarm
 Contact wiring open circuit
 Contact wiring short circuit
 Interface removed
 Interface faulty

1.9.7.10 Maintenance Alarm Thresholds

The alarm thresholds of each analogue detector shall vary individually in accordance with its idle
status. This is to be arranged so that the sensitivity of each detector will remain constant even when
contaminated.
This includes alarm thresholds, rate algorithms, pre-alarm and maintenance thresholds.
When the threshold reaches its maximum limit, the panel must be able to indicate a "maintenance
required" signal for the particular detector.

1.9.7.11 Alarm Decisions

All alarm decisions are to be taken by the control unit after checking the data from each device 2 or 3
times, depending upon device type.
Alarm response time for automatic sensors must be less than 6 seconds.
Fault and maintenance decisions, including pre-alarm decisions, must take between 10 and 50 scans,
depending upon the type of event being monitored, and the algorithm which the panel applies to it.

1.9.8 SIGNALLING AND ANNUNCIATION

1.9.8.1 General

Fire, fault, maintenance and pre-alarm signals shall be indicated visually in the control unit.
The indications must be arranged so that the different warnings are clearly distinguished. (i.e. amber
for fault, red for alarm).
The internal audible signal device may be the same for all alarms, but either tone variation or time
switching shall be used to differentiate fire and fault signals.
Outputs shall be provided for audible alarms, control functions, remote mimics and connection for
computers and printers.

1.9.8.2 Zoning

The panel shall give visual indication of 32 zones expandable to 128 zones. The zones must be fully
field programmable.
It must be possible to randomly allocate any device or detector, from any line, to any zone.

1.9.8.3 Panel Indicators

All visual indicators shall be LED's and no incandescent lamps are to be used.
The following LED's must be provided:

 Zone Fire LED's 32 x Dual LED –Red

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 176

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

  Zone Fire LED's 32 x Dual LED -Amber
 Device fault 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Supply Healthy 1 x Dual LED -Green
 Supply Fault 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Coincidence Alarm 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Pre-Alarm led 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Alarm Silenced 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Maintenance 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Processor Fault 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Fire 2 x Dual LED -Red
 System Fault 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Evacuated 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Device Isolated 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Test Mode 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Auto Reset 1 x Dual LED -Amber
 Multiple Alarm 1 x Dual LED -Amber

1.9.8.4 Panel Display

The panel must have a 8 x 40 Character Backlit Alpha Numeric LCD or equal display. This is to be a
bright text display, clearly visible from 3 meters. The top line must give the following information:

 -Alarm Type
 -Zone Number
 -Detector/Device Number

The bottom line shall be field programmable to provide a user -defined message for
each service. The panel display must be field programmable for messages for each detector/device.

1.9.8.5 Panel Controls

The panel is to incorporate a keyboard and push-button with the following functions:

 -20 digit key pad for initialising and testing

 -9 Custom Keys for single button operation
 -Silence Alarm
 -Evacuate
 -Control Key Switch - must prevent unauthorised resetting of control panel etc.
 -Tamper Switch - fitted inside panel

1.9.8.6 Standard Outputs

The panel shall incorporate 16 x 2 Amp programmable relays plus 1 x Common Fire; 1 x Common
Fault; 1 x Remote Fire; 1 x Fire Brigade; 1 x Alarm Bell and 1 x Buzzer These outputs shall be rated 2
Amp at 50 volts DC and be fused at 1,5 Amp.

1.9.8.6.1 COMMON FIRE

One voltage-free change-over contact shall be provided. This must operate on a "Fire" condition,
and is to remain "on" until the system is reset.
The contacts shall be rated at 2 Amps at 24 volts DC

1.9.8.6.2 COMMON FAULT

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 177

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 One voltage-free change-over contact shall be provided. This shall operate on a "fault" or
"maintenance" condition, and shall remain "on" until the system is reset.
The contact shall be rated at 2 Amps at 24 volts DC

1.9.8.7 Printer

A 40 column impact printer shall be provided.

The printer shall provide a hard copy of the following:
 -Alarms
 -Faults
 -Maintenance Data
- Panel Operations
 Operations of the printer shall not inhibit, delay or affect the functioning of the detection
polling system in any way.
 The printer shall indicate the following information for each alarm or signal:
 -Type of Alarm or Fault
 -Device Type
 -Device Number
 -Zone Number
 -User Message
 -Day
 -Date
 -Time
It shall be possible to set the printer to print alarms, or faults, or panels operations, or all of these, or
any combination.

1.9.9 ALARM MANAGEMENT

The annunciation and signalling outputs shall be field programmable for system configuration as
described below.

1.9.9.1 Control Outputs

Optional control outputs or relays shall be available. The system shall accept up to 16 relays or
control outputs.

Each relay contact shall have a 2 Amp rating at 50 Volt d.c. It shall be possible to field programme the
outputs or relays to be randomly allocated for operation by any of the following:

o -Any Zone
o -Any Detector
o -Any Line Device
o -Any Panel Function
o -Any Panel Operating Button
o -Any combination of the above

1.9.9.2 Addressable Line Relays

The system shall be able to accept addressable line relays for connection to the detection line.
It shall be possible to field programme the addressable line relays to be randomly allocated for
operation by any of the following:

o -Any Zone
o -Any Detector
o -Any Line Device
o -Any Panel Function

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 178

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 o -Any Panel Operating Button
o -Any combination of the above

1.9.9.3 Double-Knock (Coincidence) Operation

It shall be possible to programme any of the control outputs or addressable relays so that it must only
operate upon an alarm from any 2 detectors in the programme group.

1.9.9.4 Silencing Operation

It shall be possible to programme any of the control outputs or addressable relays to operate in either
"silencing" mode or "non-silencing" mode.
In "silencing" mode the relay or output shall deactivate when the "Alarm Accept" button is pressed,
or when the "Reset" button is pressed.
In "non-silencing" mode, the relay or output shall be de-activated only when the "Reset" button is
pressed.

1.9.9.5 Activation Delay

It shall be possible to programme any of the control outputs or addressable relays to activate after a
delay period from receipt of the control signal.
This delay shall be 0 - 17 minutes, in 1 second increments.

1.9.9.6 Software Control

All the above functions shall be under software control, and programmed through the panels
keyboard.

1.9.9.7 Data Outputs

The panel shall have data outputs with compatible software for the operation of remote mimics and
graphics computers.

1.9.9.8 Colour Graphics

Full colour graphics package system shall be available which will show floor plans in the event of fire
or fault alarm.

1.9.9.9 Maintenance

The system shall continuously monitor the condition of every field detector or device, and all wiring,
and give a signal should any failure or calibration error occur.

1.9.9.10 Monitoring

Every device shall be continuously monitored for the following:

o -Existence on line
o -Calibration
o -Contamination
o -Circuit Failure
o -Device Type
o -Short Circuit
o -Open Circuit
o Earth Leakage

1.9.9.11 Maintenance Printout

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 179

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 It shall be possible to print out, upon demand, an analogue status report of all devices and detectors
attached to the system.
For each device this report shall give the following in code:
o -Calibration References
o -Base Type
o -Head Type
o -Analogue status

1.9.9.12 Zoning/Type Printout

It shall be possible to print out, upon demand, the following information about each zone and device:
o -Zone Number
o -Device Numbers
o -Device Types
o -Whether on line or off line

1.9.9.13 Zone Test Mode

It shall be possible to set the panel into a mode which will allow one person to test all detectors in a
zone, without inhibiting any other zones.
Should an alarm occur in any zone other than the one being tested, then the panel is to cancel the test
and respond to the alarm in the normal manner.
In this mode, all detectors in the defined zone will be tested using smoke, heat or Freon. The panel is
not to operate any relays or audible alarms, and is to record in memory each alarm as it occurs.
At the end of the test, the panel shall print out, upon request, all devices that operated, and a list of all
devices that did not operate.

1.9.9.14 Isolate

It shall be possible to isolate, via the keypad, any device, or any zone of devices.
An isolated device must not cause any alarm or fault signal to be generated in the panel.
FIRE BRIGADE SIGNALLING FACILITIES
The control unit must incorporate the necessary features to signal a "FIRE" or "FAULT" to the Fire
Brigade. The Contractor must supply the signalling equipment at both the transmitting and receiving
ends. It will therefore be necessary to consult the local Fire Brigade to ascertain what type of
equipment is required. Where the local Fire Service do not have such facilities, the Contractor shall
make allowance for the incorporation of the equipment at a future date.

1.9.10 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

1.9.10.1 General

The system shall be, as far as possible, self testing and maintenance free.
The control unit shall continually update the idle state of each detector, and indicate a "Maintenance
Required" signal in the event that a detector sensitivity is too high or too low.

1.9.10.2 Control Unit Test

The control unit shall have a test facility for the following: a) Simulation of short circuit, open circuit
and fire alarm for each zone individuals. b) General simulation of earth leakage. c) LED tests for all
panel and zone LED's. The control unit shall have the facility for printing out, upon demand, the idle
status of each detector on a line.

1.9.10.3 Field Test

DETECTOR TESTS
The control unit shall allow for detector test and inspection by a single person.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 180

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The test alarm triggered on each detector by the inspecting person shall be indicated on the detector
by a RED LED, and shall be automatically reset by the control unit. Alerting shall not take place.
Zones which are not switched to "inspection" mode shall remain ready for normal alarm procedure.
When testing lines equipped with only manual push button alarm boxes, it shall be possible for a
single person to check each manual box individually for correct operation without disabling the
function of the other alarm boxes in the line. An "Alarm Received" indication shall be transmitted by
the Central Station to the push button under test, where it shall be indicated by a RED LED.

1.9.10.4 Acceptance Test

The control unit shall allow for the testing of all audible and visual alarm devices and control relays, to
check correct functioning of these devices.

1.9.11 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY

1.9.11.1 Power Supply

The output of the power supply shall be capable of sustaining an alarm from all the connected alarm
lines simultaneously.
The power supply shall be an integral part of the control unit except where automatic door closers are
incorporated into the design.
It shall be possible to operate the system from the equipment power supply available in the building.
In the event of a failure of the equipment 24V DC supply there shall be an automatic switch over to
the standby battery supply without an interruption of the load and without activating a fire alarm.
The central control unit shall be protected against reverse polarity on the voltage supply side.
The unit shall be suitable for the use with a positively earthed DC power supply system.

1.9.11.2 Standby Battery

The standby batteries shall be provided with the required amount of cells necessary for the system
voltage. They shall have sufficient capacity to supply the largest load placed in them under normal
fire and fault conditions. The batteries shall be rated for a period of 12 hours normal load at an
ambient temperature of 20°C after which they shall have sufficient capacity to provide the operation
of the audible alarms in all zones and any fire, fault or audible alarms repeated remotely for a further
one hour.
The batteries shall be commissioned before putting into service.
The tightness and condition of intercell connections shall be fully checked when put into service.

1.9.11.3 Mains Supply

230V AC connections from the charger to the main supply circuit breaker shall be via a double pole
isolator reserved solely for the purpose. The isolator shall be housed in a box, its cover being painted
red and labelled "FIRE ALARM. DO NOT SWITCH OFF". This shall be provided by the Electrical
Contractor and shall be via the UPS System.
The equipment shall function satisfactorily at the normal mains voltage ± 10% and within the
following parameters:
o -with the battery disconnected
o -with the battery connected as for normal duty
o -with the battery connected and in a discharge condition

A cell shall be considered fully discharged when it is unable to maintain output in excess of or equal to
the final voltage measured at one minute intervals, whilst it is subjected to maximum design load of
the system.
Tenderers shall supply the Engineer with the maximum and minimum system voltages and all battery
and charger calculations used in determining the battery capacity shall be submitted for approval prior
to the purchase of the equipment.
All terminations shall be made inside the unit and shall be clearly labelled by anodised nameplates.
The incoming AC cable shall be 2,5mm² with a maximum of 20 A back-up protection.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 181

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The cable used for DC output shall be capable of carrying, with minimum volt drop, the full DC
output current of the unit.

1.9.12 FIRE DETECTION

All types of detector shall consist of a firmly mounted base and plug-in detector unit. The various
types of detector shall be compatible. The system shall permit all types of detector to be connected
within one zone. The loop resistance shall be in accordance with the manufactures requirements. No
detector shall contain parts which are subject to wear and tear. After each alarm actuation the detector
shall be ready to operate again without being replaced or re-adjusted. The detector base shall be the
type that will drive BOTH the integral LED and an extended indicator lamp.

1.9.13 DETECTOR IDENTIFICATION

Suitable permanently identified markers shall be installed on all detectors to indicate the detector and
zone numbers.

1.9.13.1 Ion Chamber Smoke Detector

The detector shall be capable of detecting visible and invisible ionised gases produced by a fire. A
sensitivity adjustment shall be provided on each detector to adjust the sensitivity to combustion gases.
An indication light on each detector shall indicate when smoke or combustion gas is detected.
The radio-active level of the detector unit must meet the requirements laid down by the Atomic
Energy Board, i.e. 215 microcuries of Americium 241. The operating voltage shall be 240V DC
maximum. The quiescent and alarm current(s) shall be no greater than 100 micro Amps and 100mA
respectively. Cerberus F732 is acceptable, or equal and approved.

1.9.13.2 Heat Detector

The heat detector must respond to a rise in ambient temperature and activate an alarm when the
temperature accelerates at a rate faster than 8,3°C/minimum or when a maximum temperature of
55°C is reached, whichever first occurs.

1.9.13.3 Duct Probe Units

Duct probe units must be designed for continuous air sampling of fast moving air in a duct by passing
the air being sampled through the ionisation or smoke detectors incorporated therein for an analysis
to ascertain whether smoke and/or combustion aerosols above a predetermined level are present.
Detectors specially designed to be mounted in air streams will also be considered if the necessary
documentation can be presented in support of stable detection under normal fast moving air
conditions. Tenderers must advise the Engineer of the maximum air velocity their particular detectors
are capable of withstanding without risk or false alarms.

1.9.13.4 Extended Indicators Light Units

In cases where smoke or ionisation detectors are mounted in false floors and/or ceiling voids, their
indicator light units must be extended to the public area where they are readily observable. These units
must be mounted in neat approved metal boxes.
The Contractor must ensure that all indicator lights mounted on the side of the detectors, when these
are installed in large areas, point in the same direction, preferably towards the main door, for more
effective observation.

1.9.14 AUDIBLE ALARM UNITS

The audible alarm units must be 24 volt DC and shall be of the Centrifugal Bell or Electronic Sounder
type.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 182

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.9.14.1 Audible Alarm Silencing

It must be possible to silence the audible alarm without affecting the light signalling facilities and the
Fire Brigade signalling circuits.

1.9.15 MAGNETIC DOOR RELEASE SYSTEM

Provision shall be made for incorporation of 24V DC magnetic door release installation as an integral
part of the fire alarm system.
The necessary relays/transformers/rectifiers etc. shall be located adjacent to the Central Station and
shall be monitored by the Central Station for status.

1.9.16 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

All conduit and draw wires shall be supplied and installed by others.

1.9.16.1 Cabling

Any cabling required shall be in multi-core fire retardant cable screened as necessary.
Zone detectors and alarm initiating devices shall be wired in parallel only and no tee-offs nor jointing
of wiring will be permitted without the Engineers approval.

As far as practicable junction boxes shall not be used. However, when the use of junction boxes is
unavoidable, the junction box shall be in accessible position and clearly indicated on the as-built
drawings. The cable ends shall be soldered or crimped with pin lugs and terminated at an approved
connector block, securely fixed in the junction box. The circuits shall be numbered by means of an
approved cable marker. The wire numbers shall also be shown on the as-built drawings. The junction
box shall be marked "FIRE ALARM".

Where the wiring enters control panels etc., the cables of each circuit shall be neatly and carefully
bunched together and secured by means of approved cable straps.
The audible alarms must be wired in suitable 660V grade PVC insulated flexible conductors calculated
to ensure that there is not more than 2 volts drop at full load.

1.9.17 INITIAL TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF SYSTEMS

The complete installation shall be inspected to ensure that the work has been carried out in a
satisfactory manner and that the method, materials and components used conform with the
specification and drawings and that the as-built drawings and operating and instruction manuals called
for have been supplied.
Tests that may damage items of equipment, especially apparatus incorporating electronic circuits, shall
be carried out with the equipment disconnected.

1.9.17.1 Detection System

On commissioning, the entire system shall be tested in the following manner to ensure satisfactory
operation of the complete system:

a) Each and every trigger device shall be tested

b) The supervision of each application circuit shall be tested
c) All the functions of the control unit shall be tested
d) All time delays shall be checked for accuracy and that the timers will complete their cycles
even though wiring between them and their detector circuits are interrupted
e) The power supply, battery and automatic changeover shall be tested
f) The audible and visual alarms shall be tested On each system each detector shall be tested.
The methods of testing detectors shall be as per the various types listed below:

TYPE OF DETECTOR TEST

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 183

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Smoke/Ionisation Bee Smoker containing burning paper or cardboard Light
Scattering (optical) Bee Smoker containing burning paper or cardboard

TYPE OF DETECTOR TEST

Rate-of-Rise (heat) Industrial Electrical heat gun Ultra-violet A tray 500 x 500 x 50
deep containing burning transformer oil placed into the risk

Projected Beam
A rigidly constructed metal tray containing burning fuel.

The type of fuel and size of tray for: i) Heat test and ii) Smoke test shall be
dependent on the height of the risk and the manufacturer's instruction Break-Glass
Alarms Numerous widely separated switched shall be actuated.
1.9.17.2 Wiring

Insulation testing of the installed cables and wires shall be made by means of a 500V DC meter, and
the insulation resistance to earth and between conductors of the installed cables and wires shall be in
accordance with the regulations set forth in the latest SABS Code of Practice 0142.
Each continuity and earth loop impedence shall also be tested in accordance with SABS 0142, as
amended.

1.9.17.3 Battery Chargers

The Contractor shall supply the Engineers with the performance test certificates to verify that the unit
is within specification. Random tests shall be undertaken at the Contractor's premises to determine
acceptability.

1.9.17.4 Certificates and Approvals

The Contractor shall provide to the Engineer all the certificates that may be required in accordance
with the contract documents and shall ensure that all written approvals that may be required from the
Engineer are timeously requested.

1.9.18 QUARTERLY MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE OF EARLY WARNING FIRE

DETECTION SYSTEM

The installation shall be guaranteed and serviced, free of charge for a period of 12 months for
acceptance by the Engineer. The Servicing Company shall perform all of the following and submit a
test report to the subscriber after each visit:

Test the installation from detector in each zone and ensure that the correct alarms are raised
at the main control panel, and, if applicable, the repeat panel.
Test the installation from the control panel and ensure that the following occurs, by physical
means:

i) each zone fault indication illuminates

ii) the mains fail indication illuminates
iii) the charger fail indication illuminates
iv) detector removed indication illuminates

Test all audible and visible alarms controlled by the system. Inspect and test all manual
operational alarms from the break-glass units in the system. Test the connection to the fire
station, if installed, and check the correct operation of the receiving panel. This shall be done by
informing the Fire Department prior to the routine service, that such a service is being
undertaken.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 184

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Conduct an insulation test of the wiring. Inspect and test the batteries and their connection.
Where necessary S.G. of the electrolyte in each cell shall be tested for compliance with the
manufacturer's specification. Refill to correct electrolyte levels if necessary. If the maximum
system voltage is +27V and the minimum system voltage is -22V, re-adjust the system.
If applicable, all automatic door closers and fire dampers shall be seen to operate.

At each quarterly service, a different detector shall be used to initiate the zone functions.
Prior to every fourth service remove all detectors, clean them thoroughly, re-calibrate and re-
install, prior to beginning the routine service.

The test report shall itemise at least all the points listed above and contain records of which
detectors were used for initiation purposes.

A statement shall be made as to the state of readiness and effectiveness of the system and any
recommendation considered essential to the continued efficiency of the system shall be
incorporated with a budget of cost. Isolating a device must not affect or inhibit any other device
on the line.

1.9.19 Fire Alarm System

The system shall be of the self-addressable type and incorporate but not be limited to the following
features:

a) Optical Detectors
b) Heat Detectors
c) Break Glass Units
d) Line Relays to control Air Conditioning and Ventilation Plant
e) Strobe lights for Local Areas Identification of Fire
f) Interface units to monitor the status of doors

1.9.20 CONDUIT SYSTEM AND WIRE WAYS

The Electrical Subcontractor will provide all necessary conduits and wire ways associated with the fire
detection installation. All such conduits will be supplied with draw wires.

1.9.21 SYSTEM WIRING

1.9.21.1 Detection Circuit

The detection circuit shall be wired in a loop (Class A). No tee-offs are permitted in this wiring unless
specifically approved by the Engineer. Wiring shall be of a size approved by the manufacturer of the
equipment and shall be fire resistant cabling.

1.9.21.2 Line Impendence and Capacitance

The impendence and capacitance of the line shall not exceed the recommended values as laid down by
the equipment manufacturer.

1.9.22 CONTROL PANEL

The control panel shall be Cooper DF6000 Two Loop. The control panel shall be mounted at at the
Reception on the Ground Floor.

The panel shall be of the self-addressable type, 240V A.C. complete with sealed batteries and charger
unit. Note the charger unit shall be sized to handle the magnetic door holders. The panel shall be
provided complete with integral printer and shall be capable of being interfaced with a P.C. driven
building management system. The panel and all circuiting shall be suitably protected against voltage
surges and lightning by means of equipment similar or equal to the Surgetek Manufacture.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 185

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 A remote R.D.U. unit is also to be provided at the Administrator’s Office.

Control, Mimic and Repeat Panels shall, in addition to being mains powered, have 72Ah standby
batteries enclosed in each panel's lockable front cover.
The Main control panel facilities shall include; a printer, alarm controls/ resets, keyboard and menu
functions and user friendly software. The fire detection system shall be linked to the BMS through an
appropriate interface.

Time zoning

The detection system shall have 'time-zoning' capability enabling detectors to be independently
disabled or desensitised depending on the conditions of the surrounding.

1.9.23 DEVICES

All devices shall be of the addressable type. Generally devices shall be of the Optical type with heat
detection provided in areas such as garages, kitchens and plant room areas as necessary.
Line relays shall be provided at air conditioning control panels. These relays should be programmed
to switch-off items of equipment in the event of a fire condition.
Line relays will be provided as indicated in B.O.Q.
The Contractor shall provide a fire alarm system and smoke detectors to meet building regulation
requirements. The fire alarm panel will be located in the entrance reception area and will be recessed
or semi recessed into masonry walls with concealed wiring.

The Fire Detection system will be a true analogue fully addressable system and with very low false
alarm rate. All detection devices (including break-glass call points and alarm sounders) must be the
fully addressable type. All shall conform to current editions of BS 5839 and European Fire Alarm
Standard EN54.

No smoke or heat detectors will be located within less than 0.5m from a wall except in narrow
corridors/rooms. Spacing of detectors in narrow but long corridors/passages shall not exceed 12m
while the spacing elsewhere shall be between 6-8m.

1.9.24 FIRE ALARMS

Alarm Bells to be provided as indicated on drawings & BOQ. All alarm sounders shall be loop
powered and able to be configured to operate either individually or in sectored groups. Sounders shall
have an output of at least 90dBA at 1 metre with frequencies of between 900Hz to 970HZ.

1.9.25 BREAK GLASS UNITS

Shall be flush mounted in 75 x 75 boxes supplied and installed by others. The unit shall be
addressable and shall be of the re-settable type equal to the PFSS 323 unit.

1.9.26 ZONE DIAGRAMS

The Fire Detection Subcontractor shall supply, produce and incorporate zone layouts of the building
within the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. The layouts shall be reduced to A3 size and clearly
demarcate the relevant zones and respective detectors.

Works will comprise the supply and installation of a fully addressable analogue fire detection system
comprising:

a) A main control panel

b) Smoke / heat detectors, manual break glass call points, sounders.
c) Repeat Panel
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 186

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 d) Mimic Panel
e) Interface module for monitoring and triggering fire fighting system
f) Wiring to all trigger devices on the Control panel shall be in 2-core SWA FIRETUF
power OHLS stranded copper cables or equivalent in high impact conduits and covering the
various areas of the building complex.

Voice Alarm System

The fire alarm system shall have a voice alarm system. The main panel shall be supplemented by
Audio Control Unit that provides manual control of the voice functions. All automatic operation shall
be controlled by the configuration facilities in the Main Fire Alarm System. The system shall have
loudspeaker driven Distributed Amplifier Units controlled through the sensor loops. The voice
system shall also be used for general public address purposes and shall have background music
capability. The fire message shall over ride all other functions in the event of a fire warning.

1.9.27 PUBLIC ADDRESS/FIRE EVACUATION SYSTEM

The system shall be capable of providing continuous background music of good audio quality
throughout the circulation areas of the clinic. Paging and announcement facilities shall be provided
from either the control centre or from the administration area once this is constructed. Provision shall
be made for levels of priority with the microphone at the control unit having priority over the other
microphone(s).

An evacuation system which is linked to the fire detection system shall be provided and shall emit
warning tones and optionally, reproduce a message either recorded or reproduced digitally. The
evacuation shall be capable of operating automatically from the fire alarm panel input or manually
from the control station.
The evacuation system shall be capable of operation on 24V DC battery backup in the event of a
mains power failure.

1.9.27.1 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION

All the equipment specified shall be suitable for mounting into a nineteen inch rack with a lockable
perspex front door.

1.9.27.2 AMPLIFIERS

The size and quantity of amplifiers shall be determined by the quantity of speakers used with
a 20% spare capacity. The amplifier specification shall be equal to or better than the following:
Frequency Response 30Hz - 20kHz Total Harmonic Distortion at 1kHz at rated output <0,5 Signal to
Noise Ratio -3db at 400Hz Input Sensitivity/Impedance 1V/10k Balanced Power Source 220/230 V
AC 50Hz Standby Power Source 24 V DC Line Output Voltage 100 V

1.9.27.3 MIXER/PRE-AMPLIFIER

The unit shall have 8 input channels:

1 x Microphone Inputs
1 x Phono Input
1 x Auxiliary Input
1 x Tape Deck Input
1 x Tuner Input
1 x Chime Input
1 x Mixer Input (from Fire Panel)

At least two microphone inputs must automatically activate the muting circuit which attenuates all of
the incoming signals.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 187

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1.9.27.4 INPUT:

Microphone 1,4mV/600 Balanced Phono 2,5mV/47k Unbalanced Deck/Tuner/ Auxiliary

100mV/47k Unbalanced Chime Input 560mV/47k Unbalanced Mixer Input 560mV/47k Unbalanced

1.9.27.5 OUTPUT:

Line Out 1 V/600 Balanced Record Out 1 V/1k Unbalanced

1.9.27.6 TONE CONTROL

Bass ± 10db at 100Hz Treble ± 10db at 100Hz

1.9.27.7 FIRE EVACUATION EMERGENCY PANEL

The panel shall be activated automatically when the fire signal is received for the fire alarm panel.
Manual or automatic override shall be permitted from either the panel or via a tape deck or digital
voice unit.
The unit shall have a test facility in order to verify correct operation without activating the alarm. A
panel microphone shall permit full override.
The unit shall be similar and equal to the Inkel PA Model EP-821 unit.
Tenderers shall submit details of the automatic announcement unit accompanying this unit with their
tender submission.

1.9.27.8 MUSIC SOURCE

1.9.27.8.1 AM/FM TUNER

The unit shall be of the digital display type with a minimum of ten pre-select stations.

1.9.27.8.2 COMPACT DISC PLAYER

- The player shall have a 5 disc capability and shall be suitable for rack mounting.
- The unit shall be capable of random and continuous play.
- The unit shall be similar and equal to the Inkel P.A. Model CDC-5010R 5 Disc C.D. Player.
- The unit shall be priced as an optional extra in the schedule of prices.

1.9.27.10 LOUDSPEAKERS

Good quality paper cone loudspeakers are to be used throughout the Circulation Areas. Speakers shall
be mounted onto round white grills to match the ceiling finish or wall- mounted units and shall be
supplied complete with line transformers.
20 cm CEILING LOUDSPEAKERS
Frequency Response 70Hz - 15kHz
Power Handling 2 - 10 Watt
SPL 90 db
10 cm CABINET LOUDSPEAKERS
Frequency Response 105Hz - 13kHz
Power Handling 2 - 10 Watt
SPL 90 db

1.10 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VOICE AND DATA, AND CABLING

1.10.1 General Requirements

The cabling installation shall conform to the latest Commercial Telecommunications Cabling Standard
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.A.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 188

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 It will be a directive within the project, that all cabling is routed away from both actual and notional
corridors and aimed at areas generally considered to be inaccessible after migration.

Data cable and power cable routes will, wherever possible, not be run in parallel with each other.
Where this is unavoidable a minimum 300mm space must be left.

Due account must be taken of the minimum bending radii of cables when determining their routing.

Cable bunching will be undertaken as follows:

 Cat 6 cabling will be bunched in bundles of 24 cables (Velcro ties)

 Fibre cabling will be bunched in bundles of 12 cables (Nylon ties)
 CW1309 – 50 pair cables in bundles of 6 (Nylon ties)
 To avoid cables crossing over each other, the cables will be routed so that cables for the
right side of the run will be placed in the right hand side of the cable route.
 Vertical cables and high level horizontal cables using cable ties wide and loose enough so as
not to damage the cable. Every other cable will have a metal core.
 All Copper data cables installed must confirm to the Category 6 standards.
 The use of multiple 4 pair UPT copper cables within a common sheath shall not be used on
horizontal cabling.
 All cables and connectors placed in the Tender shall enable any connection to meet the
requirements for ISO 8877 and Cat 6 standards.

To minimize cable damage caused by excessive compression Nylon or similar cable ties shall not be
used on any part of the Cat 5e low level horizontal cable installation.

The sheath material for all cables shall be of a low fire hazard type meeting the requirements of
BS4066-1/IEC332 PART 1/UL VW-1 (Fire Propagation) and BS7622-2/IEC1034, BS6425-
1/IEC754-1, BS6425-2/IEC754-2IEC 61034 (smoke emissions and Acid Gas).

The termination of all data grade balanced copper cables shall be undertaken via modular sockets
(jacks) complying with IEC 60603-7 at the physical level.

When terminating Category 5e cables within 24way patch panels the Cable Contractor is to loom 24
cables from the rear left of the cabinet and 24 cables from the rear right of the cabinet. This presents
a symmetrical loom presentation from the rear of the cabinet and can be noted on site survey.

All copper test results must be recorded and presented inline with the cabling vendors certification
requirements and acceptable to be downloaded into the Firm’s test database.

All horizontal IT cables are to be rated to a Low Smoke Fume fire rating (LSF), in accordance with
the respective fire standards and regulations.

Voice, Horizontal and Interlink cables shall be terminated in 1U high, 19 inch, patch panels with a
capacity of 24No. IEC 60603-7 (RJ45) socket (jack) interfaces. The interfaces shall meet the
requirements of Termination components. Each panel shall contain:

 Suitable strain relief for the incoming horizontal cables;

 Feature clearly marked areas suitable for labelling of both the panel and the ports;
 Have associated it with a 1U high patch cord management panel on the basis of two patch
panels per management panel.

1.10.2 Multimode Fibre Cabling

Each Multimode optical fibre backbone and interlink shall contain 24 No. 50/125mm optical fibres in
accordance with IEC 60793-2 Type-A1b and meeting the following performance requirements:

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 189

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

  Wavelength Attenuation Coefficient Modal Bandwidth (nm) (dB/km max.) (MHz.km min.)
 850 3.5 500 1300 1.0 500
 The cable shall be of tight jacket construction. The secondary coated optical fibres shall be
surrounded by a Kevlar impact-resistant layer.

The sheath material for all cables shall be of a low fire hazard type meeting the requirements of
BS4066-1/IEC332 PART 1/UL VW-1 (Fire Propagation) and BS7622-2/IEC1034, BS6425-
1/IEC754-1, BSBS6425-2/IEC754-2IEC 61034 (smoke emissions and Acid Gas).

The Multimode optical fibres shall be terminated in accordance with the termination procedures as
supplied by the manufacturer.

The termination of fibre shall be a duplex MT-RJ Small Form Fibre (”SFF”) socket. The insertion
loss of the plug shall be 0.75dB maximum (0.5dB mean) when used in conjunction with the plugs
which terminate the patch cords or equipment cables.

All cables are to be tied to the vertical riser basket at intervals no greater than 300mm.
Contain no Gel Fill combustible compounds.

1.10.3 Fibre Optic Patch Panels

The fibre MT-RJ connectors will be fitted into enclosed patch panels of a 1U high, 19 inch
configuration, which will in turn, be fitted into the patching cabinets. The multimode fibre patch
panels will have a minimum of 24 ports capable of accepting MT-RJ SFF connectors with an internal
fibre organizer to maintain fibre bend radius in excess of the minimum stated manufacturer’s limits.

Have suitably sized cable glands for securing fibre cables at points of entry and blanked off unused
rear entry ports.

Have coloured Traffolite labels for both panels and ports and dust caps fitted.

Have 1U management fitted for every two MT-RG panels.

1U management panels will have labels fitted for the fibre panels above and below.

A sample of the proposed structure together with the proposed cable management panel and labelling
shall be supplied and approved to the award of contract.

1.10.4 Labelling

No cables shall be placed but not terminated or labelled unless specified.

All labels of the cabling scheme will be of the machine generated type. Handwritten labels will not be
accepted.

All labels and designations shall be capable of a minimum of 10 (10) alphanumeric characters per label.

All individual cable sheaths will be labelled within 300mm of each cable termination point at outlet
point. Cable labels shall achieve full wraparound to protect the printed text from external degradation.

All label adhesives must be suitable to withstand the environmental conditions of a Communications
environment for 20 years.

Termination frames shall carry a full complement of Traffolite labels, designating each terminated four
pair Cat5e cable.

Floor outlet box and information outlets will be labelled, and said labels will be securely placed and fixed
and be of a Traffolite type format.

It will be the responsibility of the Cabling Contractor to label all cabinets /frames/floor outlet boxes
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 190

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 with suitable Traffolite labels.

Termination frames shall carry a full complement of labels, designating each terminated fibre.

All 19 inch rack mount patch panels shall be identified utilizing Traffolite labels, (review existing
labelling on site survey). Krone panels will be marked with frame and designation strip reference.

1.10.5 General Testing and Acceptance

Each connection of each installation must be 100 per cent tested. All work undertaken by the installer
must pass acceptance tests before the Engineer or his Representative will sign off completion for the
purposes of payment.

All cables, connectors, terminals and devices will be tested at a scheduled time after installation. Tests
will identify any incomplete conductors, conductor crosses and accidental earthing.

These tests will identify that strain relief devices at every cable to connector joint are secured and that
stress between cables and connectors will not disturb electrical circuits.

The Cabling Contractor will demonstrate by means of testing the ability of the proposed system to
perform to the levels claimed by the system supplier.

The Cabling Contractor will remedy and record any and all faults found in tests or inspections at their
expense. The project or phases thereof will not be considered complete until all such faults are
remedied and complete test documentation submitted in an acceptable form.

The Cabling Contractor will test all cables placed and terminated, cables will be tested after termination
and full labelling (from patch panel to outlet in accordance with the definition of a “link” stated within
IEC 11801). No cables shall be placed but not terminated, except if specified by the Engineer or his
Representative.

The costs for the use of test equipment and carrying out the testing including witness testing shall be
included in the tender sum.

All electronic and optical measuring (test) equipment shall be within 12 months of calibration that has
been carried out by a NAMAS approved calibration house. All calibration certificates shall be available
on site during the testing phase.

As the tests proceed, each successful test or series of tests shall be signed and dated by the person or
persons responsible for those tests. As a minimum, each page of tests shall be signed and dated when
all the tests on that page have been successfully completed.

All test results shall identify the equipment serial number (local and remote) of test equipment used.

The documentation shall be available and shall be submitted in a bound format within one (10)
On submission of the test results, the Engineer or his Representative may witness up to 10 percent
retest of the installation for conformity of test data.

1.10.6 Client Witness Testing

It is a requirement that the installation has a critical milestone included within its project plan, which
allows the Engineer, on behalf of the Project Manager to witness testing of the installed system prior to
the formal handing over process.

The Engineer or its appointed representative will seek to visit the site at an agreed set of dates, close to
the final stages of each test phase, and witness a random sample of the installed system tests, nominally
10%.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 191

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 At these tests, the Engineer or his Representative will expect to be shown copies of the proposed
documentation package, that it can expect to receive at the final handover, including test data, as
installed drawings, test traces, etc.

The Engineer or his Representative will use these to nominate the areas that it wishes to see tested and
will sign and date the test data to signify that these were successfully witnessed.
In the event that any tests fail the Engineer will require all of the areas affected (either by floor or by
cabinet) to be retested.

If additional faults are found in other areas of the site, then witness testing will be suspended and the
whole installation will require a 100% re-test at no extra cost.

In the event that faults and defects are found and witness testing is suspended, the installer will be liable
to a charge to cover the cost of the wasted time caused by the discovery of faults and defects.

The project shall be deemed complete once the installation conforms to the stipulations set out in the
BTI Cabling Acceptance document; a copy of which shall be made available to the installer.

1.10.7 Testing of Voice Grade Cabling

All installed voice grade cables will be tested / documented for:

 Conductor continuity
 Conductor separation (wire map)
 Polarity of cable pairs
 Conductor isolation from earth.

1.10.8 Testing of Horizontal And Interlink Category 6 Cabling

The data grade balanced pair copper cabling shall be tested with portable test equipment meeting the
requirements of TIA/EIA TSB67 and in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

The test results shall be submitted in soft-form using the test equipment manufacturers’ proprietary
software system. Text files will not be accepted.

The software enabling the test results to be viewed by the client shall be provided as part of the contract.

These System acceptance and compliance tests are:

 Wire map
 Cable length
 Propagation Delay
 Delay Skew
 Attenuation
 NEXT
 ELFEXT
 PSELFEXT
 Insertion Loss
 Return Loss
 10% Channel test on all hub harness cabling (testing through equipment cable, single patch
cord, horizontal cable and fly lead).

The performance of channels shall conform to the following requirements. These values are taken from
ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

The format of this test should be carried out to a frequency limit adequate t certify the draft 1000BaseT
protocol set. These tests will be undertaken utilizing an approved vendor hand held Cat 6 tester and test
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 192

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 data will be printed in summary sheet format and provided on disk accompanying the database software.

It is a requirement that all test results be forwarded to the cabling system vendor, the cabling system
vendor will be required to underwrite and certify the enhance performance of the system based upon
the results presented.

1.10.9 Backbone Category 6 Cabling

When tested between the CIR (Computer Infrastructure Room) patch panel and the MCR (Main
Computer Room) patch panel the performance of the cabling shall conform to the following
requirements. These values are taken from ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

For this reason it is stipulated that the cable system chosen fully conforms to a premium cabling system
specification, and warranted as such for the whole system by the manufacturer.

1.10.10 Fibre Optic Cables

Fibre optic tests will be carried out on every fibre core; the tests will be carried out in accordance with
BS7718 configuration A. Multi-mode Fibre testing will meet requirements: IEC 60793-2 / ISO
11801/EIA-TIA526-14-A Type A1b. Single Mode Fibre testing will meet requirements: IEC 60793-2 /
ISO 11801/EIATIA 526-7

All Fibre Optic cores shall be tested with portable test equipment and test leads meeting the
requirements of clause A2.4.2 of BS7718.

The equipment to be used shall be submitted for approval prior to contract award. Once approved the
equipment to be used shall be calibrated in accordance with the requirements of the test equipment
manufacturer or national standards.

Delivered cable and laid cable tests are not required however, a Certificate of Conformance shall be
supplied with each cable reel and copies made available to the Firm.

Individual cable runs shall be traceable to the delivered cable drum certification.

Multimode Fibre tests will be carried out at 850nm and 1300nm from each end of the terminated fibre.
The optical power loss of installed backbone & interlink cabling links of length links of length L shall be
in accordance with the following requirements when measured using test equipment meeting its
requirements.

Wavelength (nm) Optical Loss (dB max.)

850 3.5 per Km

1300 1.5 per Km

Multimode Fibre Loss Specification

Single Mode Fibre tests will be carried out at 1310nm and 1550nm from each end of the terminated
fibre. The optical power loss of installed backbone & interlink cabling links of length links of length L
shall be in accordance with the following requirements when measured using test equipment meeting its
requirements.

Wavelength (nm) Optical Loss (dB max.)

1310 1.00 per Km

1550 0.25 per Km

Single Mode Fibre Loss Specification

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 193

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 The lifetime of test leads shall be stated and evidence shall be provided that the test leads used
throughout the installation are within that intended lifetime.

No index matching fluids will be used when testing fibre optic cores. All fibres will be cleaned with
surgical grade Isopropanol and lint free pads, the cabling contractor shall comply with the Control of
Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH) regulations 1992.

All results test results shall be submitted in soft-form using the test equipment manufacturers’
proprietary software system. Text files will not be accepted.
The software enabling the test results to be viewed by the client shall be provided as part of the contract.

The Sub-Contractor shall test every installed cable, at no additional cost and take corrective action to
ensure every cable meets the specification.
All patch cables, fly leads, etc. will be site tested for same parameters stated above.

1.10.11 System Certification

Full Category5e certification is required for this installation. The Cabling Contractor will state his
capability to supply this Certification and will use only system specified products and must quote,
within the response, any additional costs for Certification.

This certification must be backed by an original Manufacturer’s Guarantee (or similar) from the cabling
system.

The response must give full details of the Certification, including the period of warranty and current
and future protocols covered. The warranty certificate is to be issued no later than one month post
installation handover.

The response must give full details of the Certification, including the period of warranty and current
and future protocols covered. The warranty certificate is to be issued no late than one month post
installation handover

The response must quote the maximum attainable distance for all data rates and Protocols covered by
the Certification.

These guarantees shall be based upon test results obtained during testing of basic links as detailed in
the recommended performances stipulated in clause 11 of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

The backbone data grade balanced copper cabling is not required to be provided with a “channel
guarantee” but the components shall meet the same specifications as supplied by the same supplier as
the horizontal cabling.

There are no vendor protocol guarantee requirements for the voice grade balanced pair copper cabling.

A copy of the proposed warranty document for both the balanced pair copper and fibre optic cabling
shall be supplied and approved prior to the award of contract.

1.10.12 System Documentation

A complete as installed documentation package will be required at the completion of each phase,
which should include as a minimum:

 As installed drawings
 Test results in soft form, text files will not be acceptable
 Cable schedules
 Patch Frame layouts including scanner serial numbers.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 194

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

  Plus any accompanying certification, including]
 Certificates of conformity for installed products
 Certificates of conformity to published regulatory standards

The documentation should be produced as two hard paper copies supported by a magnetic media copy
in CD format and issued to the Engineer at the completion of the works.

The installation shall not be deemed complete until the Engineer has accepted the installation as
stipulated in 1.10.5.

1.10.13 PABX Specification

The PABX shall consist of the following equipment in 21U Rack

1 1 Attendant executive console with headset

2 1 Main System Box Direct Station collect
3 1 Battery back-up unit
4 1 12V 24Ah battery for extended back-up
5 1 Automatic mains-fail in the event of total system Failure – 8 direct lines
6 8 Analogue Trunks lines
7 4 ISDN Trunk Lines
8 12 Analogue Extension Ports
9 48 Digital Extension Ports
10 1 MOH Port and Music Player
11 Clearline Lightning Protection units for all extensions and lines
12 Remote Diagnostics and Service Modem
13 1 call Management system
14 1 Telephone Management Interface Port
15 Least cost routing
16 Port voice mail
17 Price to test and reconnect
18 PIMPHONY BASIC SOFTPHONE USER LICENCE
19 INTERNET ACCESS USING ISDN INCLUDING FIREWALL
20 PSITEK GSM INTERFACE UNIT (PREMICELL)

 Installation of the PABX system, with new materials and new cabling shall be priced, together
with programming of the system to suite the Class of Restriction requirements and system
commissioning and cut-over.

 Switchboard operator and other user training shall be included in the costs.

 12 months guarantee minimum on all equipment and materials supplied and installed together
with 12 months on-site free maintenance during the guarantee period.

 Telephone Instruments;

 High end Boss Secretary terminals with LCD display

 Basic Terminal without LCD display and function keys

1.11. DATA INSTALLATION

Provision for computer terminal outlets will comprise steel or plastic boxes complete with data socket
outlets and all related conduit work and/or trunking for carrying the data cabling. These facilities
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 195

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 shall provide a complete cable containment system, from the position of the servers, through to the
outlets in each of the affected areas. Cabling to the data outlets shall be provided as specified in the
Bills of Quantities.

1.12. LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Lightning protection systems in accordance with the requirements of BS 6651/1992 shall be installed.
This shall incorporate air terminal network, installed on the highest point and around the perimeter of
the roof, down conductors and an earth terminal.
Lightning protection installation shall, in general, consist of copper tapes of 25mm x 3mm section
with similar clips, test clamps and copper-bond earth rods which shall be mounted in positions as
indicated on the drawings.

1.13. AUTOMATIC VOLTAGE STABILISERS

The stabiliser shall be a solid state (electronic) unit rated at 300KVA; input voltage 415V, 50Hz with a
variation range of +/-25% and output voltage 400V, 50Hz with a variation range of +/-5%
maintained over the full range of input voltage variations (+/-25%) from zero to full load irrespective
of power factor, frequency variations and ambient temperature variations up to 45 degrees Centigrade.

Each phase shall have independent control of voltage. It shall have an input Circuit Breaker, a bypass
Switch and an output Circuit Breaker each rated at 630A TPN. The stabilizer shall maintain the
accuracy of each phase voltage even in the event of unbalanced input voltage, unbalanced load and
power factor.

It shall be as made by Ashley-Edison of UK/Malaysia or equal approved. It shall have an interface to

the BMS for display, monitoring and control.

1.14 UPS

The building will be equipped with a UPS which will serve all computer power outlet points, all
security cameras, access control, BMS, Fire Alarm and Evacuation System, PABX, and Main Server.
The UPS outlets shall be distinct in colour and pin configuration to avoid mistaken or deliberate
misuse by heavy current consuming appliances.

The UPS shall be rated at 40KVA with 3 phase input 415V, 50 Hz, and a 3 phase output 400V/220V
(+/-2.5%), 50Hz . It shall be of a reputable make such as APC or Power Tower or equal approved
and must have a local agent for easy maintenance. It shall have deep discharge sealed batteries enough
to last for 15 minutes on full load.

It shall have an interface to the BMS for display, monitoring and control.

1.15 POWER TRANSFORMER

The Power transformer shall be rated at 11KV/433V three phase, 50HZ, Dyn11 connection. It shall
comply with BS 171 and shall connected delta/star in accordance with the drawings. It shall be
double wound on a core of cold rolled, grain orientated sheet steel.

It shall ground mounted pattern, suitable for outdoor use, oil immersed, natural air cooled. (Type
ONAN).

 The following fittings are required for the transformer:

 Diagrams and rating plates,
 Lifting lugs,
 Earth terminal,
 Conservator with drain plug,
 Oil level indicator,

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 196

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

  Drain valve (To be used also for oil sampling),
 Skid type under-base
 Oil filler hole with plug
 Dehydrating (silica gel) breather
 Jacking lugs

The tank shall be manufactured from electrically welded mild steel and heat dissipation shall be by
radiators designed to keep the temperature rise within limits as specified below.

To give maximum protection, rust inhibiting, oil and heat resistant paint shall used on surfaces
comprising primer, 2 coats of good quality undercoat and 2 coats of bright aluminium. Bright
aluminium is the standard paint finish according to the Uganda Electricity Board standards.

The HV and LV windings shall be arranged concentricity on the core and shall be manufactured from
high conductivity copper. Installation materials will be to Class A of BS 2757 and designed to
withstand impulse voltage specified in 171.

The temperature rise after full load continuous operation at a maximum ambient of 45C shall be:-

Top oil temperature by thermometer: 55C

Windings temperature by resistance: 60C

The star point (neutral) of the secondary winding shall earthed at the transformer.

Other details:

Tapping: Off circuit, range + 5% to 5% in steps of 2.5

HV termination: Cable box for reception of PLIC, PVC or XLPE 4-core cable or single-core cables.

LV termination: same as for HV

Impedance: As specified in drawings

The necessary precaution shall be taken to avoid eddy currents circulating in the sheaths of the L.V.
cables.

All equipment shall be fully tropicalized and termite proof and units shall complete wit the first filling
of mineral oil.

1.16. Earthing

a) Earth electrodes shall be minimum 1200mm long by 15mm diameter hard drawn copper rod, and
shall be located at a convenient position as close as possible to the building. The terminal head of
each electrode shall be in a concrete inspection pit, with cover. If the resistance to earth is not
satisfactory with one electrode, then additional electrodes or an earth mat shall be provided as
directed by the Engineer.
b) Care should be taken that the neutral conductor does not become accidentally earthed.
c) In accordance with the UMEME's procedure of multiple neutral earthing, the neutral of the
supply is to be bonded to the earth pipe.
d) Earthing shall conform to the 17th edition of the IEE Regulations.

1.17 Access Control and Security

A central access control system shall be implemented for the facility. It will consist of access
points at major doors operated by either intelligent cards or biometric sensors. This will also be

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 197

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 linked to the security system through CCTV cameras disposed around the facility. There will be a
central control room.

In general, the security arrangements should provide for very limited access to building. Thus,
there should only be a single point of access to the building elevators which has provision for the
future inclusion of turnstiles or similar security system. The design should provide for 24 hour
secured access to the building that requires guests to check-in and the person that they are
meeting be called to verify the appointment.

Access control should be provided for the parking spaces, garage elevator lobbies, and for after
hour's elevator use. Access control should be provided in each typical elevator lobby with a
telephone provided for unexpected visitors to call the person they are meeting. Access control
should be able to provide reports of card key usage.

The fire escape staircase doors will under normal use have access control. This control will be
connected to the BMS System which will release the magnetic latches in case of a fire alarm.

1.18 Security Cameras (CCTV)

All emergency exit doors should be alarmed and have exterior cameras. These exterior cameras
should be sufficiently high above the ground to prevent tampering and the exterior areas should
be lit at night. Cameras should also be provided at all other entrances to the building, in the
parking elevator lobbies, in the central mechanical plant and at the garage entrance. Monitors
should be provided in the security office and at the reception desk. Cameras should be equipped
with video motion detectors and have digital recording of secured areas.

1.20 Testing and Inspection

1.20.1 Testing of Earthing System

The resistance of the earth continuity system, when measured between the main earthing point and
any other point in the installation, including all conduit and other metal work which may provide a
path to earth, shall not exceed 5ohms where steel conduit forms part or whole of the system, or 1.0
ohms if the earth continuity system is composed entirely of copper, copper alloy or aluminium. The
Contractor is expected to allow for any necessary additional materials required to achieve the above
resistance values.

1.20.2 Installation Testing

After completion and before commissioning, the entire installation shall be subjected to the following
tests and any faults found shall be rectified by the Contractor at no extra cost.

Polarity
All fuses and control devices shall be connected in live conductors only.

Insulation Resistance
When tested with a 500V DC supply, the insulation resistance between conductors of live lines, lines
and neutral, line and earth, neutral and earth shall not be less than 1 mega-ohm.

Earth Continuity Resistance

Resistance of earth continuity measured from a Distribution Board to the farthest end of a circuit
shall not exceed 0.5 ohms.

In addition to the above, the following tests and inspection shall be carried out where applicable:-
i. Phase rotation
ii. Earth loop impedance
iii. Operation of over current and earth fault relays by injection test.
iv. Operation of all other protective relays and devices
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 198

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 v. Levels of illumination
vi. Correct sequencing of all control equipment
vii. Visual inspection

1.21 COMMISSIONING AND SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION

The whole installation shall be tested to the statutory requirements of the Utility Company UMEME,
IEE Wiring Regulations, and commissioned in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS 199

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

23.0 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL
INSTALLATIONS

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 200

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 PREAMBLE TO SPECIFICATIONS AND BILLS OF QUANTITIES .................................... 203

1.1 Project Description .......................................................................................................................... 203
1.2 Performance Specification .............................................................................................................. 203
1.3 Tender Documents .......................................................................................................................... 203
2 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS205
2.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 205
2.2 Materials ............................................................................................................................................. 205
2.2.2 Copper tubing ................................................................................................................................... 205
2.2.5 PVC pressure pipe-work ................................................................................................................ 206
2.2.6 PVC soil pipe-work ........................................................................................................................ 206
2.2.7 Stop-cocks, taps and stop valves .................................................................................................. 206
2.2.8 Check valves..................................................................................................................................... 206
2.2.9 Ball valves ......................................................................................................................................... 206
2.2.10 Cisterns............................................................................................................................................... 206
2.2.11 Pressed steel storage tanks .............................................................................................................. 206
2.2.12 Waste fitment traps .......................................................................................................................... 207
2.3 Workmanship ............................................................................................................................................. 207
2.3.1 Water service installations ............................................................................................................. 207
2.3.2 Sanitary service installations ........................................................................................................... 207
2.3.3 Pipe supports for suspended pipe-work ...................................................................................... 207
2.3.4 Jointing pipes .................................................................................................................................... 208
2.3.5 Cast iron joint fittings ...................................................................................................................... 208
2.3.6 Solvent welded joints ....................................................................................................................... 208
2.3.7 Connection of tubing to cold storage tanks, hot water cylinders and sanitary fittings ........ 209
2.3.8 Fixing Sanitary-ware and Fittings .................................................................................................. 209
2.3.9 Pipes built into structures ............................................................................................................... 209
2.3.10 Setting Valves .................................................................................................................................... 209
2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT ...................... 212
2.4.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................ 212
2.4.2 Fixed Hose Reel Installation ................................................................................................................... 212
2.4.2.1 Hose Reels ........................................................................................................................................ 212
2.4.2.2 Water ................................................................................................................................................. 212
2.4.2.3 Booster Pumps Set for Hose Reels .............................................................................................. 212
2.4.2.4 Pipe-work ......................................................................................................................................... 212
2.4.3 Sprinkler System ........................................................................................................................................ 212
2.4.4 Portable fire Extinguishers ...................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.5 Dry Riser ..................................................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.5.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.5.2 Size ...................................................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.5.3 Inlets ................................................................................................................................................... 213
2.4.5.4 Landing Valve Fire Hydrant and Hose Reel ............................................................................... 213
2.4.5.5 Earthing ............................................................................................................................................. 213
2.5 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS ............. 214
2.5.1 General ........................................................................................................................................................ 214
2.5.2 Mechanical Installations ........................................................................................................................... 214
2.5.2.1 Scope of Works ................................................................................................................................ 214
2.5.2.2 Water Supply System ....................................................................................................................... 214
2.5.2.3 Plumbing pipe-work ........................................................................................................................ 214
2.5.2.4 Foul Water and Soil Waste Drainage Pipe work ........................................................................ 214
2.5.2.5 Storm Water Drainage Pipe work ................................................................................................. 214
2.5.2.6 Schedules of Sanitary Fittings ........................................................................................................ 214
2.6 ADA Requirements................................................................................................................................... 214
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 201

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 2.7 Toilet Fixtures and Partitions .................................................................................................................. 215
2.8 Water Saving Fixtures ............................................................................................................................... 215
2.9 Hose Bibs .................................................................................................................................................... 215
2.10 Drains .......................................................................................................................................................... 215
2.11 Wet Stacks................................................................................................................................................... 215
2.12 Supply .......................................................................................................................................................... 215
2.13 Storm Drainage .......................................................................................................................................... 215
2.14 Water Efficient Landscaping ................................................................................................................... 215
2.15 Fire Protection / Life Safety ................................................................................................................... 216
2.19 Smoke Detection ....................................................................................................................................... 216
2.22 Audible Alarm Signals .............................................................................................................................. 216

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 202

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 1 PREAMBLE TO SPECIFICATIONS AND BILLS OF QUANTITIES

1.1 Project Description

This project is the Ministry Headquarters at Plot 3-7, Kabalega Crescent, Luzira for Ministry of Water and Environment.

In this section, the Mechanical Installations are described.

The main scope of work shall comprise:

Mechanical Installations as follows:

Plumbing and Drainage Installations consisting of: -

- Water supply including storage tanks and distribution pipe-work.

- Foul water drainage pipe-work, including connection to the public sewer.
- Storm water drainage pipe-work.
- Sanitary fittings installation.

Storm Water Harvesting

Fire Fighting Installations consisting of: -

- Fixed water hose reels, pumps and pipe-work for the hose reels.
- Portable dry powder fire extinguishers.

1.2 Performance Specification

The specifications contained in the documents are for the guidance of the Tenderers
who are expected to review the performance requirements and ensure that these are
met with or bettered. The Tenderers may offer their own equipment specifications for
the Client’s consideration.

1.3 Tender Documents

All Tenderers must check the documents received by them and any discrepancies
should be brought to the attention of the Engineer. The tender documents’ package
contains the following.

(i) Drawings

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 203

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

MECHANICAL DRAWINGS

In volume 4 of 4 of the Bidding Documents

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 204

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

2. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTALLATIONS

2.1 General

2.1.1 Authoritative Standards and Codes of Practice

The authoritative standards referred to in these Specifications are the British Standards and Codes of
Practice.

Should the contractor wish to substitute them with any other authoritative Standards or Codes of
Practice for any referred to in the Specification, he must submit details of any such Standards or
Codes of Practice with two copies of the document for approval of the Engineer. Approval will only
be given to use alternative Standards or Codes of Practice if the Engineer considers the proposed
Standards or Codes of Practice will produce work of a standard equal or better than that of the
specified Standards or Codes of Practice.

The whole of the plumbing works is to be executed by a registered plumber and drain layer in strict
accordance with the Regulations of the Local Authorities and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.1.2 Working drawings

For all work within buildings the Contractor shall produce drawings showing details of his proposals.
The drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval and no work shall commence until
the drawings have been approved.

2.1.3 As constructed drawings

On completion of the works, the Contractor shall prepare drawings showing the work as constructed.
The drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. When the drawings have been
approved, the Contractor shall provide one negative and two prints to the Client for his retention.

2.2 Materials

2.2.1 Galvanized mild steel pipe-work

All galvanised mild steel pipe-work up to 65 mm nominal bore shall be manufactured in accordance
with BS 1387 medium grade with tapered pipe threads in accordance with BS 21. All fittings shall be
of malleable iron and manufactured in accordance with BS 143.

All galvanised mild steel pipe-work from 80 mm nominal up to 150 mm nominal bore shall be
manufactured in accordance with BS 1387 medium grade with screwed and bolted flanges for the
jointing of pipes to valves and other items of plant. The flanges shall comply with the requirements
of BS 10.

2.2.2 Copper tubing

All copper tubing used shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 2871 from C106 “Phosphorous
De-oxidised Non-arsenical Copper in accordance with BS 1172”.

Joints in pipe work and connections to equipment shall be made with soldered capillary fittings and
connection in accordance with BS 864.

2.2.3 Cast iron work above ground

For internal pipe-work used above ground, cast iron pipe-work and fittings shall comply with BS 416
medium grade with spigot and socket joints. Inspection covers on branches, tees, elbows, etc., shall
comply with the requirements of BS 1211.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 205

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 2.2.4 Asbestos cement soil waste and ventilation pipes

Asbestos cement pipes for soil waste and ventilation pipe shall comply with the requirements of BS
582. Spigot and socket joints shall be jointed with a cement/sand mortar or fibrous cementitous
jointing compound.

Asbestos cement sewerage pipes and fittings shall comply with the requirements of BS 3656 with
asbestos cement sleeve joints with rubber rings complying with the requirements of BS 2494 Class C.

2.2.5 PVC pressure pipe-work

All PVC pipe for cold-water services shall comply with the requirements of BS 3505 and all fittings
shall comply with BS 4346.

PVC pipes and fittings shall be solvent welded using the pipe manufacturers approved cement.

2.2.6 PVC soil pipe-work

PVC soil pipe-work and fittings shall comply with the requirements of BS 4514.

2.2.7 Stop-cocks, taps and stop valves

Stopcocks for underground use shall be plug cock pattern or screw down pattern complying with the
requirements of BS 2580.

Taps and stop valves shall be screw down pattern and small comply with the requirements of BS 1010
fitted with washers complying with BS 3457. Hose taps and hose connections shall have outlet noses
screwed in accordance with the requirements of BS 1010.

2.2.8 Check valves

Check valves of 65 mm diameter and under shall comply with the requirements of BS 5154, with
copper alloy body and cover, gunmetal doors with leather facing discs and end screwed female.

All gate valves up to 65 mm nominal bore shall be of bronze construction and shall be in accordance
with B.S.1952.

2.2.9 Ball valves

All ball valves for use in connection with hot and cold-water services shall be of
Portsmouth type in accordance with the requirements of BS 1212 and constructed of
bronze or other non-corrosive material.

2.2.10 Cisterns

Polythene or polypropylene cisterns shall comply with the requirements of BS 4213.

Galvanised cisterns shall comply with the requirements of BS 1968 Class ‘C’ or BS 2456.

2.2.11 Pressed steel storage tanks

Pressed steel storage tanks shall comply with the requirements of BS 1564 and shall be complete with
cover, access manhole, ventilators, overflow, and drain. The whole of the tank steelwork and plates
shall be galvanised before the tank steelwork and plates shall be galvanised before dispatch. After
completion of erection the tank shall be painted with an approved etching primer and two coats of
bitumen based aluminium paint externally and two coats of non-toxic black bitumen paint internally.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 206

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

2.2.12 Waste fitment traps

Where standards or deep seal traps are specified they shall be of non-ferrous material in accordance
with BS 1184 or PVC

2.3 Workmanship

2.3.1 Water service installations

All work shall be carried out in accordance with C.P. 342 and C. P. 310 and to the approval of the
Engineer.

The pipes shall be supported in their final position and adjusted before any joints are made. Pipes in
buildings shall be positioned as close as practicable to walls, ceilings and columns. Sufficient drain
points and automatic air vents shall be provided to ensure the system functions correctly. Valves and
other user equipment shall be installed with adequate access for operation and maintenance.

Where valves and other operational equipment are unavoidably installed beyond normal reach or in
such a position difficult to reach, extension spindles with brackets shall be provided. Screwed piping
shall be installed with sufficient number of unions to facilitate easy removal of valves and fittings and
to enable alterations of pipe works to be carried out without the need to cut the pipe.

Allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction of pipe-work, precautions being taken to
ensure that any forces produced by pipe movements are not transmitted to valves or equipment of
plant. All screwed joints to piping and fittings shall be made with P.T.F.E tape.

2.3.2 Sanitary service installations

Soil, waste and vent pipe systems shall be installed in accordance with BS 5572 and to the approval of
the Engineer. All sanitary appliances shall be installed in accordance with BS 6465. All waste fittings
shall discharge into a gully trap before passing to a sewer by way of a manhole.

Roding and inspection facilities shall be provided within the drainage system in position where they
are easily accessible. Where roding facility is not in a position such that access is not easily available, a
branch shall be extended so as to provide suitable roding eye. Roding eye shall be provided at the
bottom of stacks.

Vent stacks shall be terminated above roof level and shall have a plastic or galvanised steel guard at
the top.

2.3.3 Pipe supports for suspended pipe-work

Pipe runs shall be secured by pipe clips, connected to pipe hangers, walls brackets, or trapeze type
supports. U-bolts shall not be used as a substitute for pipe clips without the approval of the
Architect. The maximum permissible vertical spacing of supports in metres shall not exceed one and
a half time the distance given for horizontal runs.

For cast iron and asbestos cement spigot and socket jointed pipes, a the pipes shall be generally
supported at every socket joint by means of either holder bats secured rigidly to the structure, or
purpose made straps for attachment to rigid steel support brackets. Where holder bats are used, they
shall comply with the requirements of BS 416.

The maximum permissible horizontal spacing of support in metres for steel copper pipe and tube is
given in the following table:

Size Normal Bore Copper Tube Steel Tube

to BS 2871 to BS 1387
12mm 1.25m 2.0m
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 207

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 20mm 2.0m 2.5m
25mm 2.0m 2.5m
32mm 2.5m 3.0m
38mm 2.5m 3.0m
50mm 2.5m 3.0m
65mm 3.0m 3.5m
80mm 3.0m 3.5m
100mm 3.0m 4.0m
125mm 3.5m 4.5m
150mm 4.5m 5.5m

2.3.4 Jointing pipes

Joints shall be made strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The Contractor shall
make use of the technical advisory services offered by manufacturers for instructing pipe jointers in
the methods of assembling joints. Before making any joints, all jointing surfaces shall be thoroughly
cleaned and dried and maintained in such condition until the joints have been completely made or
assembled.

Not withstanding any flexibility provided in the pipe joints, pipes must be securely positioned to
prevent avoidable movement during and after the making of the joint. The space between the end of
the spigot and the shoulder of the socket of flexibly jointed pipes when jointed shall be as
recommended by the manufacturer or ordered by the Engineer.

After flexibly jointed pipes, other than PVC pipes have been jointed the gaps between the barrel of
the pipes and the internal face of the socket shall be sealed with puddle clay, uncaulked rope yarn or
other approved material. The rope yarn or other material must have been treated so as not to support
bacterial growth.

Where loose collars are used to join pipes cut for closures, special tools shall be employed to keep the
inside of the pipe flush and the collar concentric with the pipe while the joint is being made.

2.3.5 Cast iron joint fittings

Cast iron detachable joint collar and flanges shall be tested by striking lightly with a spanner
immediately before they are placed and if they fail to ring true shall be set aside and not incorporated
in the work until proven sound.

The flanges shall be correctly positioned and the component parts including any insertion ring cleaned
and dried.

Insertion rings shall be fitted smoothly to the flange without folds or wrinkles. The face and
boltholes shall be brought fairly together and the joints shall be made gradually and evenly tightening
bolts in diametrically opposed positions. Only standard length spanners shall be used to tighten the
bolts. The protective coating, if any, of the flange shall be made good when the joint is completed.

Bolt threads shall be wrapped with PTFE tape where directed before use. No washers shall be used
on flanged pipe-work to be laid below ground. Bolts shall be as specified and shall be of the correct
length, leaving a maximum of two threads exposed.

2.3.6 Solvent welded joints

Only the solvent cement recommended by the manufacturer for his pipe joint system shall be used
and his instructions on the making of the joint shall be closed followed. Excess solvent cement shall
not be applied to the inside of the pipe socket and all surplus solvent shall be removed from the joint
and the pipe. Any solvent falling on the trench formations shall be removed by excavating the
contaminated soil.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 208

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 Solvent welded pipes jointed outside the trench shall not be lowered into the place
until the elapse of time recommended by the manufacturer. The time allowed for
curing shall be increased with lower temperature.

2.3.7 Connection of tubing to cold storage tanks, hot water cylinders and sanitary fittings

Each connection of tubing to cold water storage tanks shall be made by drilling a hole in the tank side and
using a long screw, union and two back nuts all well screwed up in non-toxic
approved jointing compound (red-lead shall not be used). Joints of tubing to
flanged and bossed connections of hot water cylinders shall be made with boiler
screw, union and back nut screwed up in jointing compound.

Connections to sanitary fittings shall be made with 450 mm length copper tubing bent to shape as
required with copper to iron couplings at each end, and joint to union of fittings and tubing.
Alternatively, plastic flexible tubing covered in a stainless steel braid may be used.

2.3.8 Fixing Sanitary-ware and Fittings

All sanitary-ware and fittings shall be left in a clean and good condition to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.

All fittings shall be fixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Lavatory basin brackets shall be cut and pinned to walls in cement mortar including making good
rendering, tiling or plastering, etc.

2.3.9 Pipes built into structures

The outside surface of all pipes and special castings to be built into structures shall be thoroughly
cleaned immediately before installation. Where ordered protective coating to metal pipes shall be
removed from the sections to be built in while the external surfaces or fireclay and concrete pipes
shall be roughened to form a key for concrete or mortal. Sheathing to steel pipes shall be cut away
from the sections to be built-in. After erection, the protection shall be completed by applying
approved bituminous material around the barrels of pipes at the junctions with structures.

Pipe passing through water retaining walls and floors shall, where possible, be built into the structure
in-situ. Shuttering shall be formed closely to the outside of the pipes, and concrete shall be placed
and compacted thoroughly round pipe and puddle flange, if any.

Where fixing in the course of construction is not possible, temporary openings in structures, formed
to the dimensions shown by the Engineer, shall be left where indicated or directed to accommodate
the subsequent erection of pipes and special castings.

In water retaining structures, they shall taper to a smaller dimension towards the external faces of
structures and shall include where indicated water stop. In basements, dry chambers at pumping
stations etc., temporary openings shall taper to a smaller dimension towards the internal faces of
structures and shall also include, where indicated a water stop.

Prior to in-filling, all surfaces against which fresh concrete is to be placed shall be prepared as
specified, while the external surfaces of pipe-work shall be prepared as described in this clause.

2.3.10 Setting Valves

Care must be taken to prevent damage to all valves, fire hydrants and the like, and their ancillary
equipment. Valves etc. and ancillary apparatus shall be stored in clean conditions and in a manner
that excludes all water. Where directed, head stocks, motors, gearing or indicators shall be removed,
adequately labelled for identification, stored carefully in weather-proof premises and be reconnected
after erection of the valve. Frost cocks shall be kept clean and free from obstruction. Electrical
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 209

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 equipment shall be protected from damp and the damp-proofing seals shall remain intact until the
electrician is ready to connect up the equipment.

The gunmetal faces and seats of all valves must be kept clean. No valve shall be closed without first
wiping the faces with a clean cloth. The cavity beneath the valve door shall be thoroughly cleaned by
hand.

In the event of accident, fouling matter shall be either dissolved or carefully removed by methods that
do not involve scraping or gunmetal faces.

All valves shall be set so that the operating spindles are truly vertical unless otherwise detailed or
directed.

Every stuffing box shall be examined when the main is charged with water and leaking boxes shall be
adjusted or repacked with square plaited lubricated hemp packing of approved manufacture. The
stuffing box shall not be so tightly packed as to materially affect the friction of the packing on the
spindle.

No air valve shall be stored before erection in the open sunlight, or upside down to expose the balls
and air cavities. Air valves shall be checked before the main is charged to ensure that the balls and
faces are not scored or split and that there is no dirt or other deleterious materials in the cavities of
the body. All air nozzles shall be probed to see that they are clean.

The direction of opening of the valve shall be indicated on the headstock and on the underside of
hydrant covers.

2.3.11 Testing of Pipelines

The Contractor shall provide all water, fittings, pipe stoppers, test pumps, pressure gauges and the
necessary labour and tools for the hydraulic testing or pressure pipelines and air testing of drains and
sewers.

Pipelines shall be tested hydraulically in sections during the course of construction.

Testing shall be applied to prove the structural soundness of the various units in the line, including
pipes, valves and anchorages, and to prove the water tightness of the line.

The pipeline or pipe-work shall be filled with water in such a manner as to prevent any shock or water
hammer and allow for the complete evacuation of air, and kept under observation for leakage at static
head for twenty-four hours. If there are no leakages the pressure shall be raised slowly to the required
test pressure for the pipeline and maintained at that pressure for a period long enough for the
Engineer to examine the whole section under test, or not less than 4 hours which ever is the longer
period.

Thereafter, for a period of 2 hours the leakage of water, as measured by the amount drawn into the
pump to maintain the pressure must not exceed a rate of 0.1 litre per mm nominal internal diameter
per kilometre length of main per 30 metres head for each 24 hours. All pipes or joints which are
proved to be in any way defective shall be cut out, remade and retested as often as may be necessary
until a satisfactory test is obtained and any work which fails or is proved by test to be unsatisfactory in
any way shall be cut out and re-done by the Contractor at his own expense.

In addition to the tests in separate sections, on completion the main shall be tested in whole or in
parts to the same pressure and by the same procedure as that outlined for individual sections.

2.3.12 Sterilization of water mains

The pipelines after testing shall be thoroughly flushed out and cleaned.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 210

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 After the Engineer has approved the cleaning the Contractor shall completely fill the pipelines with
water to which he shall have added chloride of lime or other approved chemical to give a
concentration of free chlorine of 50 mg. per litre.

Chlorine gas must not be injected direct into the main from a cylinder otherwise than through an
approved chlorinator and care must be taken to ensure that there is no flow back into the preceding
sections of main.

The method used for sterilisation shall be approved by the Engineer and the solution allowed to
remain in the pipelines for not less that 6 hours, or more than 24 hours. Chlorine residual tests shall
then be taken at the end of the main furthest from the dosing point. The sterilisation process shall be
repeated until the free chlorine residual is not less than 5 mg per litre. The chlorine residual tests shall
be carried out on Site in order to obtain an accurate reading of the free chlorine present.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 211

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

2.4 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT

2.4.1 General

In this section, the fire fighting appliances to cover the whole building are specified. They will
generally consist of fixed wall mounted water hoses and portable hand fire extinguishers. The water
hoses will derive their water from the water tanks to be installed through a set of booster pumps.

The fire fighting installation shall conform to the Fire Officers Committee Rules 29 th Edition (British)
or equivalent.

2.4.2 Fixed Hose Reel Installation

2.4.2.1 Hose Reels

The fixed water hose reels shall be of the recessed swinging type. The hose shall be 19mm internal
diameter and 35m long, made from non-kinking, reinforced rubber hosepipe wound on a metal reel
and fixed to the wall at a suitable height.

The outlet end shall be fitted with a controllable plastic jet spray nozzle to give instantaneous fingertip
control of spray patterns and shut off. It shall be capable of delivering 0.4 litre/s at a distance of 6m
from the nozzle. A pressure of 200Pa shall be required at each nozzle. The nozzle shall have an
internal diameter of 5mm or 6mm, and with a pressure of 200Pa at this point shall produce a
horizontal throw of water of approximately 8m and about 5m high.

The Engineer shall confirm on Site, the actual positions shown on drawings. The hose reels shall be
recessed in walls with a glass lockable cover.

2.4.2.2 Water

Water shall be derived from the water tanks to be installed.

2.4.2.3 Booster Pumps Set for Hose Reels

The Contractor shall supply and install a Fire fighting Booster Pump Set.

The set shall consist of 2 No. Electric motor driven centrifugal pumps connected in parallel on a duty
standby basis. Each pump shall deliver a minimum of 3.0 litres per second at a head of 200Pa at the
nozzle of the furthest hose reel.

The pump set shall be complete with control valves, a pressure vessel, pressure switches, automatic
starter and all accessories.

2.4.2.4 Pipe-work

The main pipe-work to the hose reels shall be 50mm diameter with 25mm branch to the hoses. All
pipes shall be galvanised steel Class C.

2.4.3 Sprinkler System

A wet type sprinkler system shall be provided to protect all the levels. It shall be designed in
accordance with BS 5306 and BS EN 12259. It shall consist of an underground reinforced concrete
water storage tank of capacity 90m3 located at the back, together with pumps as follows:
An electric fire pump, a diesel fire pump and a jockey pump to maintain pressure in the pipe line. The
pipe work shall be 100mm, Class C black steel pipe with welded joints. The sprinkler head shall be
quartzoid bulb of appropriate temperature rating and shall be a type to be mounted flush with the
ceiling.
PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 212

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

2.4.4 Portable fire Extinguishers

Provision shall be made for the installation of appropriate type of hand extinguishers, identified as
follows: -

Type E Dry Powder 9kg to BS 3465

The type and location of extinguishers shall be as shown on appropriate drawings. The weight is for
guidance only. Actual positions shall be confirmed on Site. In public areas, the extinguishers shall be
recessed in the walls with an appropriate glass cover.

2.4.5 Dry Riser

2.4.5.1 General

The contractor shall supply and install a dry riser made of galvanised steel piping, class C, to BS 1387
(red band) screwed and socketed. The fitting shall be of steel or malleable galvanised iron. All changes
in direction of piping shall be made with standard bends and elbows must not be used.

2.4.5.2 Size

The internal diameter of the riser shall be 100mm. The end of each riser shall terminate in an
automatic air valve at the top, which will open automatically to allow air in the pipe to escape, but
close when the pipe is full of water.

2.4.5.3 Inlets

The inlets to the riser shall be sited on the external wall of the building at 760mm above ground level
and not more than 12m from the riser. The inlets shall be within 18m of an access road suitable for
the fire brigade pumping vehicle. Two inlets each consisting of 65mm instantaneous male coupling
and a back-pressure valve shall be fitted to each dry riser. The inlets should be protected by a cap
secured with a suitable length of chain and a 25mm drain valve should be fitted at the lowest point of
the riser.

The inlets should be fitted inside a metal box, the door of which shall be glazed with wired glass and
its position indicated by "Dry riser inlet" painted on the inner face of the glass in 50mm block letters.
The door shall be fastened by a spring lock which can be opened from outside without the aid of a
key after the glass is broken.

2.4.5.4 Landing Valve Fire Hydrant and Hose Reel

On each floor, along the dry riser, a landing valve of 65mm diameter shall be provided.

2.4.5.5 Earthing

Each dry riser shall be electrically earthed.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 213

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 2.5 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

2.5.1 General

The Mechanical works as part of the Contract shall consist of the complete supply, installation,
commissioning, testing, guarantee and maintenance during defects liability period of the new
mechanical installations as detailed in the Specifications, Drawings, and Bills of Quantities to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.

2.5.2 Mechanical Installations

2.5.2.1 Scope of Works

The work under this section consists of the supply and installation of the following:

(a) Water Supply

(b) Plumbing pipe-work

(c) Foul water and soil waste drainage pipe-work

(d) Storm water drainage

(e) Sanitary fittings

(f) Fire fighting installations

2.5.2.2 Water Supply System

The water supply shall be derived from the National Water and Sewerage Corporation (NWSC) main
lines.

2.5.2.3 Plumbing pipe-work

All plumbing pipe-work shall be new and of HDPE or PPR. The minimum diameter of plumbing
pipe-work shall be 20mm. Alternatively PE pipes of an approved manufacturer may be used.

2.5.2.4 Foul Water and Soil Waste Drainage Pipe work

All drainage pipe-work, fittings and accessories shall be new and as made by KEY-TERRAIN or
equal and approved. The minimum diameter of drainage pipe shall be 38mm.

2.5.2.5 Storm Water Drainage Pipe work

All storm water drainage pipe work, fittings and accessories shall be new and as made by KEY-
TERRAIN or equal and approved.

2.5.2.6 Schedules of Sanitary Fittings

Sanitary fittings shall be new, and made out of Vitreous China, white in colour. All sanitary fittings
shall be as that made by TWYFORDS or ARMITAGE SHANKS, IDEAL STANDARDS or equal
approve However, in all cases, the Contractor shall provide samples to the Engineer for approval
before bulk ordering.

2.6 ADA Requirements

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 214

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

 A Toilet room for people with disabilities has been included on the ground floor in accordance with
local codes.

2.7 Toilet Fixtures and Partitions

The toilets should be equipped with back to wall mounted toilets, urinals plus granite stone vanity with full
height ceiling partition between water closets and include a wood door with a 5" gap at top and
bottom.

2.8 Water Saving Fixtures

Water saving fixtures should be provided throughout the project. Provide for urinals with sensors.

2.9 Cold Water System

Should be a complete mains pressure system. Distribution should be facilitated by the following
equipment:

 Booster pumps
 Backflow preventors
 Pressure reduction valves complete with bypass, strainers and pressure gauges
 Distribution piping systems
 Zone isolation valves for restroom and riser shut off

2.10 Hose Bibs

Hose bibs should be provided in major mechanical rooms, loading dock, under the counter in all
toilet rooms, and around the perimeter of the project for landscaping and cleaning purposes.

2.11 Drains

A drain utilizing a self-priming trap should be provided in each toilet room.

2.12 Wet Stacks

Wet stacks outboard or in the core should be provided, with consideration given to providing
approximately one wet stack per 10,000 usable square feet for pantries and executive toilets. Include
riser(s) strategically located in the typical floor plan for future executive toilets.

2.13 Supply

If required, the cistern should be sized to provide a minimum of one day’s supply of water plus
independent storage of the sprinkler system supply, as required by local code.

2.14 Storm Drainage

Cast iron pipes for storm drainage should provide for a 100 year storm, with retention/detention in
accordance with local code. In addition, internal downspouts with overflow drains should be provided
for all roof areas discharge to the storm sewer system.

2.15 Water Efficient Landscaping

To comply with LEED intentions, landscape irrigation shall be provide by rain water harvesting.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 215

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY

2.16 Fire Protection / Life Safety

The Contractor shall supply and install the following fire fighting installations as described in the
Specifications and Drawings: -

- Dry powder portable fire extinguishers, 9kg wall mounted complete with mounting bracket.
- Wet riser with Hose reels.
- Booster pump set for the Hose reels.
- Sprinkler system for all levels
- An electric fire pump, a diesel fire pump and a jockey pump

2.17 Smoke Detection

The fire protection system should include smoke control with an automated smoke detection system,
stair pressurization, pull stations and ADA speaker horns and strobes. All system controls should
have annunciation and centralized control panels in the fire, BMS and security control room.
Additional remote annunciation panels are to be provided in the engineering office and any other
locations required by code. The addressable smoke detection system should consist of detectors in
electric switchgear rooms, electric closets, telecom closets, elevator machine rooms, and all other areas
not protected by the sprinkler system.

2.18 Audible Alarm Signals

Audible alarm signals should be transmitted to the floor of alarm and the floor above. In addition,
activation of an alarm zone of the life safety system should cause an inquiry tone to sound on all other
floors.

PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS FOR MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 216

PROPOSED NATIONAL WATER QUALITY REFERENCE LABORATORY